JP6684864B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  In the conventional game machine, a game machine including a special symbol display device provided with a plurality of LEDs is known.

  In such a gaming machine, by making the lighting pattern of the LED of the special symbol display device corresponding to each type of jackpot irregular, it is determined whether or not the jackpot has occurred from the display content of the special symbol display device. It has been proposed to make it difficult (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP, 2013-099682, A

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that the interest of the game may be lost.

  In view of the above background, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention is a game machine capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to a player, and a judging means (main control board) for judging whether or not to execute the special game. 110), a first display unit (first special symbol first indicator 60, second special symbol first indicator 61) that executes a variable display for displaying the result of the determination, and the first display unit. And a second display part (first special symbol second display 80, second special symbol) which is provided separately from the first display part and which starts and stops the changing display in response to the start and stop of the variable display on the first display part. It includes a symbol second display 81), a, in the first display unit, the variable display by changing a plurality of times lighting positions of the plurality of LED is carried out, in the second display portion, the variable display of varying said by blinking a plurality of times one LED during execution The middle display is performed, and the lighting cycle of the LED in the changing display on the second display section is delayed from the change cycle of the LED lighting position in the changing display on the first display section. To do.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a figure showing an example of a front view of a game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the perspective view of the game machine in the state which opened the glass frame. It is a figure showing an example of the back side perspective view of a game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed on the display area of a 1st image display apparatus. It is a figure showing an example of a block diagram of the whole game machine. It is a figure showing an example of the jackpot determination table of the jackpot lottery. It is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol determination table. It is a figure showing an example of a jackpot game control table. It is a figure which shows an example of the special winning opening and closing control table of a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the special winning opening and closing control table of a big hit. It is a diagram showing an example of a game state setting table at the end of the jackpot game. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern determination table of the special symbol for the 1st starting opening. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern determination table of the special symbol for the 2nd starting opening. It is a figure which shows an example of the prior determination table of the jackpot lottery for the 1st starting opening. It is a figure which shows an example of the prior determination table of the jackpot lottery for the 2nd starting opening. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a hit determination table for a normal symbol, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a stop symbol determination table of a normal symbol, (c) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern determination table of a normal symbol , (D) is a diagram showing an example of an opening mode determination table for the second starting opening. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol hold storage area of the main RAM 101c, (b) is a diagram showing an example of each storage unit of the special symbol hold storage area, (c) is a normal symbol hold storage area of the main RAM 101c The figure which shows an example, (d) is a figure which shows an example of each memory | storage part of a normal symbol reservation storage area. It is a figure which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interruption process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 2nd starting opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the gate detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric power control process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing a special symbol storage determination process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing a special symbol variation process in the main control board. It is a figure showing special symbol stop processing in a main control board. It is a diagram showing a jackpot game process in the main control board. It is a diagram showing a jackpot game end processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the general / universal electric power control process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing a normal symbol variation process in the main control board. It is a diagram showing an auxiliary game process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the data creation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the output control process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing the types of commands transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is a diagram showing the types of commands transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is the figure which shows the main processing in the production control section. It is the figure which shows the timer interruption processing in the production control section. It is the figure which shows the first half of production control section command analysis processing in the production control section. It is the figure which shows the latter half of the production control section command analysis processing in the production control section. It is the figure which shows the special figure reservation memory renewal processing in the production control section. It is the figure which shows the fluctuation production pattern decision processing in the production control section. It is the figure which shows one example of the fluctuation production pattern decision table for production mode 1. It is the figure which shows one example of the fluctuation production pattern decision table for production mode 2. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation production pattern determination table for 2nd starting openings. It is the figure which shows the announcement production decision processing in the production control section. It is a figure which shows an example of a notice type determination table. It is a figure showing an example of a symbol notice mode decision table. It is the figure which shows the notice pattern of design notice production and production example 1. It is the figure which shows the notice pattern of design notice production and production example 2. It is a figure which shows an example of the music notice type determination table for losing. It is a figure which shows an example of the song prediction mode determination table for jackpots. It is a figure showing example 1 of an effect displayed on a music notice pattern and an image display part. It is a figure showing example 2 of an effect displayed on a music notice pattern and an image display part. It is a figure showing example 3 of an effect displayed on a music notice pattern and an image display part. It is a figure showing example 4 of an effect displayed on a music notice pattern and an image display part. It is a figure showing example 5 of an effect displayed on a music notice pattern and an image display part. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the step-up advance notice mode determination table for a loss, (b) is a figure which shows an example of a step-up advance notice aspect determination table for a big hit. It is a figure showing example 1 of an effect displayed on a step-up notice pattern and an image display part. It is a figure showing example 2 of an effect displayed on a step-up notice pattern and an image display part. It is a figure showing example 3 of an effect displayed on a step-up notice pattern and an image display part. It is the figure which shows the big hit production pattern decision processing in the production control section. It is the figure which shows one example of the big hit production pattern decision table. It is the figure which shows the data formation processing in the production control section. It is the figure which shows the data output processing in the production control section. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the display result stopped displayed as a result of a variable display. It is a figure which shows the example 1 of a display of the information displayed on a 1st game information display apparatus, a 2nd game information display apparatus, and a 1st image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of a display of the information displayed on a 1st game information display device, a 2nd game information display device, and a 1st image display device. (A) is a figure which shows the example 3 of a display of the information displayed on a 1st game information display device, a 2nd game information display device, and a 1st image display device, (b) is a 1st game information display device and 2nd It is a diagram showing a display example 4 of information displayed on the game information display device and the first image display device. It is a figure which shows the first half of the display example 5 of the information displayed on a 1st game information display device, a 2nd game information display device, and a 1st image display device. It is a figure which shows the latter half of the display example 5 of the information displayed on a 1st game information display device, a 2nd game information display device, and a 1st image display device. It is a figure which shows the example 6 of a display of the information displayed on a 1st game information display device, a 2nd game information display device, and a 1st image display device. It is a front view of a first game information display device. It is a rear view of the first game information display device. FIG. 3 is a sectional view of a first game information display device. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of a state where the first game information display device is disassembled. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a first game information display device. It is a front view of the 1st display board. It is a rear view of the 1st display substrate. It is a rear view of a cover member. It is a schematic diagram showing a control configuration concerning the first game information display device. It is a front view of the 1st game information display device circumference concerning a modification. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between a coating member and an identification means. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a display example of a first game information display device. FIG. 11 is a front view of a first game information display device according to a modification. FIG. 11 is a rear view of the first game information display device according to the modification. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of a first game information display device according to a modification. It is a sectional view of a state where a first game information display device according to a modification is disassembled. It is an exploded perspective view of the 1st game information display concerning a modification. It is a schematic diagram showing the control composition concerning the 1st game information display concerning a modification. It is a schematic diagram showing the control composition concerning the 1st game information display concerning a modification. It is a perspective view from the front of the second game information display device. It is a perspective view from the back of the second game information display device. It is a front view of a second game information display device and its surroundings according to a modification.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Structure of game machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 4. FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 1 with the glass frame opened according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the back surface side of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed in the display area of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 in the embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, and a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3. A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a in which the game balls flow down is formed.

  The outer frame 2 is provided with a decorative plate 2b on the lower front surface of a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion is opened in the front-rear direction, and is a fixing member (for example, a nail or a stopper, etc.) to the island facility of the game store. ) Fixed through.

  The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism portion 6 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism portion 6 as a fulcrum. Has been done. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed to the front, so that various devices provided on the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. It becomes possible to carry out maintenance, etc.

  The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism portion 7 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism portion 7 as a fulcrum. There is. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

  An opening (window) 8 that opens in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the top of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member (glass plate, acrylic plate, etc.) 8a is attached so as to close the opening from the rear. The game area 5a is visible through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

  Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, a sound output device 9 including a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of lamps (LEDs), and a game ball paid out from a game ball payout device 100 described later. The upper tray 11 for storing a plurality of game balls, the lower tray 12 for receiving and storing the game balls that have not flowed into the upper tray 11 and flowed into a predetermined ball channel, and shoot the game balls. And a firing operation device 13 that can be operated.

  The voice output device 9 is provided at two places on the upper portion of the glass frame 4 with a space provided therebetween, and outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), etc. so that a sound (music, voice) effect is produced. It has become. In addition, a plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and produce an effect by lighting by changing the irradiation direction of the light of each lamp (LED) and the emission color.

  The upper saucer 11 has a bottom surface in which the storage portion 11a of the game ball is inclined downward toward the direction side (right direction) of the firing operation device 13, and a ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. . When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 side by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

  In addition, a production button device 16 and a selection button device 18 which function as an input device for performing a determination operation and a selection operation relating to various productions to be described later are provided side by side in the central front side portion of the upper tray 11. ing.

  The effect button device 16 moves the effect button 17 that can perform an operation such as a decision operation, an effect button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 5) that detects an operation on the effect button 17, and moves the effect button 17 up and down. An effect button drive motor 17b (see FIG. 5) is provided to allow the player to input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1.

  The selection button device 18 is connected to the cross key 19 (see FIG. 5) capable of performing an operation such as a selection operation, and a cross key detection switch 19a connected to the cross key 19 for detecting an operation on the cross key 19. (See FIG. 5) is provided so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1.

  Further, a lending / returning operation unit 20 capable of performing a lending operation of gaming balls and a returning operation of a storage medium such as a card in which the remaining money is stored is provided in a rightward portion of the upper tray 11. When the lending button (not shown) of the lending / returning operation unit 20 is operated, the balance of the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) attached to the gaming machine is subtracted to lend the gaming ball, When the return button (not shown) of the lending / returning operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

  Between the upper receiving tray 11 and the lower receiving tray 12, an overflow ball flow path (not shown) for guiding the game balls that cannot fit into the upper receiving tray 11 to the lower receiving tray 12 is formed. In addition, a saucer full detection switch 32a for detecting that the game balls are full in the lower saucer 12 is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path, and the fullness of the lower saucer 12 is detected by the saucer full detection switch 32a. In the meantime, the payout of game balls by the game ball payout device 100 described later is stopped.

  The firing operation device 13 includes a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a firing handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, and a touch sensor for detecting that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 5) and a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 5) including a variable resistor whose resistance value changes according to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. When it is detected by the touch sensor 15a that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feeding solenoid 11b is actuated to send the game balls one by one.

  On the game board mounting frame 3, a game board mounting portion 25 for mounting a plate member constituting the game board 5, a game ball launching device 26 for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a, and a game board mounting. A lock mechanism 27 for locking the frame 3 and the glass frame 4 in a closed state, and an opening detection switch 31a for detecting opening of the glass frame 4 are provided.

  The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in a recessed chamber shape having an opening at the front in the approximate center of the upper portion of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided in the back of the recessed chamber of the game board mounting portion 25, and various devices provided on the back surface side of the game board 5 through the opening are provided behind the game machine 1. Face.

  The game ball launching device 26 directs a launching member 28 for launching a game ball, a launching solenoid 28b for driving the launching member 28 (see FIG. 5), and the launching member 28 toward the lower left end of the game board. A launch rail 29 that inclines upward is provided, and a stopper 30 that stops the game ball A at a launch position that is an inclined lower end portion of the launch rail 29 is provided. When the game ball A sent by the ball feed solenoid 11b is received at the launch position, the game ball A is launched toward the game area 5a by the operation of the launching member 28.

  The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25, and the front end portion of the cylinder in which the key hole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4. Then, when the exclusive key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame. The lock of 4 is released and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

  At a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, a partition member composed of a curved inner rail 35 and a curved outer rail 36 located outside the inner rail 35 is provided, and the partition member forms a substantially circular game. A region 5a is formed. A launch ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 to guide the game ball launched by the game ball launching device 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a. In addition, a guide member 37 that guides the game ball toward the center of the game area 5a is provided at the lower right of the game area 5a, and the game ball that has flowed down is provided at the most downstream part of the game area 5a. An out port 39 is formed for guiding the outside of the area (collection part of the game board mounting frame 3).

  A frame-shaped decorative frame 40 that restricts the entry of the game sphere into the interior, which is a so-called center case, is provided in the approximate center of the game area 5a, and an effect space 40a is formed inside the decorative frame 40. Further, a warp device 41 for introducing a game ball flowing down the game area 5a into the decoration frame 40 is provided on a side portion of the decoration frame 40, and a warp device 41 is introduced below the decoration frame 40. A stage unit 42 is provided that rolls the game ball to make it flow down below the decorative frame 40.

  In the lower part of the game area 5a, a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) general winning openings 43 in which game balls can be always won (balls) are provided at intervals, and the general winning openings 43 are provided. When a game ball that has won (entered) is detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a (see FIG. 5), a predetermined number (eg, 10) of game balls are awarded from the game ball payout device 100 (see FIG. 3). It is paid out as a ball.

  In the left area (first downflow area) and the right area (second downflow area) of the game area 5a, there are provided general-purpose gates 44 through which game balls can pass. When the ball is detected by the gate detection switch 44a, a normal symbol hit lottery is performed. The winning lottery for normal symbols will be described later.

  Directly below the stage part 42 below the game area 5a is provided a first starting opening 45 in which game balls can always win (win), and the first starting opening 45 can win (win). When the played game balls are detected by the first start opening detection switch 45a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are paid out from the game ball payout device 100 (see FIG. 3) as prize balls. In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot lottery (special game determination) of a first special symbol (identification information) described later is performed.

  Immediately below the first start opening 45, the game ball is closed from the closed state (basic mode) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win (ball entry) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a winning lottery for ordinary symbols). A variable starter 46 is provided which is converted into an open state (special mode) in which a prize (ball entry) is possible or easy.

  The variable starting portion 46 has a second starting opening 47 through which a game ball can be won (ball entering), and a second starting opening detection switch 47a for detecting the winning (ball entering) of the game ball into the second starting opening 47. A movable member 48 for converting (changing) the second starting port 47 between a closed state and an open state and a second starting port opening / closing solenoid 48b for opening / closing the movable member 48 are provided. Then, when the second starting opening 47 is in the closed state, it is impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the second starting opening 47 is in the open state, the winning of the game ball ( It is possible or easy to enter.

  In addition, when the game ball that wins (enters) the second start opening 47 is detected by the second start opening detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 3) are provided to the game ball payout device 100 (see FIG. 3). ) Is to be paid out as a prize ball. In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot lottery of a second special symbol (identification information) described later is performed.

  Above the guide member 37 and downstream of the right-side universal gate 44, a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won (ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning the special symbol jackpot lottery) A variable winning portion 49 is provided which is converted from (basic mode) to an open state (special mode) in which a game ball can be won (ball).

  In the variable winning portion 49, a big winning opening 50 in which a game ball can be won (winning), and a big winning opening detection switch 50a for detecting the winning of the game ball in the big winning opening 50 (winning). An opening / closing member 51 for converting (changing) the special winning opening 50 into a closed state and an open state, and a special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b for opening / closing the opening / closing member 51 are provided. When the special winning opening 50 is closed, it becomes impossible or difficult to win the game ball. When the big winning opening 50 is open, the game ball is won (winning ball). ) Is possible or easy.

  Further, when a game ball that has won a prize (ball) into the special winning opening 50 is detected by the special winning opening detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15) are output from the game ball payout device 100 (see FIG. 3). It is paid out as a prize ball.

  The first starting port 45 can enter a game ball that has passed through the left side area (first downflow area) of the game area 5a, but a game ball that has passed through the right side area (second downflow area) of the game area 5a. He is not allowed to enter the ball. On the other hand, the second starting port 47 can enter a game ball passing through either the left side region or the right side region of the game region 5a, but the game ball passing through the right side region of the game region 5a is guided by the guide member 37. Since it is guided to the second starting port 47, it is easier to enter the second starting port 47 than the game ball that has passed through the left side region of the game region 5a. Therefore, in the time saving game state described later, it is better to shoot a game ball toward the right side region of the game region 5a (so-called right hit). Further, the special winning opening 50 can enter a game ball passing through the right side area of the game area 5a, but cannot enter a game ball passing through the left side area of the game area 5a. There is. That is, it is possible to separate the game balls from the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, and the special winning opening 50.

  On the back side of the game board 5, there is a collecting channel (not shown) for receiving and collecting the game balls that have won in the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47 and the special winning opening 50 and collecting them. A prize confirmation detection switch 52a for detecting a game ball flowing down the gathering passage is provided at the lower end of the gathering passage. The winning confirmation check switch 52a detects again the game ball after being detected by the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detecting switch 45a, the second starting opening detecting switch 47a, and the special winning opening detecting switch 50a. In this case, it is used to determine whether or not the prize is proper.

  On the lower left outside the game area 5a, the first special symbol first indicator 60, the second special symbol first indicator 61, the normal symbol first indicator 62, the first special symbol reservation first indicator 63, 2nd special symbol reservation 1st indicator 64, normal symbol reservation 1st indicator 65, the number of rounds indicator 66 which displays the number of rounds when the big hit state which is mentioned later (special game state) occurs, the big hit state (special game State), and during the time saving game state to be described later, the right-handed first indicator 67 that urges the player to shoot a game ball toward the right side region of the game region 5a (so-called right-handed state), when power is restored. A high-probability game state indicator 68 that indicates that the high-probability game state is in the high-probability game state, which will be described later, and a time-saving game state that is displayed in the time-short game state when the power is restored. From the time saving game status display 69 The first game information display unit 59 is provided that.

  The first special symbol first display 60 is a variable for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins the first starting opening 45 (ball entry). It is a display device, the second special symbol first display device 61 displays the result of the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins the second starting opening 47 (ball entry) (notification) ) Is a variable display device, and the normal symbol first display device 62 displays the result of a normal symbol hit lottery performed on the condition that the game ball wins the prize (ball) in the universal gate 44 (notification) ) Is a variable display for.

  With the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol, a random number value for jackpot symbol determination is obtained when the game ball wins (ball entry) in the first starting opening 45, and the obtained jackpot symbol determination random number value and jackpot determination value. Corresponds to determining whether or not it is a “big hit”. In addition, when the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol is performed, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol first display device 60, and the stop display of the first special symbol showing the lottery result after a predetermined time has elapsed. Is done. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

  With the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol, the random number value for jackpot symbol determination is obtained when the game ball wins (ball entry) in the second starting opening 47, and the obtained jackpot symbol determination random number value and jackpot determination value. Corresponds to determining whether or not it is a “big hit”. In addition, when the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol is performed, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed on the second special symbol first display 61, and the stop display of the second special symbol showing the lottery result after a predetermined time has elapsed. Is done. That is, the stop display of the second special symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

  The first special symbol first indicator 60 and the second special symbol first indicator 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding indicators in the variable display of each special symbol have a predetermined interval or order. Blinks. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, one or a plurality of LEDs are turned on in a mode showing the result of each jackpot lottery (mode showing the type of the special symbol). That is, the type of jackpot to be described later can also be determined by the lighting mode of the LEDs of the first special symbol first indicator 60 and the second special symbol first indicator 61.

  In the present embodiment, "big hit" means a state in which the right to execute the big hit state (special game state) is obtained in the big hit lottery of the first special symbol or the big hit lottery of the second special symbol. The "big hit state (special game state)" means a game state in which a round game in which the special winning opening 50 is opened in a predetermined mode is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times or 15 times).

  It should be noted that the maximum number of times of opening and the maximum opening time of the special winning opening 50 in each round game are predetermined, but a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the big winning opening 50 even before the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time are reached. When (e.g., 9) wins (enters a ball), one round game ends. That is, the "big hit game (special game state)" is a game state that is advantageous to the player who is likely to win the prize ball. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpot states (special game states) having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided, which will be described later in detail.

  Ordinary symbol hit lottery, when the game ball passes through the public figure gate 44, the random number value for hit symbol determination is acquired, and the obtained random number for hit symbol determination is compared with the hit determination value to be “win”. This corresponds to determining whether or not there is. In addition, when the winning symbol of the ordinary symbol is performed, the variable symbol of the ordinary symbol is displayed on the ordinary symbol first display 62, and the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol indicating the lottery result is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed. That is, the stop display of the normal symbols is a notification of the lottery result.

  In addition, the normal symbol first display 62 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and in the variable display of the normal symbols, the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in an order. When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, one or a plurality of LEDs are turned on in a mode showing the result of the winning lottery (mode showing the type of the normal symbol). That is, it is also possible to determine the hit type, which will be described later, by the lighting mode of the LED of the normal symbol first display 62. In addition, the normal symbol first display 62 may be configured by one LED.

  In the present embodiment, "winning" refers to a state in which a right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) is obtained in a winning lottery for ordinary symbols. The "hit state (auxiliary game)" means a game state in which the second starting opening 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  In addition, the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the hit state (auxiliary game) are predetermined, but even before reaching the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time, the second starting port 47 is opened. When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9) wins (balls), the winning state (auxiliary game) ends. That is, the "hit state (auxiliary game)" is a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is easily executed (start condition is easily established). In this embodiment, a plurality of types of hitting states (auxiliary games) having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided, which will be described later in detail.

  The first special symbol reservation first display 63 is constituted by a plurality of LEDs, the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol (first special symbol) stored when the game ball wins the first starting opening 45 (ball entry) This is for displaying the number of rights (first hold) for performing variable display of symbols), and is turned on or blinking in a manner indicating the first hold number. It should be noted that the maximum number of the first holdings is four, but the number may be less than or more than four.

  In addition, when there is one first hold, the LED on the left side of the first special symbol hold first indicator 63 is turned on, and when the first hold is two, the first special symbol hold first indicator 63 The two LEDs are lit. Moreover, when the first hold is three, the left LED of the first special symbol hold first display 63 blinks and the right LED is turned on, and when the first hold is four, the first special Two LEDs of the symbol holding first display 63 blink.

  The second special symbol reservation first display 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol (second special) stored when the game ball wins (ball entry) in the second starting opening 47 This is for displaying the number of rights (second hold) for performing variable display of symbols), and is turned on or blinking in a manner indicating the number of second hold. It should be noted that the maximum number of the second holdings is four, but the number may be less than or more than four.

  If the second hold is one, the LED on the left side of the second special symbol hold first display 64 is turned on, and if the second hold is two, the second special symbol hold first display 64 The two LEDs are lit. Moreover, when the second hold is three, the left LED of the second special symbol hold first display 64 blinks and the right LED is turned on, and when the second hold is four, the second special Two LEDs of the symbol holding first display 64 blink.

  In the following description, the phrase "first pending number" may be expressed as "first pending number" and the phrase "second pending number" as "second pending number".

  The normal symbol holding first display 65 is constituted by a plurality of LEDs, and performs a random lottery of the normal symbol (variable display of the ordinary symbol) stored when the game ball wins (ball entry) in the universal symbol gate 44. It is for displaying the number of rights (general drawing reservation) for, and lights up or blinks in a mode showing the number of general drawing reservation. It should be noted that although the maximum number of four universal figure reservations is stored, the number may be less than or more than four.

  In addition, when there is one universal figure hold, the LED on the left side of the normal symbol hold first indicator 65 lights up, and when there are two ordinary figure hold, the two LEDs of the ordinary symbol hold first indicator 65 Lights up. In addition, in the case of three universal figure hold, the left LED of the normal symbol hold first indicator 65 blinks and the right LED lights up, and in the case of four universal figure hold, the normal symbol hold first The two LEDs of the display 65 flash.

  In the following description, the phrase "the number of reserved universal figures" may be referred to as "the number of reserved universal figures".

  In addition, the 1st special symbol 1st indicator 60 and / or the 2nd special symbol 1st indicator 61 can also be comprised by 7 segment LED. For example, if you win the jackpot lottery for special symbols, "7" is stopped and displayed, and if it is lost, "-" is stopped and displayed. It is good to repeat ". It should be noted that at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, since the previous stop result of the variable display is displayed, it is easy to understand that the variable display has started by starting from turning off the LED.

  The number-of-rounds indicator 66 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) occurs, and is an LED in a predetermined mode that indicates the number of rounds when the jackpot game is started. The lighting of the LED is started, the LED continues to be turned on during the jackpot game, and the LED is turned off at the end of the jackpot game. For example, if the number of rounds is a jackpot game of 8 times, only the 4th LED from the left is lit, and if the number of rounds is a jackpot game of 15 times, the 4th to 7th LEDs from the left are lit. .

The right hitting first indicator 67 is composed of one LED, and shoots a game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a during the big hit state (special game state) and during the time saving game state (so-called right). The LED is lit during the big hit state (special game state) and during the time saving game state.
In addition, the right-handed first display 67 starts the lighting of the LED at the start of the opening effect in the jackpot game, and continues to light the LED during the jackpot game, regardless of which kind of jackpot is the jackpot. When transitioning after the game ends, the LED is turned off when the short game state ends. If the big hit is won during the short game state at that time, the lighting of the LED is continued. If the short-time gaming state does not shift to after the big hit game, the LED is turned off at the end of the big hit game. That is, when the lighting of the LED of the right-handed first display 67 starts once, the lighting of the LED is continued until the gaming state (special gaming state, time saving gaming state) in which the right-handed striking is finished.

The high-probability gaming state indicator 68 is composed of one LED, and is for displaying that it is in the high-probability gaming state when the power is restored. When the power is restored, the high-probability gaming state is shown. In that case, the LED lights up (so-called morning lamp).
The high-probability gaming state indicator 68 starts lighting the LED if the gaming state when the power supply is restored is the high-probability gaming state, and continues to light up the LED during the high-probability gaming state. When the high probability game state ends, the LED is turned off.

The time saving game status indicator 69 is composed of one LED, and is for displaying that the time saving game status is in effect when the power is restored. If the time saving game status is in effect when the power is restored, The LED lights up (so-called morning lamp).
It should be noted that the time saving game status indicator 69 starts lighting the LED when the gaming status when the power is restored is the time saving gaming status, and continues to light the LED during the time saving gaming status. When is finished, the LED is turned off.

  On the lower left game board 5 inside the game area 5a, the first special symbol second indicator 80, the second special symbol second indicator 81, the normal symbol second indicator 82, the first special symbol reservation first 2 indicator 83, the second special symbol reservation second indicator 84, the normal symbol reservation second indicator 85, and the right to urge to shoot a game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a (so-called right hitting) A second game information display device 79 including a hit second display 87 is provided.

The second game information display device 79 has a first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and a second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), which will be described later, as compared with the first game information display device 59 provided outside the game area 5a. ) Is provided near. Thus, the second game information display device 79 is provided closer to the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) than the first game information display device 59. , The position is conspicuous to the player, and the second game information display device 79 is easier to recognize than the first game information display device 59.
Further, the upper part of the second game information display device 79 provided in the game area 5a also serves as a passage route for the game balls flowing down the game area 5a. As described above, by providing the second game information display device 79 at the position forming the passage of the game ball, the space is effectively used and the player can easily recognize the space.

  The first special symbol second display 80 is a variable for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins the first starting opening 45 (ball entry). Is a display device, the second special symbol second display 81 displays the result of the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins the second starting opening 47 (ball). ) Is a variable display, the normal symbol second display 82 displays the result of a normal symbol hit lottery performed on the condition that the game ball wins (ball) to the universal figure gate 44 (notification) ) Is a variable display for.

  The 1st special symbol 2nd indicator 80 or the 2nd special symbol 2nd indicator 81 is respectively constituted by one LED, and the LED of the corresponding indicator in the variable display of each special symbol blinks at a predetermined interval. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode (a big hit mode or a lost mode) showing the result of each big hit lottery. The display of the first special symbol second display 80 or the second special symbol second display 81 is the first effect displayed in the left side area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 described later. The design, the second effect symbol displayed in the central area, the fourth effect symbol following the third effect symbol displayed in the right area may be referred to as the fourth symbol because it is the fourth effect symbol.

  Here, the first special symbol second display 80 will be described in detail. The production control board 130 receives the special figure variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the variation display of the first special symbol is started, and will be described later based on that the special symbol variation display data is set. The display control data is created in step S1500, and the created display control data is output in step S1600, which will be described later, so that the first special symbol second display 80 starts changing (flashing), and the first special When the production control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, and the special symbol stop display data is set, in step S1500 described later. The display control data is created, and the created display control data is output in step S1600, which will be described later. Special symbol fluctuation of the second display 80 (flashing) is stopped (turned on or off).

The display mode of the first special symbol second display 80 is as follows.
(1) With the start of variation of the first special symbol, the LED of the first special symbol second indicator 80 starts blinking, and during the change of the first special symbol, the LED of the first special symbol second indicator 80. Keeps blinking.
(2) When the first special symbol when the big hit lottery is won (big hit) is stopped, the LED of the first special symbol second indicator 80 is turned on, and the next variable display is started after the jackpot game is over. The lighting of the LED of the first special symbol second display 80 continues until.
(3) When the special symbol stops when the big hit lottery is lost (miss), the LED of the first special symbol second indicator 80 is turned off, and the first special symbol second until the next variable display is started. The extinction of the LED of the display 80 continues.

  In addition, the variation start timing of the first special symbol second display 80 and the variation stop timing are variation start of the effect symbol 70a and the first special symbol displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 described later. It is synchronized with the timing and the fluctuation stop timing.

  In addition, whether the first special symbol second display 80 and the second special symbol second display 81 display a variable display corresponding to the first special symbol or a variable display corresponding to the second special symbol However, since the display timing and the display mode are the same, the description of the second special symbol second display 81 will be omitted. In addition, the timing of the start of variation and the timing of variation stop of the second special symbol second display 81, the variation start of the effect symbol 70a and the second special symbol displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 described later. It is synchronized with the timing and the fluctuation stop timing.

  Incidentally, the first special symbol second display 80 and / or the second special symbol second display 81, when displaying the special symbol in a stopped manner, displays only whether or not it is a big hit as a result of the big hit lottery. , 1st special symbol 1st indicator 60 or 2nd special symbol 1st indicator 61 it consists of plural LED, it is possible to indicate also the kind of special symbol as a result of the big hit lottery.

  The normal symbol second display 82 is composed of one LED, and the LED blinks at a predetermined interval in the variable display of the normal symbol. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on or off in a mode showing the result of the winning lottery (a winning mode or a losing mode).

  Specifically, the production control board 130 receives the universal figure variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started, and the ordinary symbol variation display data is set. Display control data is created in step S1500, which will be described later, and the created display control data is output in step S1600, which will be described later, so that the variation (blinking) of the normal symbol second display device 82 starts, and the normal symbol When the variable display is stopped, the effect control board 130 receives the normal symbol fixing command transmitted from the main control board 110, and the display control is performed in step S1500 described later based on that the normal symbol stop display data is set. Data is created, and the created display control data is output in step S1600, which will be described later. Pattern variations of the second display 82 (flashing) is stopped (turned on or off).

The display mode of the normal symbol second display 82 is as follows.
(1) With the start of variation of the normal symbol, the LED of the normal symbol second display device 82 starts blinking, and during the variation of the normal symbol, the LED of the normal symbol second display device 82 continues to blink.
(2) When the normal symbol when the winning lottery is won (win) is stopped, the LED of the normal symbol second indicator 82 is turned on, and the normal symbol number is started until the next variable display is started after the winning game is finished. LED of 2 indicator 82 continues lighting.
(3) When the ordinary symbol is stopped when the lottery is lost (hit), the LED of the ordinary symbol second indicator 82 is turned off, and the ordinary symbol second indicator 82 is displayed until the next variable display is started. The LED remains off.

  Incidentally, the normal symbol second display 82, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, only displays whether or not it hits as a result of the winning lottery, but like the normal symbol first display 62, a plurality of LEDs It is also possible to display the type of ordinary symbol as a result of the big hit lottery.

  The first special symbol reservation second display 83 is configured by a plurality of LEDs similarly to the above-mentioned first special symbol reservation first display 63, when the game ball wins the first start opening 45 (ball entry) It is for displaying the number of rights (first pending) for performing the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol (variable display of the first special symbol) stored in, and in a mode showing the number of first pending Lights or flashes. It should be noted that the maximum number of the first holdings is four, but the number may be less than or more than four.

  Specifically, when the production control board 130 receives the special symbol storage designating command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the first reserved number increases or decreases, based on the setting of the first special symbol reserved display data. Display control data is created in step S1500, which will be described later, and the created display control data is output in step S1600, which is described later, to display the first special symbol hold second display 83 (lighting, blinking, or off). Is done.

If the first hold is one, the LED on the left side of the first special symbol hold second indicator 83 is turned on, and if the first hold is two, the first special symbol hold second indicator 83 The two LEDs are lit. Further, when the first hold is three, the left LED of the first special symbol hold second display 83 blinks and the right LED is turned on, and when the first hold is four, the first special Two LEDs of the symbol holding second display 83 blink.
Further, the display (lighting, blinking) timing and the erasing (lighting off) timing of the first special symbol hold second display device 83 are the first hold icon H11 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 described later. It is synchronized with the display timing of H14 and the erase timing, and is synchronized with the numerical value change timing of the first reserved number display in the first reserved number display area SH1 described later.

  The second special symbol reservation second display 84 is configured by a plurality of LEDs similarly to the above-mentioned second special symbol reservation first display 64, when the game ball wins (ball entry) in the second starting opening 47. It is for displaying the number of rights (second hold) for performing the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol (variable display of the second special symbol) stored in, and in a mode showing the number of second hold Lights or flashes. It should be noted that the maximum number of the second holdings is four, but the number may be less than or more than four.

  Specifically, when the production control board 130 receives the special symbol storage designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the number of second reservations increases or decreases, based on that the second special symbol reservation display data is set. Display control data is created in step S1500, which will be described later, and the created display control data is output in step S1600, which will be described later, so that the second special symbol reservation second display 84 is displayed (lighted, blinking, or turned off). Is done.

If the second hold is one, the LED on the left side of the second special symbol hold second indicator 84 is turned on, and if the second hold is two, the second special symbol hold second indicator 84 The two LEDs are lit. Moreover, when the second hold is three, the left LED of the second special symbol hold second display 84 blinks and the right LED is turned on, and when the second hold is four, the second special Two LEDs of the symbol holding second display 84 blink.
Further, the display (lighting, blinking) timing and the erasing (lighting off) timing of the second special symbol holding second display 84 are the second holding icon H21 to be displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 described later. It is synchronized with the display timing of H24 and the erase timing, and is synchronized with the numerical value change timing of the second hold number display displayed in the second hold number display area SH2 described later.

  The normal symbol reservation second display 85 is composed of a plurality of LEDs similarly to the above-mentioned normal symbol first display, and is a normal symbol stored when the game ball wins the prize (ball) in the universal symbol gate 44. This is for displaying the number of rights (general figure hold) for performing the winning lottery (variable display of ordinary symbols), and is lit or blinking in a mode showing the number of common figure hold. It should be noted that although the maximum number of four universal figure reservations is stored, the number may be less than or more than four.

  Specifically, the production control board 130 receives the normal symbol storage designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the number of reserved universal symbols has increased or decreased, and is described later based on the fact that the normal symbol hold display data is set. The display control data is created in step S1500, and the created display control data is output in step S1600, which will be described later, so that the normal symbol holding second display 85 is displayed (lighted, blinked, or turned off).

  In addition, when there is one universal figure hold, the LED on the left side of the normal symbol hold second indicator 85 lights up, and when there are two ordinary figure hold, the two LEDs of the ordinary symbol hold second indicator 85 Lights up. In addition, when there are three universal figures, the left LED of the normal symbol retention second display 85 blinks and the right LED lights up, and when there are four universal figures, the regular symbol retention second The two LEDs of the display 85 blink.

  The right-handed second indicator 87 is composed of one LED similarly to the right-handed first indicator 67 described above, and is a right area of the game area 5a during the jackpot state (special game state) and during the time saving game state. The LED is lit during the jackpot state (special game state) and during the time saving game state, in order to display (right-handed display) urging the player to shoot a game ball (so-called right hitting). .

  Specifically, the effect control board 130 receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the jackpot game (opening) is started, and will be described later based on that the right hit display data is set. The display control data is created in step S1500, and the created display control data is output in step S1600, which will be described later, so that the display (lighting) of the right-hand second display 87 is started, and the game state is changed. When the production control board 130 receives the game state designating command transmitted from the main control board 110 and the game state is neither the jackpot game state nor the time saving game state, the right hit erasing data is set, and in step S1500 described later. The display control data is created, and the created display control data is stored in step S1600 described later. By output, right-handed display of the second display unit 87 (lighting) is completed (off).

The right-handed second display 87, regardless of the type of jackpot, starts lighting the LED at the start of the opening effect in the jackpot game, and continues to light the LED during the jackpot game to hit the jackpot. When transitioning after the game ends, the LED is turned off when the short game state ends. If the big hit is won during the short game state at that time, the lighting of the LED is continued. If the short-time gaming state does not shift to after the big hit game, the LED is turned off at the end of the big hit game. That is, when the lighting of the LED of the right-handed first display 67 starts once, the lighting continues until the gaming state (special gaming state, time saving gaming state) in which the right-handed striking is completed.
The lighting timing of the right-handed second display 87 is synchronized with the display timing of the image G10 “right-handed →→” displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 described later.
Further, the right-handed second display 87 is marked as "right-handed" as shown in FIG. 1, and the player recognizes the right-handed display more than the right-handed first display 67 in which nothing is written. This is an easy mode.

  A first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 including a liquid crystal display is provided in the interior of the effect space 40a, and a second image display device (sub liquid crystal) including a liquid crystal display is provided below the effect space 40a. 71 is provided, and a movable effect member 73 imitating the face of the character is provided above the effect space 40a.

  The first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 perform various effect displays according to the progress of the game. As the effect display, there are a customer waiting demonstration effect that is executed when the variable display of the special symbol is not performed and a variable display of the effect symbol 70a that is executed when the variable display of the special symbol is performed. In addition, it is possible to replace the effect symbol with the identification information.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, in the display portion of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, an effect symbol display area including a left side area, a central area, and a right side area is formed, and in the effect symbol display area. Variable display of the effect symbol 70a is performed by scrolling the displayed effect symbol 70a (first effect symbol, second effect symbol, third effect symbol) in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in the present embodiment).

  In addition, the effect symbol 70a is composed of, for example, a symbol indicating a number from "1" to "9", and a special special symbol first display device 60 and a second special symbol first display device 61 execute the special symbol. The variable display of the effect symbol 70a is performed corresponding to the variable display of the symbol. That is, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped in response to the stop of the variable display of the special symbol. As the effect design 70a, in addition to the design showing numbers, a design showing alphabets such as "A" to "F" may be provided.

  Specifically, the effect control board 130 receives the special figure variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the variation display of the special symbol is started, and determines based on the special figure variation pattern designation command. The variation effect pattern designation command is set, and in the data output process of step S1600 described later, the effect control pattern 140 outputs the variation effect pattern designation command, whereby the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is performed.

In the stop display of the effect symbol 70a, the effect symbol 70a is adapted to be stopped for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode (a losing mode, a big hit mode, etc.) indicating the result of the big hit lottery. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same effect symbols such as "777" or a combination of effect symbols having a regularity such as "753", and the lose mode is the other modes. is there. Note that the manner in which the effect symbols 70a are displayed in a variable manner is not limited to this, and may be scrolled in the left-right direction, or rotated (spin) on the spot.

  Specifically, the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, and the stop designation command is set, and the data of step S1600 described later. In the output process, the effect design 70a is stopped and displayed by being transmitted to the image control unit 140.

  Further, during the variable display of the effect design 70a, various effect images such as background images and characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device in accordance with the result of the jackpot lottery. By being displayed on 71 (sub liquid crystal), the player's expectation for a big hit (special game state) is increased.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, on the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, a first number of numbers corresponding to the first special symbol hold number (U1), which is the current first hold number, is displayed. First hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 for displaying the hold icons H11 to H14, and a second hold icon H21 to a number corresponding to the second special symbol hold number (U2) which is the current second hold number. The second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 for displaying H24, and the variable icon display for displaying the relevant variable icon TH corresponding (related) to the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) being executed. A region 70D is formed.

  The first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 are divided into the first display section 70B1, the second display section 70B2, the third display section 70B3, and the fourth display section 70B4 from the side closer to the variable icon display area 70D. In each of the display units 70B1 to 70B4, the first hold icons H11 to H14 corresponding to the first special symbol hold number (U1) are displayed. That is, the number of the first hold icons H11 to H14 is also increased / decreased corresponding to the increase / decrease of the first special symbol hold number (U1).

  The first display icon 70B1 displays the first hold icon H11 indicating the first hold for which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the second display part 70B2 displays the first special symbol second. The first hold icon H12 indicating the first hold for which the variable display of is executed is displayed, and the first hold icon H12 for indicating the first hold for which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed is thirdly displayed on the third display unit 70B3. The hold icon H13 is displayed, and the fourth display unit 70B4 displays the first hold icon H14 indicating the first hold in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth.

  Specifically, the effect control board 130 receives the first start prize designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the game ball wins the first start mouth 45, and based on the first start prize designation command. The determined hold icon display designating command is set and is output by the image control unit 140 in the data output process of step S1600 described later, whereby the first hold icons H11 to H14 are newly displayed. Further, the effect control board 130 receives the special figure fluctuation pattern transmitted at the time of starting the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the hold icon change designation command is set, and in the image control unit 140 in the data output process of step S1600 described later. By being output, the display of the first hold icons H11 to H14 is updated and displayed.

  The second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 are divided into the first display section 70C1, the second display section 70C2, the third display section 70C3, and the fourth display section 70C4 from the side closer to the variable icon display area 70D. In each of the display units 70C1 to 70C4, the second hold icons H21 to H22 corresponding to the second special symbol hold number (U2) are displayed. That is, the number of the second holding icons H21 to H24 is also increased / decreased corresponding to the increase / decrease of the second special symbol reservation number (U2).

  On the first display portion 70C1, a second hold icon H21 indicating the second hold in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed first is displayed, and on the second display portion 70C2, the second special symbol is displayed second. The second hold icon H22 indicating the second hold for which the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed is displayed on the third display portion 70C3. The hold icon H23 is displayed, and the fourth display unit 70C4 displays the second hold icon H24 indicating the second hold in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed fourth.

  Specifically, the effect control board 130 receives the second start winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the game ball wins the second starting opening 47, and based on the second start winning designation command. The determined hold icon display designating command is set, and the second hold icons H21 to H24 are newly displayed by being output by the image control unit 140 in the data output process of step S1600 described later. Further, the effect control board 130 receives the special figure change pattern transmitted at the start of the change of the second special symbol, the hold icon change designation command is set, and in the image control unit 140 in the data output process of step S1600 described later. By being output, the display of the second hold icons H21 to H24 is updated and displayed.

  The variable icon display area 70D is the first hold icon H11 or the second hold, which is displayed on the first display portion 70B1 of the first hold icon display area in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). The variable icon TH is displayed by moving (shifting) the second hold icon H21 displayed on the first display portion 70C1 of the icon display area, and at the end of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). The fluctuation icon TH disappears (erases). In addition, you may make the said change icon TH disappear in the middle of the change display of the special design (effect design 70a).

  Specifically, the effect control board 130 receives the special figure change pattern transmitted at the start of the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the hold icon change designation command is set, and the data output of step S1600 described later. In the process, the variation icon TH is displayed by being output by the image control unit 140.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, on the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, a first special symbol display area DZ1 for variably displaying the first special symbol (first specific identification information) and , A second special symbol display area DZ2 for variably displaying the second special symbol (second specific identification information), and a first special number for the simple display of the first special symbol reserved number (U1) with a mathematical number A display area SH1 and a second reserved number display area SH2 for simply displaying the second special symbol reserved number (U2) by a mathematical number are formed. The first special symbol and the second special symbol may be referred to as the fourth symbol, like the first special symbol second indicator 80 and the second special symbol second indicator 81. That is, the fourth symbol, the first special symbol second display 80, the second special symbol second display 81 and the first special symbol, there are two special symbols.

  In the first special symbol display area DZ1, the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol is corresponding to the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. The variable display of is stopped.

  Specifically, the production control board 130 receives the special figure variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the variation display of the special symbol is started, and the special symbol variation display designation command is set, which will be described later. In the data output process in step S1600, the image control unit 140 outputs the variable display of the first special symbol, and when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, it is transmitted from the main control board 110. The production control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command, the stop designation command is set, and is transmitted to the image control unit 140 in the data output process of step S1600 to be described later, whereby the stop display of the first special symbol is performed. Be seen. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol is adapted to be performed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the execution state of the variable display of the first special symbol is changed by the varying state of the first special symbol. Will be informed (suggested) to.

  In the second special symbol display area DZ2, the variable display of the second special symbol is started corresponding to the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol is corresponding to the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol. The variable display of is stopped.

  Specifically, the production control board 130 receives the special figure variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the variation display of the special symbol is started, and the special symbol variation display designation command is set, which will be described later. In the data output process in step S1600, the image control unit 140 outputs the variable display of the second special symbol, and when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, it is transmitted from the main control board 110. The production control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command, the stop designation command is set, and is transmitted to the image control unit 140 in the data output process of step S1600 described later, whereby the stop display of the second special symbol is performed. Be seen. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol is adapted to the variable display of the second special symbol, and the execution state of the variable display of the second special symbol is changed by the variation state of the second special symbol. Will be informed (suggested) to.

The first special symbol (first specific identification information) and the second special symbol (second specific identification information) are composed of, for example, a "○" symbol indicating a big hit mode and an "x" symbol indicating a loss mode, and the like. During the display, "○" symbol and "x" symbol are sequentially displayed, and when the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode, it is stopped and displayed as "○" symbol. When the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped and displayed in a lost manner, it is stopped and displayed as a "x" symbol. Further, the state in which the symbols stopped and displayed is displayed until the next change of the special symbol is started.
In addition, in FIGS. 69 to 74, which will be described later, when the special symbol (first special symbol (first specific identification information), second special symbol (second specific identification information)) is being variably displayed, “- It means that it is fluctuating.

  The first number-of-holds display area SH1 is designed to display the arithmetic numbers from "0" to "4" indicating the first number of special symbols (U1), and the number of first special symbols (U1) ) Is changed so that the arithmetic number displayed will change.

  The second hold number display area SH2 is adapted to display the arithmetic numbers from "0" to "4" indicating the second special symbol hold number (U2), and the second special symbol hold number (U2). ) Is changed so that the arithmetic number displayed will change.

  It should be noted that the first hold number display area SH1, the second hold number display area SH2, and the arithmetic numbers displayed in these areas are larger than the hold icon and the change icon, but the hold icon and the change icon are changed. The icon may be smaller than the hold icon or the variable icon so that the icon is easier to see (is conspicuous). Further, the special symbol hold first display 63, 64 or the special symbol hold second display 83, 84 is different from the LED of the visibility, the special symbol hold first display 63, 64 or the special symbol hold It may be smaller or larger than the LEDs of the second indicators 83, 84.

  Specifically, the production control board 130 receives the special symbol storage designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the first number of reservations or the second number of reservations increases or decreases, and the special symbol reservation number display designation command is set. In the data output process of step S1600, which will be described later, the hold number displayed in the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) is output by the image control unit 140. The number (first hold number, second hold number) display is updated and displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the holding icons (first holding icons H11 to H14, second holding icons H21 to H24), the variable icon TH, and the number of holdings are displayed on the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. The first hold number display, the second hold number display), and the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is displayed, but it is displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). You may do it.

  The movable effect member 73 is capable of performing a light emission effect by being emitted by a panel lighting device 74 having a plurality of lamps (LEDs or the like), and a panel drive device 75 configured by a solenoid, a motor, or the like. It is possible to perform a moving effect by moving vertically.

  Specifically, during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the effect pattern 70a emits light with a predetermined light emission color or an effect position that is located below the standby position that is located above. By moving to, a light emitting effect or a moving effect is performed. The light emitting effect and the moving effect may be performed by operating the effect button 17.

  On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, a main control device 110A having a main control board 110 that controls the progress of the game in general, and a game ball according to a payout control command from the main control board 110. A payout control device 120A that incorporates a payout control board 120 that controls the payout device 100, and an effect control device 130A that incorporates an effect control board 130 that performs effect control according to an effect control command from the main control board 110, A power supply device 180A having a power supply board 180 for supplying a power supply voltage to various control devices is provided, and a game information output terminal board 90 for outputting game information (game signal) is provided outside the gaming machine.

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  The main control board 110 comprehensively controls the progress of the game (basic operation). The main control board 110 includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores a game control program and the like, and a main control one-chip microcomputer 110m that includes a main RAM 110c that is a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input for main control. It has ports and output ports. The main CPU 110a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing relating to the game while utilizing the main RAM 110c, thereby controlling the controlled device and the result of the arithmetic processing. A predetermined command based on is sent to the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, or the like.

  Here, the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 are configured so that commands (data) can be communicated bidirectionally, and the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 are communicated with each other. The command (data) can be communicated in only one direction from 110 to the effect control board 130.

  At the input port of the main control board 110, a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting opening detecting switch 45a, a second starting opening detecting switch 47a, a big winning opening detecting switch 50a, a winning confirmation detecting switch 52a. The magnetic detection switch 53a, the radio wave detection switch 54a, the payout control board 120, and the like are connected. Detection signals and the like from various detection switches are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, and control processing according to the detection signals is performed.

  In the output port of the main control board 110, the second start opening / closing solenoid 48b, the special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, the first special symbol first indicator 60, the second special symbol first indicator 61, the normal symbol first display Device 62, first special symbol hold first indicator 63, second special symbol hold first indicator 64, ordinary symbol hold first indicator 65, round number indicator 66, right hitting first indicator 67, high probability A game status display 68, a time saving game status display 69, and a game information output terminal board 90 are connected. Drive control signals for controlling various solenoids, display control signals for controlling various display devices, and game information output from the game information output terminal board to the outside (hall computer, etc.) of the game machine through the output port. Is output.

  The payout control board 120 controls the payout of the game balls based on the receipt of the payout control command from the main control board 110, and also controls the launch of the game balls. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the game ball payout device 100 to control the payout of the game balls, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the game ball launching device 26 to control the launch of the game balls.

  The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a for performing arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b in which a payout program and the like are stored, a payout RAM 121c serving as a work area for arithmetic processing, an input port and an output port for payout control, and the like. The payout CPU 121a receives the operation clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown), reads out the payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs the arithmetic processing relating to the payout of the game balls while utilizing the payout RAM 121c. Or to send a predetermined command based on the result of the arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, the effect control board 130, or the like.

  An opening detection switch 31a, a saucer full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the gaming ball payout device 100, and the like are connected to the input port of the payout control unit 121.

  In the payout control unit 121, when an opening detection signal indicating that the glass frame 4 is opened is input from the opening detection switch 31a, a frame opening error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the opening detection signal of the opening detection signal is transmitted. When the input is stopped, a frame opening error cancellation designating command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. In the production control board 130, the opening error notification is performed when the frame opening error designation command is received, and the opening error notification is ended when the frame opening error cancellation designation command is received.

  A payout motor 100b provided in the gaming ball payout device 100 is connected to the output port of the payout control unit 121. When the payout control unit 121 receives the payout command from the main control board 110, it controls the payout motor 100b to pay out a predetermined number of game balls, and the payout ball detection switch 100a allows the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. When it is detected, the control for paying out the game ball is finished.

  The firing control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input port, an output port, and the like, which are not shown. The touch sensor 15a and the firing volume 15b are connected to the input port of the firing control unit 122, and the ball feed solenoid 11b, the firing solenoid 28b, and the like are connected to the output port of the firing control unit 122.

  When the firing control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15 by a touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, the firing solenoid 28b is allowed to be energized and detected from the firing volume 15b. When it is detected that the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 has been changed by the signal, the firing solenoid 28b is driven to fire the game ball so that the firing strength corresponds to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. There is.

  The firing solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the hitting member 28 is directly connected to the turning shaft, and when the turning shaft rotates, the hitting member 28 turns and hits the game ball A. . The operation of the firing solenoid 28b is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control unit 122, so that the game ball is fired for one minute. The number is about 99.9 (pieces / minute). That is, the game ball is shot about every 0.6 seconds.

  The effect control board 130 receives a command from the main control board 110 and controls the effect related to the game. The effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores an effect control program, an effect control unit 130m that includes a sub RAM 130c that is a work area for arithmetic processing, and a first image display device (main liquid crystal). ) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 for controlling the image control unit 140, the sound output device (speaker) 9 for controlling the sound control unit 150, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74. It is provided with a lamp control unit 160, a drive control unit 170 for controlling the effect button drive motor 17b and the board drive device 75, and an input port and an output port for effect control.

  The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the game program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and executes the arithmetic processing related to the performance while using the sub RAM 130c as a work area, thereby receiving the command from the main control board 110. Depending on the input signal from the switch button detection switch 17a and the cross button detection switch 19a, various control units (image control unit 140, sound control unit 150, lamp control unit 160, drive control unit 170) to perform various effects. Control to output (output data and commands).

  An effect button detection switch 17a, a cross key detection switch 19a, and the like are connected to the input port of the effect control board 130. In the effect control board 130, an effect button detection signal indicating that the effect button 17 has been operated is input from the effect button detection switch 17a, or a cross key detection indicating that the cross key 19 has been operated from the cross key detection switch 19a. When a signal (upper button detection signal, left button detection signal, lower button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, processing for executing an effect according to the detection signal is performed.

  In the output port of the production control board 130, the first special symbol second indicator 80, the second special symbol second indicator 81, the normal symbol second indicator 82, the first special symbol reservation second indicator 83, the second 2 special symbol reservation second indicator 84, normal symbol reservation second indicator 85, right hitting second indicator 87 is connected. A display control signal for controlling various display devices is output through the output port.

  The image control unit 140 receives a command from the effect control unit 130m and controls the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 to display a predetermined image. The image control unit 140 includes a display control CPU 140a that performs arithmetic processing, a display control ROM 140b that stores a display control program, a display control RAM 140c that is a work area during arithmetic processing, and a drawing that includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) as an image processor. A control unit 141, a CGROM 142 storing image data and the like, a VRAM 143 having a frame buffer and the like for temporarily storing drawing data generated from the image data, an output port and the like are provided.

  The display control CPU 140a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the display control program stored in the display control ROM 140b, and utilizes the display control RAM 140c to make the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device. Control for displaying an image on the (sub liquid crystal) 71 is performed.

  The display control ROM 140b is composed of a mask ROM, and has a display control program for displaying an image, a display list generation program for generating a display list, an animation pattern for displaying an animation of effect patterns, and animation scene information. Are remembered.

  This animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation that constitutes the specific content of the rendering by the image, and the animation pattern is associated with the animation scene information, the display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes wait frames (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transmittance, etc.), drawing method. , And various information such as a duty ratio which is a parameter of the brightness of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71.

  The drawing control unit (VDP) 141 is connected to the CGROM 142 in which image data is stored, and generates drawing data which is a source of a video signal (RGB signal or the like) based on a command from the display control CPU 140a and the image data. To do. The image data is an image (frame) to be displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, for example, an effect design image, a landscape image forming a background of the effect design, and a character. It is material-like data representing individual images such as images and serif images. On the other hand, the drawing data is synthetic data that represents an image of the entire frame configured by combining (superimposing) individual images.

  The CGROM 142 is composed of a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, etc., and compresses and stores image data (sprite, movie) or the like, which is a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information designating a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. The CGROM 142 is read by the drawing control unit (VDP) 141 in image data units, and image processing is performed in image data units of this frame.

Further, the CGROM 142 stores, without compression, palette data in which color number information designating a color number and display color information for actually displaying a color are associated with each other. Note that the CGROM 142 may have a structure in which not all the image data is compressed but only a part thereof is compressed.
As a movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

  The VRAM 143 is composed of an SRAM that can write or read image data at high speed. The VRAM 143 is a display list storage area for temporarily storing the display list output from the display control CPU 140a, a frame buffer corresponding to the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71. It has areas and the like.

  The frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying an image, and further includes a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched to the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" at the start of drawing.

  Therefore, the drawing control unit (VDP) 141 draws the drawing data stored in the CGROM 142 in the "drawing frame buffer" of the VRAM 143 based on the instruction (display list) from the display control CPU 140a, and The drawing data is read from the "display frame buffer" in the buffer area, a video signal (LVDS signal, RGB signal, etc.) is generated based on the read drawing data, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device The image is output to the image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 to display various images.

  The drawing control unit (VDP) 141 is supplied with an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, and by dividing this operation clock, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device ( A sync signal (horizontal sync signal / vertical sync signal) for synchronizing with the sub liquid crystal) 71 is generated and output to the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71.

  Further, between the image control section 140 and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, a general-purpose board 72 for converting image data into a predetermined image format and outputting the image data. Are connected. The general-purpose board 72 has a bridge function of converting the image data into an image format corresponding to the performance of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71. , SXGA (1280 dots × 1080 dots) 19-inch liquid crystal display device is connected, XGA (1024 dots × 768 dots) 17-inch liquid crystal display device connected the difference in resolution, etc. .

  The sound control unit 150 is connected to the audio output device 9, and based on various effect data (including commands) transmitted from the effect control unit 130m, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image. The audio output device 9 is controlled to output audio data, music data and the like in accordance with the display of the display device (sub liquid crystal) 71.

  The frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 are connected to the lamp control unit 160, and the frame illumination is performed based on various production data (including commands) transmitted from the production control unit 130m (sub CPU 130a). Lighting control is performed by turning on, turning off, or blinking the LEDs of the device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 to produce a light emission effect.

  The drive control unit 170 is connected to the effect button drive motor 17b and the board drive device 75, and drives the effect button based on various effect data (including commands) transmitted from the effect control unit 130m (sub CPU 130a). An operation effect is produced by controlling the drive of a drive source such as a motor of the motor 17b and the board drive device 75 or a solenoid.

  The power supply board 180 supplies a power supply voltage to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control board 130, and various electronic components). The power supply board 180 detects whether or not power failure (power failure) has occurred, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of power failure (power failure). A backup power supply circuit 183 for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 at the time of power interruption (power failure) is provided.

  The power failure detection circuit 182 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined value. More specifically, the main CPU 110a in which the power failure detection signal is at a high level is in an operable state, and when the power failure detection signal is in a low level, the main CPU 110a is in an operation stop state.

  The backup power supply circuit 183 includes a capacitor that stores electricity when the game machine is energized, and the power supply voltage for backup stored in the capacitor when power failure (power failure) occurs is controlled by the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110 and the payout control. It is supplied to the payout RAM 121c of the substrate 120. As a result, the stored contents of the main RAM 110c and the payout RAM 121c are retained even during power failure (power failure), and the control state of the game is restored to the state before the power failure (power failure) after recovery from power failure (power failure). Can be restored. It should be noted that backup power may be supplied to the effect control board 130.

  Although the production control board 130 (specifically, the production control unit 130m) and the second game information display device 79 are directly connected via wiring, the production control board 130 and the second game information display are connected. A relay board may be provided between the device 79 and the effect control board 130 and the second game information display device 79 may be indirectly connected via the relay board. Further, instead of connecting the second game information display device 79 to the effect control unit 130m, the second game information display device 79 is connected to the lamp control unit 160, and the lamp control unit 160 determines the first based on the instruction information (effect data) from the effect control unit 130m. The 2 game information display device 79 may be controlled. Also, a relay board may be provided between the lamp control section 160 and the second game information display device 79.

(Explanation of game state)
Next, a game state when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, there are a "low probability game state" and a "high probability game state" as states related to the special symbol jackpot lottery, and a "non-time saving game state" as a state related to the movable member 48 included in the second starting opening 47. "And a" time saving game state ". The state related to the jackpot lottery (low-probability game state, high-probability game state) and the state related to the movable member 48 (non-time saving game state, time saving game state) can be associated with each state or can be independent. . That is,
(1) In the case of "low probability game state" and "time saving game state" (first specific game state),
(2) In the case of "low probability game state" and "non-time saving game state" (normal game state),
(3) In the case of "high probability game state" and "time saving game state" (second specific game state),
(4) In the case of "high probability game state" and "non-time saving game state" (third specific game state),
Can be provided.
The gaming state when the game is started, that is, the initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is set to the "low probability gaming state" and the "non-time saving gaming state", and this gaming state is set in this embodiment. Will be referred to as a "normal game state".

  In the present embodiment, "low probability game state" means that the winning probability of the jackpot is in the jackpot lottery of the special symbol which is performed on condition that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47. , A gaming state set as low as 1/299, for example. On the other hand, the "high-probability gaming state" refers to a gaming state in which the jackpot winning probability is improved as compared to the low-probability gaming state, and the jackpot winning probability is set high, for example, 1 / 59.8. . Therefore, in the "high-probability game state", it is easier to win the jackpot than in the "low-probability game state". The low-probability game state is changed to the high-probability game state after the jackpot game described later is finished.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the high-probability gaming state is called a "probable variation jackpot", and the jackpot that triggers the transition to the low-probability gaming state is called a "normal jackpot".

  In the present embodiment, the "non-time saving game state" means that in the normal symbol hit lottery performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the universal gate 44, the average variation time of the ordinary symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Is set to be longer than the "time saving game state", and the open state of the second starting opening 47 when the winning is won is easily set to be short. For example, when the game ball passes through the universal symbol gate 44, a regular symbol hit lottery is performed, and the variable symbol for the regular symbol is displayed on the regular symbol first display 62, but the variable symbol for the regular symbol is started to be varied. From, for example, the display is stopped after 30 seconds. Then, if the lottery result is a win, the second starting port 47 is controlled to be in the open mode for, for example, 0.2 seconds after the stop display of the normal symbol. In other words, in the "non-time saving game state", when the player hits the ball right, the player does not win the game ball in the first starting opening 45, and it is difficult for the player to win the game ball in the second opening 47 as well. Thus, the player can proceed with the game more favorably than when the player hits the ball right.

  On the other hand, the "time saving game state" means that in the normal symbol hit lottery performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the universal symbol gate 44, the average fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol corresponding to the lottery result. A gaming state that is set shorter than the "non-time saving game state" and that the opening time of the second starting opening 47 when winning a hit is 2.5 seconds, for example, and is set longer than the "non-time saving game state" Say. Furthermore, in the "non-time saving game state", the probability of winning in a normal symbol hitting lottery is set as low as 1/128, for example, and in the "time saving game state" the probability of winning in a normal symbol lottery is 127, for example. It is set as high as / 128. Therefore, in the "time saving game state", when the game ball passes through the universal gate 44, the second starting port 47 is more easily controlled in the open state than in the "non-time saving game state". As a result, in the "time saving game state", by right-handing, the player can advantageously proceed with the game without consuming the game ball.

  In the embodiment, the "time saving game state" is set so that the variation time of the ordinary symbol, the opening time of the second starting opening 47, and the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery are more advantageous than the "non-time saving game state". Has been done. However, the "time saving game state" may be set such that only one of the variation time of the ordinary symbol, the opening time of the second starting opening 47 and the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery is advantageous. Further, in the non-time saving game state, the probability of winning the winning in the normal symbol hit lottery may be 0/128, for example.

  Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS.

(The jackpot determination table for the jackpot lottery for special symbols)
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table. Specifically, FIG. 6A is a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 45, and FIG. 6B is the second starting. It is a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the mouth 47. In the tables of FIGS. 6A and 6B, the jackpot probabilities are the same.

  As shown in FIGS. 6 (a) and 6 (b), in the jackpot determination table, the jackpot determination is obtained when the game ball enters the stochastic game state, the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47. The jackpot determination value for determining the random number for use and the determination result of the jackpot lottery are associated with each other.

  The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 6 (a) and FIG. 6 (b), and the current probability game state and the obtained jackpot. Based on the determination random number value, it is determined whether it is a "big hit" or "miss".

  For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 6 (a), in the low probability game state, two jackpot determination random numbers "7" and "8" are determined to be jackpots. To be done. On the other hand, when in the high-probability gaming state, the 10 jackpot determination random numbers “7” to “16” are determined to be jackpots. If the random number value is other than the above, it is determined as “miss”.

  Therefore, since the random number range of the jackpot determination random number value is 0 to 598, the probability of being a jackpot in the low-probability game state is 1/299, and the jackpot is determined in the high-probability game state. The probability is 5 times higher and is 1 / 58.9. The probability that the jackpot is determined is not limited to 5 times, and may be set to any value such as 3 times or 10 times.

(Special symbol determination table)
FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot lottery. Specifically, FIG. 7A is a special symbol determination table for the big hit which is referred to for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when the big hit is won, and FIG. 7B is a lost win. It is a symbol determination table for loss which is sometimes referred to for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 7 (a), in the special symbol determination table for the big hit, when the game ball enters the type of the starting opening in which the game ball wins and the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47 Big hit symbol determination value for determining the obtained jackpot symbol determination random value, determination result (special symbol type), special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data), and production as information indicating the type of special symbol The effect designating command transmitted to the control board 130 is associated.

  As shown in FIG. 7B, in the special symbol determination table for losing, when the game ball enters the type of the starting opening in which the game ball wins and the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47 Big hit symbol determination value for determining the obtained jackpot symbol determination random value, determination result (special symbol type), special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data), and production as information indicating the type of special symbol The effect designating command transmitted to the control board 130 is associated. It should be noted that, even in the case of losing, a plurality of missing special symbols and special symbol determination values may be associated with each other so that a plurality of missing special symbols can be determined.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 7, and determines the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data) based on the type of the starting opening in which the game ball wins and the random number for jackpot symbol determination. It will be decided.
Then, when the variation of the special symbol is started, based on the determined special symbol type (special symbol stop symbol data), the effect symbol designating command as information indicating the type of the special symbol is determined. Here, in the effect design designation command, one command is composed of 2-byte data, 1-byte MODE data for identifying the classification of the control command, and 1-byte DATA indicating the content of the control command to be executed. And data. This also applies to a variation pattern designation command and the like which will be described later.

  Here, as will be described later, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data) determines the type of jackpot game (see FIG. 8) and the game state after the jackpot game (see FIG. 11). It can be said that the type of special symbol determines the type of jackpot game and the gaming state after the jackpot game.

(Big hit game control table)
FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a jackpot game control table for determining the progress of the jackpot state (special gaming state) when the jackpot is selected as the jackpot lottery determination result. In the jackpot game control table, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data), the opening time of the jackpot state (special game state), the opening designation command transmitted to the effect control board 130 at the start of the opening, the big winning opening 50 The special winning opening opening / closing control table for determining the opening / closing mode, the ending time of the big hit state (special game state), and the ending designation command transmitted to the effect control board 130 at the start of the ending are associated with each other.

  The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 8, and determines the opening time, the special winning opening / closing control table, and the ending time based on the special figure stop symbol data. Since the number of rounds in the jackpot state (special gaming state) is determined by determining the type of the special winning opening / closing table, FIG. 8 shows the number of rounds in the jackpot state (special gaming state), etc. Is supplementarily described.

(Big prize opening and closing control table for jackpot games)
FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 are diagrams showing a special winning opening opening / closing control table that is referred to when a big hit is won. In this special winning opening / closing control table, a table number (TBL.No), a round number indicating the number of rounds of the big hit game (special game state), and a special electric indicating the number of times the special winning opening 50 is opened in one round The operation number (K) is associated with the opening time of the special winning opening 50 and the closing time (interval time) of closing the special winning opening 50 between rounds or during a round.

  The main CPU 110a identifies the opening / closing mode (opening / closing pattern) of the special winning opening 50 with reference to the special winning opening opening / closing control table shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, and based on the first special winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL. No01). The first jackpot game is executed, the second jackpot opening and closing control table (TBL.No02) is executed, and the second jackpot opening and closing control table (TBL.No03) is used. 3 big hit game is executed, based on 4th big winning a prize opening and closing control table (TBL.No04), 4th big winning a game is executed, 5th big winning a prize based on 5th big winning a prize opening and closing control table (TBL.No05) The game is executed, the sixth jackpot game is executed based on the sixth big winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL. No06), and the seventh big winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL. Performing a seventh bonus game based on o07).

  According to the first big winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL.No = 01), the opening / closing member 51 is operated to open the big winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area 5a from one round to four rounds. The first jackpot game is executed in which each round is opened up to 29.5 seconds and from 5th round to 8th round is opened up to 0.18 seconds per round.

  However, if a specified number (9) of game balls are won in the special winning opening 50 before the opening time elapses, the game of one round is finished. Then, when the 8-round game is over, the first jackpot game is over. Since the opening time of the special winning opening 50 is extremely short from the fifth round to the eighth round, and it is difficult to obtain the prize ball, the first jackpot game can be said to be substantially a probability variation jackpot game of four rounds.

  According to the second special winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL.No = 02), the opening / closing member 51 is operated to open the big winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area 5a from 1 round to 4 rounds and 6 rounds. Up to 8 rounds, open up to 29.5 seconds per round, and in 5 rounds, open and close multiple times per round (K = 5) (the special winning opening 50 opens for 0.18 seconds and 7 .32 seconds of closing and repeating, and finally open for 25.0 seconds) The second jackpot game is executed.

  However, if a prescribed number (9) of game balls are won in the special winning opening 50 before reaching the maximum number of times of opening (K), one round of the game is ended. Then, when the 8-round game is over, the second jackpot game is over. Since the big winning opening 50 is open for a long time from the first round to the eighth round, and it is easy to obtain a prize ball, the second jackpot game can be said to be a virtually odd jackpot game of eight rounds.

  In the first jackpot game and the second jackpot game, since the opening / closing mode of the jackpot 50 is the same up to the middle of the five rounds, it is not possible to know which jackpot game is the middle. Therefore, in the first jackpot game, from the 5th round to the closing time of 8 rounds, in the 2nd jackpot game, up to the 4th closing time of the big winning opening 50 of the 5th round, a round game in which a prize ball can be obtained The promotion effect of whether or not is increased is executed by, for example, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. Specifically, in the first jackpot game, the jackpot game is ended after executing the promotion failure production in which it appears that the round game in which the prize ball can be obtained has failed to increase in the final stage of the promotion production. In the 2nd jackpot game, after executing the promotion success production that makes it seem that the round game in which the award balls can be obtained has been successfully increased in the final stage of the promotion production, the fifth winning opening 50 of the 5th round is opened. , The jackpot game is being promoted after the sixth round in which prize balls can be won. By doing so, the player's expectation for the promotion effect is increased.

  According to the third big winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL.No = 03), the opening / closing member 51 is operated to open the big winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area 5a from 1 round to 15 rounds. Open up to 29.5 seconds and execute the third jackpot game. However, if a specified number (9) of game balls are won in the special winning opening 50 before the opening time elapses, the game of one round is finished. Then, when the game of 15 rounds is completed, the third jackpot game is completed. Since the opening time of the special winning opening 50 is long from 1 round to 15 rounds, and it is easy to obtain a prize ball, the 3rd big hit game can be said to be a 15-round probability variation big hit game.

  According to the 4th special winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL.No = 04), the opening / closing member 51 is operated, and the big winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area 5a is rounded from 1 round to 8 rounds. Play the fourth jackpot game that opens up to 0.18 seconds. However, if a specified number (9) of game balls are won in the special winning opening 50 before the opening time elapses, the game of one round is finished. Then, when the 8-round game is over, the fourth jackpot game is over. In addition, since the opening time of the special winning opening 50 is extremely short from the first round to the eighth round, and it is difficult to obtain the prize ball, the fourth jackpot game can be said to be a sudden odd variation jackpot game of virtually no round.

  According to the fifth special winning opening / closing control table (TBL.No = 05), the opening / closing member 51 is operated to open the special winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area 5a from one round to eight rounds. The second big hit game is executed by opening up to 29.5 seconds per hit. However, if a specified number (9) of game balls are won in the special winning opening 50 before the opening time elapses, the game of one round is finished. Then, when the 8-round game is over, the fifth jackpot game is over. Since the opening time of the special winning opening 50 is long from 1 round to 8 rounds and it is easy to obtain a prize ball, the 5th big hit game can be said to be substantially a 8th round normal big hit game.

  According to the sixth special winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL.No = 06), the opening / closing member 51 is operated to open the big winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area 5a in one round from one round to four rounds. The sixth jackpot game is executed in which each round is opened up to 29.5 seconds and from 5th to 15th rounds is opened up to 0.18 seconds per round.

  However, if a specified number (9) of game balls are won in the special winning opening 50 before the opening time elapses, the game of one round is finished. Then, when the game of 15 rounds is over, the sixth jackpot game is over. Since the opening time of the special winning opening 50 is extremely short from the fifth round to the fifteenth round, and it is difficult to obtain the prize ball, the sixth jackpot game can be said to be substantially a probability variation jackpot game of four rounds.

  According to the seventh big winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL.No = 07), the opening / closing member 51 is operated to open the big winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area 5a from 1 round to 4 rounds and 6 rounds. Up to 15 rounds, open up to 29.5 seconds per round, and open and close multiple times (K = 12) per round in 5 rounds (the special winning opening 50 opens for 0.18 seconds and 2 It repeats closing for .548 seconds and opens for 25.0 seconds at the end) The seventh jackpot game is executed.

  However, if a prescribed number (9) of game balls are won in the special winning opening 50 before reaching the maximum number of times of opening (K), one round of the game is ended. Then, when the game of 15 rounds is over, the seventh jackpot game is over. It should be noted that since the opening time of the special winning opening 50 is long from 1 round to 15 rounds and it is easy to obtain a prize ball, the 7th big jackpot game can be said to be substantially a 15th round probability variation jackpot game.

  In the sixth big hit game and the seventh big hit game, since the opening and closing mode of the special winning opening 50 is the same until the middle of the five rounds, it is not possible to grasp which big hit game is halfway.

  Therefore, in the sixth jackpot game, for example, in the first to fifth image display devices (main liquid crystal) 70, the promotion effect of whether or not the number of rounds in which the prize balls can be acquired is increased from the fifth round to the fifteenth round, In the seventh jackpot game, a promotion effect of whether or not the number of rounds capable of winning a prize ball increases between the first opening of the big winning opening 50 of the fifth round and the closing of the eleventh opening, for example, the first image This is executed by the display device (main liquid crystal) 70.

  In the sixth jackpot game, the jackpot game is ended after executing the above-described promotion failure presentation in the final stage of the promotion production, and in the seventh jackpot game, the promotion success production described above is executed in the final stage of the promotion production. Later, the 12th opening of the big winning hole 50 of 5 rounds is performed, and the jackpot game is advanced after the 6th round in which a prize ball can be obtained. By doing so, the player's expectation for the promotion effect is increased.

(Game state setting table)
FIG. 11 is a game state setting table for determining the game state after the jackpot game (special game state) is finished. As shown in FIG. 11, the type of the starting opening in which the game ball wins, the stop symbol data of the special symbol, the time saving game state, the time saving game frequency (J), the probability game state, and the high probability game frequency (X). Are associated with.

  The main CPU 110a refers to the game state setting table shown in FIG. 11, and based on the type of the starting opening and the stop symbol data of the special symbol at the end of the jackpot, the time saving game state, the time saving game number (J), the probability game state and the high. The probability game number (X) is determined. In addition, when the low probability game state is determined as the probability game state, the high probability game number (X) is not determined.

  As a feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 11 in the present embodiment, in the case of special symbols 10 to 13 and special symbols 20 to 22, the number of time saving games (J) and the number of high probability games (X) are The point is that it is set to 10,000 times, not to infinity. However, in the high-probability game state, the probability of winning the big hit before the 10,000 big jackpot lottery is extremely high. Therefore, in practice, the time saving game state and the high-probability game state may continue until the next big jackpot lottery is won. I can say.

(Variation pattern determination table)
12 and 13 are diagrams showing a variation pattern determination table that is referred to when performing variable display of special symbols. FIG. 12 is a variation pattern determination table that is referred to when performing variable display of a special symbol by entering a game ball into the first starting opening 45, and FIG. 13 is a variation of the game ball into the second starting opening 47. It is a variation pattern determination table that is referred to when performing a variable display of the special symbol by entering the ball.

  In the variation pattern determination tables of FIGS. 12 and 13, the jackpot lottery determination result, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data), and the game ball enters the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47. Reach determination random number value obtained when, and the first special symbol reservation number (U1) which is the current first pending number or the second special symbol pending number (U2) which is the current second pending number And the number of reserved balls, the random number value for special figure fluctuation pattern determination acquired when the game ball enters the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47, and the fluctuation pattern (number) of the special symbol, The variation time of the special symbol and the variation pattern designation command indicating the variation pattern (number) are associated with each other.

  Therefore, it can be said that the "variation pattern of the special symbol" can specify at least the determination result of the jackpot lottery and the variation time of the special symbol. Also, when the jackpot lottery judgment result is lost, the reach determination random number is referred to, but in the case of the jackpot, the reach occurs except in a special case, so it is configured not to refer to the reach determination random number. There is. The reach determination random number value and the special figure variation pattern determination random value are set to a random number range of 100 (0 to 99).

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 12 and FIG. 13, when the number of reserved balls (U1 or U2) of the special symbol increases, the variation pattern 1 (normal Fluctuation: fluctuation pattern 12 (shortening fluctuation: fluctuation time 3 seconds) is easier to determine than fluctuation: fluctuation time 12 seconds. Further, in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 12, when the number of reserved balls (U1 or U2) of the special symbol increases, variation pattern 4 (normal variation: variation time 10 seconds) than variation pattern 3 (normal reach: variation time 20 seconds). ) Is easier to determine.

  As the number of reserved balls (U1 or U2) of the special symbol, "4" may be stored at the maximum, but the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined after subtracting 1 from the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. Therefore, "4" is not set as the number of reserved balls.

  The main CPU 110a refers to the variation pattern determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 12 and FIG. 13, the jackpot lottery determination result, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data), the random number value for reach determination, the suspension of the special symbol Based on the number of balls (U1 or U2), the random number for special figure fluctuation pattern determination, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol and the fluctuation time of the special symbol are determined. Then, based on the determined variation pattern of the special symbol, a variation pattern designating command of the special symbol is generated and transmitted to the production control board 130.

  Here, the variation pattern designation command of the special symbol is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the command classification and 1-byte DATA data indicating the content (function) of the command. In this embodiment, when it is "E6H" as the MODE data, the variation pattern designating command of the special symbol of the first special symbol first display 60 corresponding to the game ball winning the first starting opening 45 is shown, and the MODE is set. When the data is "E7H", it shows a variation pattern designation command of the special symbol of the second special symbol first display 61 corresponding to the game ball winning the second starting port 47.

  Further, in the effect control board 130, as will be described later, the effect contents regarding the variable display of the effect symbol 70a are determined based on the change pattern (fluctuation pattern designation command) of the special symbol. In the rightmost column of the variation pattern determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 12 and FIG. 13, the production content (variation production pattern) such as the production symbol 70a is described as a reference.

  Here, as the effect contents, here, “normal fluctuation” and “shortening fluctuation” mean that a plurality of effect symbols 70a fluctuate at high speed at random and stop without reaching, The normal fluctuation and the shortened fluctuation are different in that the shortened fluctuation ends in a shorter fluctuation time than the normal fluctuation.

  In addition, the "reach" is a variation mode that gives a player the expectation of a big hit, such that a part of the combination of the effect symbols 70a for notifying the big hit is temporarily stopped and the other effect symbols 70a are changed. Means For example, when the combination of the three-digit effect design 70a of "777" is set as the combination of the effect designs 70a for notifying the big hit (big hit result mode), the two effect designs 70a are set in the left side area and the right side area. It is a mode in which the remaining effect design 70a is fluctuating in the central area after being temporarily stopped at "7".

  The "temporary stop" means that the effect design 70a sways slightly, or the effect design 70a is slightly deformed to make the player think that the effect design 70a is stopped (complete stop). Not) refers to the embodiment.

  Further, the "normal reach" means a reach with a low jackpot expectation in which two effect symbols 70a are provisionally stopped in the left side region and the right side region and the remaining one effect symbol 70a changes in the central region. In the present embodiment, the "normal reach" is not a big hit, but the "normal reach" may be a big hit.

  Further, “SP reach” means super reach, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than normal reach. For example, it refers to a mode in which the effect pattern 70a in the central area which is not temporarily stopped undergoes a special change or a special character is displayed.

In addition, "SPSP reach" means a special reach that is performed after super reach and has a higher expectation of a big hit than super reach.
Further, the "all rotation reach" means a mode in which the combination of a plurality of effect symbols 70a for notifying the big hit is changed to a low speed, and in the present embodiment, only when the big hit lottery is won. Means the reach to be performed.

  The variation pattern determination table of the special symbol shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 is referred to regardless of the gaming state, but a variation pattern determination table in which the variation pattern selection mode is different for each of the plurality of gaming states is provided, The variation pattern determination table to be referred to may be changed according to the game state at that time.

(Preliminary determination table for jackpot lottery)
14 and 15 are diagrams showing a pre-determination table for pre-determining the determination result of the special symbol jackpot lottery. FIG. 14 is a pre-determination table that is referred to when performing variable display of special symbols by entering a game ball into the first starting opening 45, and FIG. 15 is a entering of the game ball into the second starting opening 47. It is a prior determination table that is referred to when performing a variable display of the special symbol by the ball.

  In the pre-determination table of FIGS. 14 and 15, the determination result of the jackpot lottery, the type of the special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data), and the game ball enters the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47. Random value for reach determination, which is obtained at the time, random number value for determining special figure variation pattern, which is obtained when a game ball enters the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47, and a planned variation pattern (number ) Is associated with the starting opening winning award designation command.

Here, by the random number value for jackpot determination obtained when the game ball enters the first start opening 45 or the second start opening 47, it is possible to determine in advance whether it is "big hit" or "miss", for big hit symbol judgment The type of special game and the presence / absence of transition to the high-probability game state can also be determined in advance by the random number value.
In addition, since the effect contents (whether or not the reach has occurred, the type of reach) can be determined in advance by the reach determination random number value and the special figure variation pattern determination random value, the start winning information (DATA of the start winning designation command DATA ), It is possible to determine the type of jackpot and the content of the effect (planned variation pattern).

  The main CPU 110a refers to the pre-determination tables shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, and based on the jackpot determination random number value, the jackpot symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random value, and the special pattern variation pattern determination random value. Start prize information "is determined. Then, based on the determined start winning information, a start winning designation command for determining the result of the jackpot lottery in advance is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  The start winning award designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the command classification and 1-byte DATA data indicating the content (function) of the command. In the present embodiment, when the MODE data is "E8H", a start winning designation command corresponding to the game ball winning the first starting opening 45 is shown, and when the MODE data is "E9H", the second starting opening is shown. 47 shows a starting winning designation command corresponding to the game ball winning.

  The pre-determination table shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 is similar to the variation pattern determination table of the special symbol shown in FIGS. 12 and 13. However, while the pre-determination table shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 is used when the game ball enters the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47, the variation pattern of the special symbol shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 The determination table is different in that it is used at the start of variation of the special symbol. In addition, it is different whether or not the "reserved number of balls" is referred to.

  Therefore, in the pre-determination tables shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the jackpot type and the variation pattern type can be discriminated, but the jackpot lottery determination result is “miss” and the reach determination random value is “0”. In the case of "~ 89", the planned fluctuation patterns are fluctuation patterns 1 to 4, but it is impossible to determine whether the planned fluctuation pattern is "normal fluctuation", "shortening fluctuation", or "normal reach".

  The pre-judgment table of the special symbols shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 is referred regardless of the game state at that time, but a pre-judgment table in which the variation pattern selection mode is different for each of the plurality of game states is provided. The pre-determination table to be referred to may be changed according to the game state at that time.

  16: is a figure which shows the table regarding the normal symbol and the movable member 48 of the 2nd starting opening 47. FIG. Specifically, FIG. 16 (a) is a diagram showing a hit determination table for ordinary symbols used in a hit lottery for ordinary symbols, and FIG. 16 (b) is an ordinary symbol corresponding to a hit lottery result. It is a figure which shows the stop symbol determination table of a symbol, FIG.16 (c) is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table of the normal symbol for determining the fluctuation time of a normal symbol, and FIG.16 (d) is normal. It is a figure which shows the opening mode determination table of the 2nd starting opening for determining the opening mode of the movable member 48 in the hit state (auxiliary game) which occurs when the symbol hit lottery is won.

(Ordinary symbol hit determination table)
As shown in FIG. 16 (a), the hit determination table includes the presence / absence of a time saving game state, a random number value for hit determination obtained when a game ball passes through the universal figure gate 44, and the result of a hit lottery. It is associated. The main CPU 110a refers to the hit determination table shown in FIG. 16A, and determines whether it is a "hit" or a "miss" based on the current time saving game state and the acquired random value for hit determination.

  For example, according to the hit determination table shown in FIG. 16A, one random number for hit determination "127" is determined to be a hit in the non-time saving game state, and "1" in the time saving game state. From 127 to 127, the 127 random number values for hit determination are determined to be hits. Therefore, the probability of being determined to be a hit in the non-time saving game state is 1/128, and the probability of being determined to be a hit in the time saving game state is 127/128.

(Normal symbol stop symbol determination table)
In the stop symbol determination table shown in FIG. 16 (b), the presence / absence of a time saving game state, the lottery result of the winning lottery, the random number value for the winning symbol obtained when the game ball passes through the universal figure gate 44, The normal symbol type (general symbol stop symbol data) is associated with the regular symbol designation command transmitted to the effect control board 130 as information indicating the type of the regular symbol.

The main CPU 110a refers to the stop symbol determination table shown in FIG. 16 (b), and the normal symbol first display based on the current time saving game state, the lottery result of the winning lottery, and the obtained random number for winning symbol. The normal symbol and the universal symbol stop symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the device 62 are determined.
Then, when the variation of the normal symbol starts, based on the type of the determined normal symbol (general symbol stop symbol data), a general symbol designation command as information indicating the type of the ordinary symbol is determined and transmitted to the production control board 130. .

(Regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table)
In the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 16C, the presence / absence of a time saving game state, the lottery result of the winning lottery, and the general pattern fluctuation pattern determination disorder acquired when the game ball passes through the general gate 44. Numerical values, the variation time of the normal symbol, and the normal figure variation pattern designation command transmitted to the effect control board 130 as information indicating the variation time of the ordinary symbol are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a refers to the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 16C, and based on the current time saving game state, the lottery result of the winning lottery, and the random number value for the general pattern variation pattern determination, the variation time of the normal symbol Will be decided.
Then, when the variation of the normal symbol starts, based on the determined variation time, a universal figure variation pattern designation command as information indicating the variation time of the ordinary symbol is determined and transmitted to the production control board 130.

  As a feature of the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 16C, the variation time (3 seconds or 5 seconds) in the time saving game state is set to be shorter than the variation time (30 seconds or 40 seconds) in the non-time saving game state. It is configured.

(Second opening opening mode determination table)
In the opening mode determination table shown in FIG. 16D, the normal symbol (general symbol stop symbol data), the maximum number of times the second starting port 47 (movable member 48) is opened (S), and the second starting port 47 ( The first opening time and the closing time of the movable member 48) are associated with the interval time between the first closing time and the second opening time, and the second opening time and the closing time.

  The main CPU 110a refers to the opening mode determination table shown in FIG. 16D, and based on the universal figure stopping symbol data, the maximum opening number of the second starting port 47 (movable member 48), the opening time for the first time, and the closing time. Time, second open and close times are determined.

  In the release mode determination table shown in FIG. 16 (d), the open mode based on the universal figure stop symbol data = 02 (normal symbol 2) is more open than the open mode based on the universal figure stop symbol data = 01 (normal symbol 1). It has become an open mode that is advantageous to the person, and the open mode based on the universal figure stop symbol data = 03 (ordinary symbol 3) is more open to the player than the open mode based on the universal symbol stop symbol data = 02 (ordinary symbol 2). This is an advantageous opening mode.

  In addition, as shown in the stop symbol determination table of FIG. 16 (b), the player's most advantageous general symbol stop symbol data = 3 (ordinary symbol 3) is determined when hit in the time saving game state. . As a result, in the time saving game state, the second starting port 47 (movable member 48) operates so as to be more advantageous to the player than in the non-time saving game state.

(Various storage areas)
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 17A is a diagram showing a special symbol holding storage area in which various information is stored when a game ball enters the first starting opening 45 and / or the second starting opening 47. Yes, FIG. 17 (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the special symbol storage area, FIG. 17 (c), various information is stored when the game ball passes through the universal figure gate 44. 17D is a normal symbol hold storage area, and FIG. 17D is a diagram showing a configuration of each storage unit of the normal symbol hold storage area.

  As shown in FIG. 17 (a), the special symbol hold storage area is divided into a first special symbol hold storage area, a second special symbol hold storage area, and a special symbol concerned storage area, and a first special symbol hold The storage section and the second special symbol reserved storage area are divided from the first storage section to the fourth storage section, and the special symbol concerned storage area is configured by the 0th storage section.

  As shown in FIG. 17B, each storage unit is a jackpot determination random number storage area for storing a jackpot determination random number value, and a jackpot symbol determination random number storage area for storing a jackpot symbol determination random value. And a reach determination random number storage area for storing a reach determination random number value and a special figure variation pattern determination random number storage area for storing a special figure variation pattern determination random value.

  Then, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 45, the special symbol determination information (big hit) in the storage unit with the smallest number in the storage unit in which the random numbers are not stored in the first special symbol reserved storage region. Random numbers for determination, jackpot symbol determination random numbers, reach determination random numbers, special figure fluctuation pattern determination random numbers) are stored. In addition, when the game ball enters the second starting port 47, the special symbol determination information (the special symbol determination information in the storage unit with the smallest number among the storage units in which the random numbers are not stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area ( Big hit determination random number, big hit symbol determination random number, reach determination random number, special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number) are stored.

  The 0th storage section of the special design concerned storage area, in the 1st storage section of the storage area where the start condition of the fluctuation display of the special design is satisfied in the 1st special design reservation storage area or the 2nd special design reservation storage area By shifting the stored special symbol determination information, the special symbol determination information regarding the variable display of the current special symbol will be stored.

  As shown in FIG. 17 (c), the normal symbol hold storage area is divided from the 0th storage section to the 4th storage section, and as shown in FIG. 17 (d), each storage section has a randomness for hit determination. A random number storage area for hitting determination to store a numerical value, a random number storage area for hitting symbol determination to store a random number value for winning symbol determination, and a universal figure variation for storing a random number value for general pattern variation pattern determination It is divided into a random number storage area for pattern determination.

  Then, when the game ball passes through the universal figure gate 44, in the storage unit with the smallest number among the storage units in which the random numbers are not stored among the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit in the normal symbol reservation storage region. General figure determination information (random number for hit determination, random number for hit symbol determination, random number for general figure variation pattern determination) is stored. The 0th storage unit shifts the public figure determination information stored in the first storage unit when the start condition of the variable display of the normal symbols is satisfied, so that the public figure determination relating to the current variable display of the normal symbols is performed. Information will be stored.

  Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be described using a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control board)
Main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board 110.

  When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 180, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 110a, and the main CPU 110a performs the following main processing.

  First, in step S1, the main CPU 110a sets permission to access the main RAM 110c.

  In step S2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the RAM clear switch is ON (whether or not the RAM clear switch is pressed), and when the RAM clear switch is ON (S2: Yes). Moves to step S8, and if the RAM clear switch is not ON (S2: No), moves to step S3.

  In step S3, the main CPU 110a creates a checksum of the main RAM 110c when the power is turned on.

  In step S4, the main CPU 110a compares the created checksum of the main RAM 110c at power-on with the checksum of the main RAM 110c at power failure. Here, the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S5 if the compared checksums match (S4: Yes), and proceeds to step S5 if the compared checksums do not match (S4: No). The process moves to S8.

  In step S5, the main CPU 110a loads the backup data stored in the main RAM 110c that has been backed up, and performs the setting process of the main RAM 110c that sets the backup data in the work area of the main RAM 110c.

  In step S6, the main CPU 110a initializes devices around the CPU. Specifically, the output setting to the effect control board 130, the setting of the CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) to be used, the interrupt timer (4 milliseconds) of the CTC to be used, etc. are set.

  In step S7, the main CPU 110a sets the power restoration specification command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and sends it to the effect control board 130.

  In step S8, the main CPU 110a sets a RAM clear designation command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and sends it to the effect control board 130.

  In step S9, the main CPU 110a waits until the RAM clear switch is turned on again (press operation), and when the RAM clear switch is turned on again (press operation), the process proceeds to step S10.

  In step S10, the main CPU 110a clears the used area of the main RAM 110c and performs setting processing of the main RAM 110c that sets an initial value to a work area of the main RAM 110c that requires an initial value at initialization.

  In step S11, the main CPU 110a initializes devices around the CPU. Specifically, the output setting to the effect control board 130, the setting of the CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) to be used, the interrupt timer (4 milliseconds) of the CTC to be used, etc. are set.

  In step S12, the main CPU 110a sets the power-on time designation command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmits it to the effect control board 130.

  In step S13, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the special symbol reservation number in the production transmission data storage area, and transmits it to the production control board 130.

  In step S14, the main CPU 110a sets a normal symbol storage designation command corresponding to the normal symbol holding number in the effect transmission data storage area, and transmits it to the effect control board 130.

  In step S20, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the reach determination random number value and the jackpot symbol determination random value for determining the variation mode (variation time) of the special symbol.

  In step S30, the main CPU 110a updates the jackpot determination initial value random number, the jackpot symbol determination initial value random number, the hit determination initial value random number, and the hit symbol determination initial value random number.

  In step S40, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not power failure has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the power failure detection signal is input from the power failure detection circuit of the power supply board 180, and when the power failure detection signal is not input (S40: No), the process proceeds to step S20. When the power failure detection signal is input (S40: Yes), the process proceeds to step S41.

  The main CPU 110a sets an interrupt prohibition that prohibits a timer interrupt in step S41, performs a process of clearing the output port in step S42, calculates a checksum of the main RAM 110c in step S43, and stores the checksum in a predetermined storage area. Then, in step S44, a process of turning on a backup flag to be referred to at the time of recovery from power interruption is performed, in step S45, RAM access is prohibited, and the process waits until the supply of power supply voltage is completely cut off. .

(Main control board timer interrupt processing)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process in the main control board 110. The reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 110 generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds), whereby the timer interrupt process described below is executed.

  First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register of the main CPU 110a in the stack area.

  In step S110, the main CPU 110a updates the special symbol time counter, updates the special game timer counter such as the opening time of the special electric auditors, updates the normal symbol time counter, and updates the opening / closing time of the movable member 48. Time control processing for updating various timer counters such as processing is performed. Specifically, the special symbol time counter, the special game timer counter, the normal symbol time counter, the start opening timer counter, the process of subtracting 1 from the start closing timer counter is performed.

  In step S120, the main CPU 110a, the jackpot determination random number value, jackpot symbol determination random number value, special figure variation pattern determination random number value, hit determination random number value, hit symbol random number value, public figure variation pattern determination random number value And a specific random number update process such as.

  Specifically, the respective random number values and the random number counter are incremented by +1 and updated. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter makes one round), the random number counter is returned to 0 and the corresponding initial value random number value is set as a new round initial value. To update the random number value.

  In step S130, the main CPU 110a updates the jackpot determination initial value random number value, the jackpot symbol determination initial value random number value, the winning symbol determination initial value random number value, and the winning symbol determination initial value random number value, as in step S30. Perform an initial random number update process.

  In step S200, the main CPU 110a performs an input control process. In this processing, the main CPU 110a has various types of a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a big winning opening detection switch 50a, a first starting opening detecting switch 45a, a second starting opening detecting switch 47a, a gate detecting switch 44a, and a winning confirmation detecting switch 52a. It is determined whether or not there is an input to the switch, and if there is an input, an input control process for setting predetermined data is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol special electricity control process for performing a big hit lottery, a special symbol display control, a big winning opening 50 (opening / closing member 51) opening / closing control, a game state control, and the like. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs a general / universal electric power control process for performing a win lottery, a normal symbol display control, an opening / closing control of the second starting opening 47 (movable member 48), and the like. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S500, the main CPU 110a performs a payout control process. In this payout control process, the main CPU 110a refers to each prize ball counter, generates a payout amount designation command corresponding to each winning opening, and transmits the generated payout amount designation command to the payout control board 120.

  In step S600, the main CPU 110a performs magnetic / radio wave abnormality determination processing. In the magnetic / radio wave abnormality determination processing, the main CPU 110a detects the occurrence of a magnetic error or a radio wave error based on the input signals from the magnetic detection switch 53a and the radio wave detection switch 54a, and if detected, an error for the magnetic abnormality. The designation command and the error designation command for radio wave abnormality are transmitted to the effect control board 130. When the production control board 130 receives a magnetic abnormality error designation command or a radio wave abnormality error designation command, it performs radio wave error notification or magnetic error notification to notify that an abnormality has occurred.

  In step S700, the main CPU 110a outputs external information data (game information) output from the game information output terminal board 90, second start opening / closing solenoid 48b, drive control data output to the special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, first special symbol. 1st display 60, 2nd special design 1st display 61, normal design 1st display 62, 1st special design reservation 1st display 63, 2nd special design reservation 1st display 64, normal design reservation second Data creation processing such as various display control data to be output to the 1-display 65, the number-of-rounds display 66, the right-handed first display 67, the high probability game status display 68, and the time saving game status display 69 is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs output control processing. In this processing, port output processing for outputting signals such as external information data and drive control data created in S700 is performed. In addition, the output processing for the display for outputting the signals such as the display control data created in S700 is performed. Further, command output processing for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c to another board is also performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.
The types of commands transmitted to the effect control board 130 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38.

  In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a.

(Main control board input control processing)
The input control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the input control processing in the main control board 110.

  In step S210, the main CPU 110a performs a general winning opening detection switch input process. In this general winning opening detection switch input processing, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a. If there is no detection signal input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the process proceeds to the next step.

  When a detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, predetermined data is added to and updated in the prize ball counter for the general winning opening, and the winning counter that indicates the number of game balls that entered the winning opening. After adding (1) to (D) and updating (D ← D + 1), the process is moved to the next step.

  In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening detection switch input process. In the special winning opening detection switch input processing, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the special winning opening detection switch 50a. If there is no detection signal input from the special winning opening detection switch 50a, the process proceeds to the next step as it is.

  When the detection signal from the special winning opening detection switch 50a is input, predetermined data is added to and updated in the prize ball counter for the special winning opening, and the winning ball indicating the number of game balls entered in the winning opening is entered. "1" is added to the counter (D) to update (D ← D + 1), and 1 is added to the special winning opening number (C) storage area for counting the game balls that have won the special winning opening 50. Then, after updating (C ← C + 1), the process proceeds to the next step.

  In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first starting opening detection switch input process. In this first starting opening detection switch input processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the first starting opening detection switch 45a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first starting opening 45, and a predetermined value is determined. Set the data. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs a second starting opening detection switch input process. In the second starting opening detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the second starting opening detection switch 47a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the second starting opening 47, and a predetermined value is determined. Set the data. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S250, the main CPU 110a performs a gate detection switch input process. In this gate detection switch input processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the universal gate 44, and predetermined data is set. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S260, the main CPU 110a performs a winning confirmation detection switch input process. In the winning confirmation detection switch input processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the winning confirmation detection switch 52a is input, and the winning counter (D) is decremented by 1 and updated (D ← D-1), It is determined whether or not the value of the ball entrance counter (D) is within a predetermined judgment value range (lower limit value <D <upper limit value), and if the value is outside the judgment value range, an abnormal winning occurs. As a result, the abnormal prize winning error designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area. If it is within the range of the determination value, the winning confirmation detection switch input processing is ended.

  As a result, the abnormal winning error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect controlling board 130 that receives the abnormal winning error designation command issues an abnormal winning error notification to notify that an abnormal winning error has occurred. Notify me.

(Processing for inputting the first start opening detection switch of the main control board)
The first starting port detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the first starting opening detection switch input processing in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first starting opening detection switch 45a is input. When the detection signal from the first starting opening detection switch 45a is input (S230-1: Yes), the process is moved to step S230-2 and the detection signal from the first starting opening detection switch 45a is not input. In this case (S230-1: No), the current first starting opening detection switch input process is terminated.

  In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding predetermined data to the starting mouth prize ball counter used for prize balls and updating the counter.

  In step S230-3, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the winning opening to update (D ← D + 1).

  In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the data set in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is less than 4. If the data set in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is less than 4, the process proceeds to step S230-5, and the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is set. If the present data is not less than 4, the current first starting opening detection switch input processing is ended.

  In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding “1” to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area and updating (U1 ← U1 + 1).

  In step S230-6, the main CPU 110a obtains the random number value for jackpot determination, sequentially searches the vacant storage units from the first storage unit in the first special symbol reserved storage area, and stores the vacant storage. The obtained random number value for jackpot determination is stored in the section.

  In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a obtains the jackpot symbol determination random number value, sequentially searches the vacant storage units from the first storage unit in the first special symbol reserved storage area, and is vacant. The obtained jackpot symbol determination random value is stored in the storage unit.

  In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a acquires a random value for reach determination and a random value for special pattern variation pattern determination, and a storage unit that is vacant in order from the first storage unit in the first special symbol reserved storage area. The search is performed, and the reach determination random number value and the special figure variation pattern determination random value that are acquired are stored in an empty storage unit.

  As described above, the predetermined storage section of the first special symbol reserved storage area stores a big hit determination random number value, a big hit symbol determination random value, a reach determination random value, and a special figure fluctuation pattern determination random value. Becomes

  In step S230-9, the main CPU 110a performs a first preliminary determination process. In the first pre-determination process, the jackpot lottery pre-determination table shown in FIG. 14 is referred to, and the jackpot determination random number value, the jackpot symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random number value, and the special figure variation pattern determination that are acquired this time. Based on the random number value, the first start winning information for indicating the determination information of the first starting opening in advance is determined.

  In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets a first starting mouth winning award designation command based on the first starting winning award information determined in the first preliminary determination process of the step S230-9 in the transmission data storage area for effect. .

  As a result, the first start prize information can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as a first start prize specifying command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the first start prize specifying command causes the first start prize specifying command. The command is analyzed, and before the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first start winning award designation command is started, the predetermined notice effect is continuously executed over one or a plurality of variable displays executed before that. It is possible to execute a pre-reading effect such as a notice effect or a notice of a pending change that changes the display mode of the icon (hold icon, the variation icon).

  In step S230-11, the main CPU 110a refers to the value stored in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area, and corresponds to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) updated in step S230-4. The first special symbol memory designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area.

  In step S230-12, the main CPU 110a sets the first special symbol hold display data for displaying the first hold number on the first special symbol hold first display 63 (LED lighting or blinking) in a predetermined processing area. After the setting, the present first starting opening detection switch input processing is ended. As a result, when the first special symbol hold display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800. The first reservation number is displayed on the symbol reservation first display 63.

(Input processing of the second start opening detection switch of the main control board)
The second starting opening detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the second starting opening detection switch input processing in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S240-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the second starting opening detection switch 47a is input. When the detection signal from the second starting opening detection switch 47a is input (S240-1: Yes), the process is moved to step S240-2, and the detection signal from the second starting opening detection switch 47a is not input. In this case (S240-1: No), the current second starting opening detection switch input process is terminated.

  In step S240-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating predetermined data to the starting mouth prize ball counter used for prize balls.

  In step S240-3, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the entry counter (D) indicating the number of game balls entered in the winning opening to update (D ← D + 1).

  In step S240-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is in the auxiliary game (hit state). If it is in the auxiliary game (hit state) (S240-4: Yes), the process moves to step S240-9. If it is not in the auxiliary game (hit state) (S240-5: No), step S240- Processing is transferred to 5.

  In step S240-5, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the illegal entry counter (E) for monitoring the illegal entry into the second starting opening 47 and updates (E ← E + 1).

  In step S240-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the value of the illegal entry ball counter is greater than the specified number (10). If the number is greater than the specified number (S240-6: Yes), the process proceeds to step S240-7, and if the number is less than the specified number (S240-6: No), the process proceeds to step S240-10.

  In step S240-7, the main CPU 110a sets an illegal ball entry error designation command in the effect transmission data storage area as an illegal ball entry.

  As a result, an incorrect ball entry error designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the sub CPU 130a of the production control board 130 that has received the illegal ball entry error designation command issues an incorrect ball entry error notification to notify an illegal ball entry error. Informs that an error has occurred.

  In step S240-8, the main CPU 110a clears the value of the illegal entry ball counter (E) to zero.

  In step S240-9, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the second starting opening entrance counter (L) to update (L ← L + 1).

  In step S240-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the data set in the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area is less than 4. If the data set in the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area is less than 4 (S240-10: Yes), the process moves to step S240-11, and the second special symbol reservation number ( U2) When the data set in the storage area is not less than 4 (S240-10: No), the current second starting opening detection switch input process ends.

  In step S240-11, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area and updating (U2 ← U2 + 1).

  In Step S240-12, the main CPU 110a acquires the jackpot determination random number value, sequentially searches the vacant storage units from the first storage unit in the second special symbol reservation storage area, and stores the vacant storage. The obtained random number value for jackpot determination is stored in the section.

  In step S240-13, the main CPU 110a acquires the jackpot symbol determination random number value, sequentially searches the vacant storage units from the first storage unit in the second special symbol reserved storage area, and is vacant. The obtained jackpot symbol determination random value is stored in the storage unit.

  In Step S240-14, the main CPU 110a obtains the reach determination random number value and the special figure variation pattern determination random number value, and sequentially stores empty storage units from the first storage unit in the second special symbol reserved storage area. The search is performed, and the reach determination random number value and the special figure variation pattern determination random value that are acquired are stored in an empty storage unit.

  As described above, the predetermined storage section of the second special symbol reservation storage area stores a big hit determination random number value, a big hit symbol determination random value, a reach determination random value, and a special figure fluctuation pattern determination random value. Becomes

  In step S240-15, the main CPU 110a performs a second preliminary determination process. In the second pre-determination process, the jackpot lottery pre-determination table shown in FIG. 15 is referred to, and the jackpot determination random number value, the jackpot symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random value, and the special figure variation pattern determination that are acquired this time Based on the random number value, the second start winning information for indicating the determination information of the second starting opening in advance is determined.

  In step S240-16, the main CPU 110a sets, in the transmission data storage area for effect, a second start winning designation command based on the second starting winning information determined in the second preliminary determination process of step S240-14.

  As a result, the second start prize information can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the second start prize specifying command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the second start prize specifying command causes the second start prize specifying command. A continuous notice or icon that analyzes the command and executes a predetermined notice effect over one or more change displays before the change display of the special symbol corresponding to the second start winning award designation command is started. It is possible to execute a pre-reading effect such as a pending change notice that changes the display mode of the (hold icon, the change icon).

  In step S240-17, the main CPU 110a refers to the value stored in the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area, and corresponds to the second special symbol reservation number (U2) updated in step S240-9. The second special symbol memory designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area.

  In step S240-18, the main CPU 110a sets the second special symbol hold display data for displaying the second hold number on the second special symbol hold first display 64 (LED lighting or blinking) in a predetermined processing area. After the setting, the second starting opening detection switch input process of this time is ended. As a result, when the second special symbol hold display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800. The second reserved number is displayed on the symbol reservation first display 64.

(Gate control switch input processing on the main control board)
The gate detection switch input of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the gate detection switch input processing in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S250-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a is input. When the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a is input (S250-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S250-2, and when the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a is not input (S250-1: If No, the current gate detection switch input process is terminated.

  In step S250-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the data set in the normal symbol reservation number (G) storage area is less than 4. If the data set in the normal symbol reservation number (G) storage area is less than 4 (S250-2: Yes), the process moves to step S250-3, and the normal symbol reservation number (G) storage area If the data set in is not less than 4 (S250-2: No), the current gate detection switch input process ends.

  In step S250-3, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the normal symbol reservation number (G) and updating (G ← G + 1).

  In step S250-4, the main CPU 110a acquires the random number for hit determination, sequentially searches the vacant storage unit from the first storage unit in the normal symbol reservation storage area, and stores the vacant storage unit. The obtained random number value for hit determination is stored.

  In step S250-5, the main CPU 110a obtains the random number for winning symbol determination, searches the vacant storage units in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol holding storage area, and stores the vacant storage unit. The random number for winning symbol determination acquired in is stored.

  In step S250-6, the main CPU 110a obtains the random number value for general pattern variation pattern determination, searches the vacant storage units in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol reservation storage area, and is vacant. The obtained random number for determining the universal figure fluctuation pattern is stored in the storage unit.

  As described above, the random number value for hit determination, the random number value for hit symbol, and the random number value for general pattern change pattern determination are stored in the predetermined storage section of the normal symbol storage area.

  In step S250-7, the main CPU 110a refers to the value stored in the normal symbol reservation number (G) storage area, and specifies the normal symbol storage corresponding to the normal symbol reservation number (G) updated in step S250-3. The command is set in the production transmission data storage area.

  In step S250-8, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol hold display data for displaying the normal symbol hold number on the normal symbol hold first display 65 (LED lighting or blinking) in a predetermined processing area, This time the gate detection switch input processing ends. As a result, when the normal symbol hold display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800, which is the normal symbol hold first. The display 65 displays the number of reserved universal figures.

(Special control of special control of main control board)
The special figure special power control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a special figure special power control process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S301, the CPU 110a loads the value of the special figure special power processing data, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special power processing data loaded in step S302, and if the special figure special power processing data = 0, the special symbol The process is moved to the memory determination process (step S310), the special symbol special electric power process data = 1, the process moves to the special symbol variation process (step S320), and the special symbol special electric power process data = 2, the special symbol stop process ( If the special figure special electric power processing data = 3, the processing is moved to the big hit game processing (step S340), and if the special figure special electric power processing data = 4, it is processed to the big hit game ending processing (step S350). Transfer.

  Since this "special figure special electric power processing data" is set as necessary in each sub-routine of the special electric figure special electric power control processing as will be described later, the necessary sub-routines in the game will be appropriately processed. .

  In the special symbol storage determination process of step S310, the main CPU 110a performs a big hit determination process, a special symbol determination process for determining a special symbol to be stopped and displayed, a special symbol variation pattern determination process for determining a variation time of the special symbol, and the like. . This special symbol storage determination processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  In the special symbol variation process of step S320, the main CPU 110a performs a process of determining whether or not the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed. If the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the special symbol stop of step S330. Perform processing to shift to processing. This special symbol variation process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  In the special symbol stop process of step S330, the main CPU 110a performs a process corresponding to the stopped special symbol (big hit symbol, lost symbol), and also shortens the time saving game number (J), the time saving game flag, the high probability game number. (X), high probability game flag setting processing is performed. This special symbol stop processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  In the jackpot game process of step S340, the main CPU 110a performs a process of controlling the jackpot game. This jackpot game process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  In the jackpot game ending process of step S350, the main CPU 110a determines the probability game state of either the high probability game state or the low probability game state, and determines the game state of either the time saving game state or the non-time saving game state. Perform the processing to determine. The jackpot game ending process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

(Special symbol memory determination process of the main control board)
The special symbol storage determination processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage determination process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbols are being variably displayed. Here, during the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol time counter ≠ 0), if the special symbol storage determination process of this time is finished, the variable display of the special symbol is not being displayed (special symbol time counter = 0) If (S310-1: No), the process proceeds to step S310-2.

  In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a, if the special symbol is not changing (S310-1: No), the value of the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area storing the second reservation number. Is 1 or more. When it is determined that the value of the second special symbol hold number (U2) storage area is 1 or more (S310-2: Yes), the process is moved to step S310-3, and the second special symbol hold number (U2). If the value of the storage area is not 1 or more (S310-2: No), the process proceeds to step S310-4.

  In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a subtracts "1" from the value stored in the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area to update (U2 ← U2-1).

  In step S310-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the value of the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area storing the first reservation number is 1 or more. If it is determined that the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is 1 or more (S310-4: Yes), the process moves to step S310-5, and the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area If the value of is not 1 or more (S310-4: No), the process proceeds to step S319-1.

  In step S310-5, the main CPU 110a subtracts "1" from the value stored in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area to update (U1 ← U1-1).

  In step S310-6, the main CPU 110a shifts the data stored in the special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the special symbol reservation number (U) storage area subtracted in steps S310-2 to S310-5. . Specifically, each data stored in the fourth storage unit from the first storage unit in the first special symbol random value storage region or the second special symbol storage region is shifted to the previous storage unit. Here, the data stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the determination storage area (0th storage unit). At this time, the data stored in the first storage unit is written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit), and the data already written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit) is special symbol hold storage. It will be erased from the area. As a result, the jackpot determination random number value, the jackpot symbol determination random value, the reach determination random value, and the special figure variation pattern determination random value used in the previous game are erased.

  In the present embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-6, the second special symbol reserved storage area is shifted (digested) with priority over the first special symbol reserved storage area. In the order, the first special symbol reservation storage area, or the second special symbol reservation storage area may be shifted, and the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted in preference to the second special symbol reservation storage area. May be.

  In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a is based on the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area or the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area subtracted in step S310-2 or step S310-4. , The special symbol storage designation command is determined, and the determined special symbol storage designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area.

  In step S310-8, the main CPU 110a is based on the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area or the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area subtracted in step S310-2 or step S310-4. , Special symbol reservation display data is set in a predetermined processing area. As a result, when the first special symbol hold display data or the first special symbol hold display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800. By doing so, the number of reservations (first number of reservations, second number of reservations) is displayed on the first special symbol reservation first display 63 or the second special symbol reservation first display 64.

  In step S311, the main CPU 110a is based on the data (the big hit determination random number value, the big hit symbol determination random value) written in the determination storage area (0th storage section) of the special symbol holding storage area in step S310-6. Then, the jackpot determination process is executed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S312, the main CPU 110a performs a special figure variation pattern determination process. The variation pattern determination process refers to the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 or FIG. 13, the result of the big hit lottery, the type of special symbol, the number of special symbols held (U), the acquired random number for reach determination and the special symbol. The special figure fluctuation pattern is determined based on the random value for fluctuation pattern determination.

  In step S313, the main CPU 110a sets a special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the effect transmission data storage area.

  In step S314, the main CPU 110a confirms the game state at the start of fluctuation and sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area.

  In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the variation time (counter value) of the special symbol based on the variation pattern determined in step S312 in the special symbol time counter. The special symbol time counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in S110.

  In step S316, the main CPU 110a determines the special symbol variation display data for causing the first special symbol first indicator 60 or the second special symbol first indicator 61 to perform a variable display (blinking of the LED) of the special symbol. Set to the processing area of. As a result, when the special symbol variation display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the data for turning on or off the LED is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800. Variable display of the 1 special symbol first display 60 or the second special symbol first display 61 is started.

  In step S317, the main CPU 110a sets "00H" in the customer waiting state determination flag, sets "1" in the special symbol special power processing data in step S318, and prepares to move to the special symbol variation processing shown in FIG. , The special symbol storage determination process this time is ended.

  In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether the customer waiting state determination flag is "01H". When the customer waiting state determination flag “01H” is not set in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area (S319-1: Yes), the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S319-2, and the customer waiting state determination flag When the customer waiting state determination flag “01H” is set in the storage area (S319-1: No), the special symbol storage determination process of this time is ended. On the other hand, in step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets the customer waiting state determination flag to "00H", sets the customer waiting state designation command in the production transmission data storage area, and ends the special symbol storage determination process this time. To do.

(Main control board jackpot determination process)
The jackpot determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the big hit determination process in the main control board 110.

  In step S311-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the jackpot determination process is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 45. When the main CPU 110a determines that the start port is the first start port (S311-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S311-2, and the main CPU 110a determines that the start port is not the first start port (the second start port). For (S311-1: No), the process proceeds to step S311-3.

  In step S311-2, the main CPU 110a selects the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol. On the other hand, in step S311-3, the main CPU 110a selects the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol.

  Next, in step S311-4, the main CPU 110a collates the current probability game state and the special jackpot random number for jackpot determination stored in the 0th storage section of the storage area with the selected jackpot determination table. Then, it is determined whether it is a “big hit” or a “loss”.

  In step S311-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the jackpot is won. When the main CPU 110a determines that the jackpot is won (S311-5: Yes), the process is moved to step S311-6, and when it is determined that the jackpot is not won (S311-5: No). , And moves the processing to step S311-7.

  In step S311-6, the main CPU 110a selects a special symbol determination table for jackpot winning. On the other hand, in step S311-7, the main CPU 110a selects the special symbol determination table for losing.

  In step S311-8, the main CPU 110a, the type of starting opening that is to be jackpot lottery (judgment), the special symbol random number value for jackpot symbol determination stored in the 0th storage unit of the storage area, By collating with the selected table, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data) is determined.

  The determined special symbol is used to determine whether or not it is a big hit in the special symbol stop process of FIG. 29 as described later, and also determines the operation mode of the special winning opening in the big hit game process of FIG. It is also used for, and is also used for determining the game state after the jackpot end in the jackpot game end process of FIG.

  In step S311-9, the main CPU 110a sets the special figure stop symbol data determined in step S311-8 in the special figure stop symbol data storage area.

  In step S311-10, the main CPU 110a identifies the effect design designation command based on the jackpot special symbol stop design data determined in step S311-8, and specifies the identified effect design designation command in the transmission data storage area for production. Set to. Thereby, the effect designating command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

(Special control fluctuation pattern determination process of main control board)
The special figure variation pattern determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special figure variation pattern determination processing in the main control board 110.

  In step S312-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 45. When the main CPU 110a determines that the start port is the first start port (S312-1: Yes), the process is moved to step S312-2, and the main CPU 110a determines that the start port is not the first start port (the second start port). In (S312-1: No), the process proceeds to step S312-3.

  In step S312-2, the main CPU 110a selects the variation pattern determination table for the first special symbol. On the other hand, in step S312-3, the main CPU 110a selects the variation pattern determination table for the second special symbol.

  Next, in step S312-4, the main CPU 110a determines the jackpot lottery determination result, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data), and the reach determination stored in the 0th storage unit of the special symbol concerned storage area. The random number value for use and special pattern variation pattern determination random value, the current number of reserved balls, and the selected variation pattern determination table are collated to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol.

  In step S312-5, the main CPU 110a sets the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined in step S312-4 in the special symbol time counter. The special symbol time counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in S110.

  In step S312-6, the main CPU 110a sets a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined in step S312-4 in the transmission data storage area for effect. As a result, the variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

(Special symbol fluctuation processing of main control board)
The special symbol variation process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process in the main control board 110.

  In step S320-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the fluctuation time set in step S312-5 has elapsed (special symbol time counter = 0?). As a result, when it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed, the special symbol variation process ends.

  In step S320-2, when the main CPU 110a determines that the set time has elapsed, the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) determined in step S311-8 are first special. The special symbol stop display data for the stop display on the symbol first display 60 or the second special symbol first display 61 is set in a predetermined processing area. Thereby, the special symbol (first special symbol, the second special symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol first indicator 60 or the second special symbol first indicator 61, and the determination result of the jackpot lottery is given to the player. Will be informed.

  In step S320-3, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol determination command in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the special symbol determination command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  In step S320-4, the main CPU 110a sets the symbol stop time (0.5 seconds = 125 counter) in the special symbol time counter after starting the stop display of the special symbol as described above. The special symbol time counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in S110.

  In step S320-5, the main CPU 110a sets "2" in the special symbol special power processing data, prepares to move to the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 29, and ends the special symbol variation process this time.

(Special control stop processing of the main control board)
The special symbol stop process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process in the main control board 110.

  In step S330-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the symbol stop time set in step S320-4 has elapsed (special symbol time counter = 0?). As a result, if it is determined that the symbol stop time has elapsed, the process moves to step S330-2, and if it is determined that the symbol stop time has not elapsed, this special symbol stop process ends. To do.

  In step S330-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the time saving game flag is set (ON) in the time saving game flag storage area. When the time saving game flag is set (S330-2: Yes), the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S330-3, and when the time saving game flag is not set (S330-2: No). , And moves the processing to step S330-8.

  In step S330-3, the main CPU 110a subtracts "1" from the time saving game frequency (J) stored in the time saving game frequency (J) storage area to update (J ← J-1), and then step S330-. At 4, it is determined whether or not the new time saving game count (J) is "0". When the main CPU 110a determines that the number of time saving games (J) is "0" (S330-4: Yes), the process is moved to step S330-5, and the number of time saving games (J) is not "0". When it determines with (S330-4: No), a process is moved to step S330-8.

  In step S330-5, the main CPU 110a clears (OFF) the time saving game flag set in the time saving game flag storage area. As a result, the time saving game state ends and the state shifts to the non-time saving game state.

  In step S330-6, the main CPU 110a sets the time saving game state erasing data for erasing the display of the time saving game state display 69 (LED lit) (LED off) in a predetermined processing area. As a result, when the time saving game state erasing data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800, thereby saving the time saving game status indicator. The display of 69 is erased.

  In step S330-7, the main CPU 110a sets right-strike erasure data for erasing the display (LED lit) of the right-strike first display 67 (LED off) in a predetermined processing area. As a result, when the right-handed erasing data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800. The display of 67 is deleted.

  In step S330-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the high-probability game flag is set in the high-probability game flag storage area. When the high-probability game flag is set in the high-probability game flag storage area (S330-8: Yes), the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S330-9, and sets the high-probability game flag storage area to the high-probability game flag storage area. If the flag is not set (S330-8: No), the process proceeds to step S330-13.

  In step S330-9, the main CPU 110a subtracts "1" from the high-probability game number (X) stored in the high-probability game number (X) storage area, and updates (X ← X-1), In S330-10, it is determined whether or not the new high probability game number (X) is "0". When determining that the high-probability game frequency (X) is "0" (S330-10: Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to step S330-11, and the high-probability game frequency (X) is "0". If not determined (S330-10: No), the process proceeds to step S330-13.

  In step S330-11, the main CPU 110a clears (OFF) the high-probability game flag set in the high-probability game flag storage area. As a result, the high-probability game state ends and the low-probability game state is entered.

  In step S330-12, the main CPU 110a sets the high-probability game state erasing data for erasing the display (LED lit) of the high-probability game state indicator 68 (LED off) in a predetermined processing area. As a result, when the high-probability game state erase data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800. The display on the display 68 is erased.

In Step S330-13, the main CPU 110a confirms the current game state and sets a game state designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  In step S330-14, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol stopped and displayed is a jackpot special symbol. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special figure stop symbol data stored in the special figure stop symbol data storage area is the jackpot special symbol (special figure stop symbol data = 10-16, 20-23). . If the main CPU 110a is determined to be a jackpot special symbol (S330-14: Yes), the process is moved to step S330-15, and if it is determined not to be a jackpot special symbol (S330-14: No). Moves the process to step S330-26.

  In step S330-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the time saving game flag is set (ON) in the time saving game flag storage area. When the time saving game flag is set (S330-15: Yes), the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S330-16, and when the time saving game flag is not set (S330-15: No). , And moves the processing to step S330-17.

  In step S330-16, the main CPU 110a sets the time saving game state erase data in a predetermined processing area.

  In step S330-17, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the high-probability game flag is set in the high-probability game flag storage area. When the high-probability game flag is set in the high-probability game flag storage area (S330-17: Yes), the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S330-18, and sets the high-probability game flag storage area in the high-probability game flag storage area. If the flag is not set (S330-17: No), the process proceeds to step S330-19.

  In step S330-18, the main CPU 110a sets the high-probability game state erase data in a predetermined processing area.

  In step S330-19, the main CPU 110a sets 3 to the special figure special power processing data, and prepares to move to the jackpot game processing shown in FIG.

  In Step S330-20, the main CPU 110a resets the game state and the number of times saved. Specifically, it clears the data stored in the high-probability game flag storage area, the high-probability game count (X) storage area, the time saving game flag storage area, and the time saving game frequency (J) storage area.

  In step S330-21, the main CPU 110a sets a special winning opening / closing control table. Specifically, the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 8 is referred to, and a special winning opening / closing control table (TBL.No) corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data is set (set).

  In step S330-22, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time to the special game timer counter based on the jackpot game control table and the stop symbol data of the special symbol. The special game timer counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S330-23, the main CPU 110a determines the type of special game (first jackpot game to tenth jackpot game) based on the jackpot opening / closing control table set in step S330-17, and hits the jackpot game. An opening designation command corresponding to the type of (special game state) is set in the production transmission data storage area. Thereby, the opening designation command of the special game is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  In step S330-24, the main CPU 110a sets the number-of-rounds display data for displaying the number of rounds of the jackpot game (LED lighting) on the number-of-rounds indicator 66 in a predetermined processing area. As a result, when the round number display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800, so that the round number display 66 is displayed. The number of rounds is displayed.

  In step S330-25, the main CPU 110a sets the right hitting display data for causing the right hitting first indicator 67 to perform the right hitting display (LED lighting) in a predetermined processing area, and the special symbol stop processing this time. finish. As a result, when the right-handed display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800. Right-handed display is performed at 67.

  On the other hand, in step S330-26, the main CPU 110a sets "0" to the special symbol special electric power process data, prepares to move the process to the special symbol memory determination process shown in FIG. 25, and ends the special symbol stop process this time. To do.

(Main control board jackpot game processing)
The jackpot game process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a big hit game process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S340-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening is currently in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not "0" is stored in the round game number (R) storage area. If it is determined that the opening is currently being performed (S340-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-2, and if it is determined that the opening is not currently being performed (S340-1: No), step S340-6. Transfer processing to.

  In step S340-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening time set in step S330-14 has elapsed. If it is determined that the opening time has elapsed (S340-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-3, and if it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed, the jackpot game process of this time is ended. .

  In step S340-3, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot game start process. Specifically, the round game number (R) stored in the round game number (R) storage area is updated by adding "1" (R ← R + 1). Here, since no round game has been played yet, "1" is stored in the round game number (R) storage area.

  In step S340-4, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening opening process. Specifically, first, "1" is added to the opening count (K) stored in the opening count (K) storage area to update (K ← K + 1). Here, since the special winning opening 50 has not been opened yet, "1" will be stored in the opening number (K) storage area. Further, the special winning opening opening / closing solenoid energization start data for energizing the special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b to open the opening / closing member 51 of the special winning opening 50 is set. As a result, the opening / closing member 51 is converted from the closed state to the open state, and the special winning opening 50 is opened. Further, referring to the special winning opening opening mode determination table set in step S330-21, the opening time of the special winning opening 50 is special based on the current round game number (R) and opening number (K). Set in the game timer counter.

  In step S340-5, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command corresponding to the round game number (R) stored in the round game number (R) storage area in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the round designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Here, since it is the first round of the jackpot game, the opening first round specification command is set. When this processing is finished, this big hit game processing is finished.

  In step S340-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special winning opening 50 is currently open. Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b is set. When it is determined that the special winning opening 50 is open (S340-6: Yes), the process is moved to step S340-7, and when it is determined that the special winning opening 50 is not open (S340-6: No). ), The process proceeds to step S340-9.

  In step S340-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the conditions for ending the opening of the special winning opening are satisfied. Specifically, the value of the special winning opening ball counter (C) has reached a specified number (9) or the opening time at the current opening count (K) has elapsed (special game timer counter = 0). Is applicable. If it is determined that the opening end condition is satisfied (S340-7: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-8, and if it is determined that the opening end condition is not satisfied (S340-7: No). , This big hit game processing is ended.

  In step S340-8, the main CPU 110a performs an interval (large winning opening closing) process. Specifically, the special winning opening opening / closing solenoid energization stop data for converting the opening / closing member 51 of the special winning opening 50 into the closed state is set. As a result, the opening / closing member 51 is converted from the open state to the closed state, and the special winning opening 50 is closed. Further, referring to the special winning opening opening mode determination table set in step S330-21, the closing time of the special winning opening 50 is special based on the current round game number (R) and opening number (K). Set in the game timer counter. When this processing is finished, this big hit game processing is finished.

  In step S340-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is currently in an interval (close to the special winning opening). Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b is set. When it is determined that the interval (the special winning opening is closed) is being performed (S340-9: Yes), the processing is moved to step S340-10, and when it is determined that the interval (the special winning opening is closed) is not being performed (S340-9). : No), the process proceeds to step S340-19.

  In step S340-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time of the special winning opening 50 has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the special game timer counter is not "0". If it is determined that the closing time has ended (S340-10: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-11, and if it is determined that the closing time has not ended (S340-10: No), this time. The jackpot game processing of is ended.

  In step S340-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not this round has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the special winning opening ball counter (C) has reached a prescribed number (9) or the opening number (K) has reached the maximum opening number. If it is determined that the current round has ended (S340-11: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-13, and if it is determined that the current round has not ended (S340-12: No). , And moves the processing to step S340-12.

  In step S340-12, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening opening process. Specifically, the number of releases (K) stored in the number of releases (K) storage area is updated by adding "1" (K ← K + 1). Further, the special winning opening opening / closing solenoid energization start data for energizing the special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b to open the opening / closing member 51 of the special winning opening 50 is set. As a result, the opening / closing member 51 is converted from the closed state to the open state, and the special winning opening 50 is opened. Further, referring to the special winning opening opening mode determination table set in step S330-21, the opening time of the special winning opening 50 is special based on the current round game number (R) and opening number (K). Set in the game timer counter. When this process is finished, the big hit game process this time is finished.

  In step S340-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the final round has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of round games (R) stored in the number of round games (R) storage area has reached the maximum number of round games of the present jackpot game. If it is determined that the final round has ended (S340-13: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-17, and if it is determined that the final round has not ended (S340-13: No), step S340. Move the processing to -14.

  In step S340-14, the main CPU 110a performs a round data setting process. Specifically, "0" is set in the open count (K) storage area and the special winning opening ball count (C) storage area, and the round game count (R) stored in the round game count (R) storage area. Is added by "1" to update (R ← R + 1).

  In step S340-15, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening opening process. Specifically, first, "1" is added to the opening count (K) stored in the opening count (K) storage area to update (K ← K + 1). Further, the special winning opening opening / closing solenoid energization start data for energizing the special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b to open the opening / closing member 51 of the special winning opening 50 is set. As a result, the opening / closing member 51 is converted from the closed state to the open state, and the special winning opening 50 is opened. Further, referring to the special winning opening opening mode determination table set in step S330-21, the opening time of the special winning opening 50 is special based on the current round game number (R) and opening number (K). Set in the game timer counter.

  In step S340-16, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command corresponding to the round game number (R) stored in the round game number (R) storage area in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the round designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. When this processing is finished, this big hit game processing is finished.

  In step S340-17, the main CPU 110a performs ending transition processing. Specifically, "0" is set in the open count (K) storage area, the special winning opening ball count (C) storage area, and the round game count (R) storage area to clear the value of each storage area. Further, based on the jackpot game control table and special figure stop symbol data, the ending time is set in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S340-18, the main CPU 110a sets an ending designation command corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the ending designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. When this processing is finished, this big hit game processing is finished.

In step S340-19, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending is currently in progress. If the ending is in progress (S340-19: Yes), step S
When the process proceeds to 340-20 and the ending is not in progress (S340-19: No), the jackpot game process of this time is ended.

  In step S340-20, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has elapsed (S340-20: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-21, and if it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (S340-20: No), the current The jackpot game process ends.

  In step S340-21, the main CPU 110a sets 4 to the special figure special power processing data, prepares to move the processing to the jackpot game end processing shown in FIG. 31, and ends the jackpot game processing this time.

(Main control board jackpot game end processing)
The jackpot game ending process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a jackpot game ending process in the main control board 110.

  In step S350-1, the main CPU 110a refers to the special figure stop symbol data set in the special figure stop symbol data storage area and the game state setting table.

  In step S350-2, the main CPU 110a performs a high-probability game flag setting process. Specifically, referring to the game state setting table shown in FIG. 11, if the special figure stop symbol data is to set the high probability game flag, set the high probability flag in the high probability flag storage area, If the special figure stop symbol data does not set the high-probability game flag, do not set the high-probability game flag in the high-probability flag storage area or clear the high-probability game flag storage area. For example, if the special figure stop symbol data is "10", the high probability flag is set in the high probability game flag storage area, and if the special figure stop symbol data is "14", the high probability game flag is not set.

  In step S350-3, the main CPU 110a performs a high-probability game number setting process. Specifically, referring to the game state setting table shown in FIG. 11, if the special figure stop symbol data is to set the high probability game number, the number of remaining fluctuations (X) storage area of the high probability game state Set a predetermined number to. For example, if the special figure stop symbol data is "10", 10000 is set in the remaining variation number (X) storage area of the high probability game state, and if the special figure stop symbol data is "14", the high probability game Nothing is set or 0 is set in the remaining number of fluctuations (X) storage area of the state.

  In step S350-4, the main CPU 110a performs a time saving game flag setting process. Specifically, referring to the game state setting table shown in FIG. 11, if the special figure stop symbol data is to set the time saving game flag, set the time saving game flag in the time saving game flag storage area, If the figure stop symbol data is one that does not set the time saving game flag, do not set the time saving game flag in the time saving game flag storage area or clear the time saving game flag storage area. In the embodiment of the present invention, the time saving game flag is set for any special figure stop symbol data.

  In step S350-5, the main CPU 110a performs a time saving game number setting process. Specifically, referring to the game state setting table shown in FIG. 11, if the special figure stop symbol data is to set the number of time saving game, a predetermined number in the remaining number of fluctuations (J) storage area of the time saving game state Set the number of times. For example, if the special figure stop symbol data is "10", 10000 is set in the remaining number of fluctuations (J) storage area of the time saving game state, and if the special figure stop symbol data is "14", the time saving game state 100 is set in the remaining number of fluctuations (J) storage area.

  In step S350-6, the main CPU 110a refers to the high-probability game flag storage area and the time saving game flag storage area to confirm the game state, and sends a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state to the production transmission data storage area. Set to. Thereby, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  In step S350-7, the main CPU 110a sets the round number erasing data for erasing the display (LED lit) of the round number indicator 66 (LED off) in a predetermined processing area. As a result, when the round number erasing data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800. The display is erased.

  In step S350-8, the main CPU 110a sets "0" to the special symbol special electric power process data, prepares to move the process to the special symbol memory determination process shown in FIG. 25, and ends the jackpot game ending process of this time.

(Universal / universal control processing of main control board)
The universal figure / universal communication control process will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the universal graphic / universal communication control processing in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S401, the CPU 110a loads general / universal / universal processing data, refers to the branch destination address from the general / universal / universal processing data loaded in step S402, and normal / universal / universal processing data is 0 if normal. The process is moved to the symbol variation process (step S410), and if the universal / universal process data = 1, the process is moved to the auxiliary game process (step S420).

  This "University of Japan / University processing data" will be set as necessary in each subroutine of the University of Universe / Universal control processing, as will be described later, so that the sub-routines necessary for the game should be processed appropriately. Becomes

  In the normal symbol variation process of step S410, the main CPU 110a performs a hit determination process, a normal symbol determination process that determines the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed, a general symbol variation pattern determination process that determines the variation time of the normal symbol, and the like. This normal symbol variation process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  In the auxiliary game process of step S420, the main CPU 110a performs a process of controlling the auxiliary game (hit game). This auxiliary game processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 34.

(Ordinary pattern variation process of the main control board)
The normal symbol variation process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S410-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variable display of normal symbols is being performed. If it is during the variable display of the normal symbol (normal symbol time counter ≠ 0) (step S410-1: Yes), the process moves to step S410-12, and if the variable display of the normal symbol is not in progress (step S410-1) : No), the process proceeds to step S410-2.

  In step S410-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the value of the normal symbol reservation number (G) storage area in which the number of general symbol reservations is stored is 1 or more. If it is determined that the value of the normal symbol reservation number (G) storage area is 1 or more (S410-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step S410-3, and the value of the normal symbol reservation number (G) storage area When it is determined that is not 1 or more (S410-2: No), the current normal symbol variation process is ended.

  In step S410-3, the main CPU 110a subtracts "1" from the value stored in the normal symbol reservation number (G) storage area to update (G ← G + 1).

  In step S410-4, the main CPU 110a performs a shift process of the data stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the normal symbol reservation number (G) storage area subtracted in step S410-2. Specifically, each data stored in the fourth storage unit from the first storage unit in the normal symbol storage area is shifted to the previous storage unit. Here, the data stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the determination storage area (0th storage unit). At this time, the data stored in the first storage unit is written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit), and the data already written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit) is normally stored as a symbol. It will be erased from the area. As a result, the random number value for hitting determination, the random number value for winning symbol determination, and the random number value for general pattern variation pattern used in the previous game are erased.

  In step S410-5, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol storage designating command in the production transmission data storage area and transmits it to the production control board 130.

  In step S410-6, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol suspension display data in a predetermined processing area.

  In step S410-7, the main CPU 110a performs a hit determination process. Specifically, the current time saving game state and the random number for hit determination stored in the 0th storage section of the normal symbol hold storage area are compared with the hit determination table of the normal symbol shown in FIG. 15 (a). Judgment whether or not to win (normal lottery lottery).

  In step S410-8, the main CPU 110a performs normal symbol determination processing. Specifically, the current time saving game state, the result of the hit determination in step S410-7, and the random number value for normal figure stop stored in the 0th storage section of the normal symbol holding storage area are shown in FIG. 16 ( b) The normal symbol stop symbol determination table shown in FIG. 7C is collated to determine the type of normal symbol (general symbol halt symbol data) and set in the regular symbol halt symbol storage area.

  In step S410-9, the main CPU 110a specifies the general figure designating command based on the general figure stop design data determined in step S410-8, and sets the identified general figure designating command in the production transmission data storage area. To do. As a result, the universal figure designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  In step S410-10, the main CPU 110a performs a universal figure variation pattern determination process. Specifically, the current time saving game state, the result of the hit determination in step S410-7, and the normal figure fluctuation pattern random value stored in the 0th storage section of the normal symbol reservation storage area are shown in FIG. 10 ( The variation time (variation pattern) of the ordinary symbol is determined by collating with the variation pattern determination table of the ordinary symbol shown in c).

  In step S410-11, the main CPU 110a identifies the universal figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the variation time (variation pattern) of the ordinary symbol determined in step S410-10, and specifies the identified universal figure variation pattern designation command. Set in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the universal figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  In step S410-12, the main CPU 110a sets the variable time of the normal symbol determined in step S410-10 to the normal symbol time counter. The normal symbol time counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S410-13, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol variation display data for causing the regular symbol first display 62 to perform a variation display of normal symbols (LED blinking). As a result, when the normal symbol variation display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in the above step S700, and the created data is output in step S800, which is the first normal symbol display. The variable display of the container 62 is started.

  In step S410-14, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variation time of the normal symbol has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol time counter set in step S410-11 has become "0". When it is determined that the variation time of the normal symbol is over (S410-14: Yes), the process is moved to step S410-15, and when it is determined that the variation time of the ordinary symbol is not over (S410-14: No), the normal symbol changing process of this time is ended.

  In step S410-15, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol stop display data for causing the normal symbol determined in step S410-8 to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol first display 62 in a predetermined processing area. As a result, when the normal symbol stop display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800. The normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the container 62, and the player is informed of the determination result of the lottery.

  In step S410-16, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol determination command in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the normal symbol determination command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  In step S410-17, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop symbol data of the normal symbol is a hit stop symbol. If it is a hit stop symbol (S410-17: Yes), the process is moved to step S410-18. If it is not a hit stop symbol (S410-17: No), the current normal symbol variation process is ended.

  In step S410-18, the main CPU 110a sets "1" in the universal graphic data processing data, and prepares to shift the processing to the auxiliary game processing shown in FIG.

  In step S410-19, the main CPU 110a performs an auxiliary game start process. In the auxiliary game start process, the main CPU 110a first sets the opening mode determination table of the second starting opening of the main RAM 110c, and sets the opening count (S) stored in the opening count (S) storage area to "1". Add and update (S ← S + 1). Here, since the second starting port 47 has not been opened even once, “1” is stored in the opening number (S) storage area. Then, energization data for energizing the second starting opening / closing solenoid 48b to open the movable member 48 of the second starting opening 47 is set. As a result, the movable member 48 is converted from the closed state to the open state, and the second starting port 47 is opened. Further, referring to the opening mode determination table of the second starting opening, the opening time of the second starting opening 47 is set in the auxiliary game timer counter based on the current opening number (S). When this process is finished, the normal symbol variation process this time is finished. The auxiliary game timer counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in step S110.

(Auxiliary game processing of the main control board)
The auxiliary game processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an auxiliary game process in the main control board 110.

  In step S420-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second starting opening is currently open. Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the second opening opening / closing solenoid 48b is set. If it is determined that the second starting port 47 is open (S420-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S420-2, and if it is determined that the second starting port 47 is not open (S420-1). : No), the process proceeds to step S420-7.

  In step S420-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the conditions for ending the opening of the second starting opening are satisfied. Specifically, the value of the second starting entrance ball counter (L) has reached the specified number (10) or the opening time at the current opening count (S) has elapsed (auxiliary game timer counter = 0). ) Is applicable. If it is determined that the opening end condition is satisfied (S420-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step S420-3, and if it is determined that the opening end condition is not satisfied (S420-2: No). , This auxiliary game processing is ended.

  In step S420-3, the main CPU 110a performs a second start opening closing process. Specifically, the second start opening / closing solenoid energization stop data for converting the movable member 48 of the second start opening 47 to the closed state is set. As a result, the movable member 48 is converted from the open state to the closed state, and the second starting port 47 is closed. Further, referring to the opening mode determination table of the second starting port set in step S410-19, the closing time of the second starting port 47 is set in the auxiliary game timer counter based on the current opening count (S). set. When this process ends, the current auxiliary game process ends.

  In step S420-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game ending condition is satisfied. The auxiliary game end condition is that the normal operation number (D) is the preset number of times the second starting port 7 is opened, or the value of the second starting port entrance counter (L) is the specified number (10). Individual) has been reached. When the main CPU 110a determines that the auxiliary game ending condition is satisfied (S420-4: Yes), the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S420-5, and when determining that the auxiliary game ending condition is not satisfied (S420). -4: No) ends the auxiliary game process.

  In step S420-5, the main CPU 110a performs an auxiliary game ending process. Specifically, "0" is set in the storage area for the number of openings of the second starting opening (S) and the storage area for the second starting opening ball counter (L) to clear the values in the respective storage areas.

  In step S420-6, the main CPU 110a sets 0 for the universal pattern / general electric power process data, and prepares to shift the process to the normal symbol variation process shown in FIG. When this process ends, the current auxiliary game process ends.

  In step S420-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time of the second starting opening has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the auxiliary game timer counter is not "0". When it is determined that the closing time of the second starting opening has ended (S420-7: Yes), the process proceeds to step S420-8, and when it is determined that the closing time of the second starting opening has not ended ( S420-7: No), the auxiliary game process of this time is ended.

  In step S420-8, the main CPU 110a performs a second starting opening opening process. Specifically, the second start port opening / closing solenoid energization start data for energizing the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b to open the movable member 48 of the second start port 47 is set. As a result, the movable member 48 is converted from the closed state to the open state, and the second starting port 47 is opened. Further, referring to the opening mode determination table of the second starting port set in step S410-17, the opening time of the second starting port 47 is set in the auxiliary game timer counter based on the current opening number (S). To do.

(Main control board data creation process)
The data creation processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a data creation process in the main control board 110.

  In step S700-1, the main CPU 110a opens or closes the special winning opening / closing solenoid 51b based on the special winning opening / closing solenoid energization start data or the special winning opening / closing solenoid energization stop data set in the big hit game process. Drive control data corresponding to a drive signal for driving is created.

  In step S700-2, the main CPU 110a opens the second starting opening / closing solenoid 48b based on the second starting opening / closing solenoid energization start data or the second starting opening / closing solenoid energization stop data set in the auxiliary game process, or Drive control data corresponding to a drive signal for driving to a closed state is created.

  In step S700-3, the main CPU 110a, based on the special symbol variation display data or the special symbol stop display data set in the special symbol storage determination process or the special symbol variation process, the first special symbol first display 60 or the The LED of the 2 special symbol first indicator 61 is turned on, blinks or is turned off, and the special symbol first display indicator display control data corresponding to the special symbol display signal is created.

  In step S700-4, the main CPU 110a turns on, blinks, or turns off the LED of the normal symbol first display 62 based on the normal symbol variation display data or the normal symbol stop display data set in the normal symbol variation process. The normal symbol first display corresponding display control data corresponding to the normal symbol display signal is created.

  In step S700-5, the main CPU 110a, the first starting opening detection signal input process, the second starting opening detection signal input process or the special symbol storage determination process set special symbol hold display data (first special symbol hold display data ,, 2nd special symbol reservation display data), the special symbol reservation display signal for turning on, blinking or extinguishing the LED of the first special symbol reservation first indicator 63 or the second special symbol reservation first indicator 64 Create display control data for the special symbol hold first display corresponding to.

  In step S700-6, the main CPU 110a lights, blinks, or turns off the LED of the normal symbol holding first display 65 based on the normal symbol holding display data set in the winning gate detection signal input process or the normal symbol changing process. To create a normal symbol hold first display display control data corresponding to the normal symbol hold display signal for.

  In step S700-7, the main CPU 110a turns on or off the LED of the round number indicator 66 based on the round number display data or the round number deletion data set in the special symbol stop process or the jackpot game end process. Create display control data for the round number display corresponding to the round number display signal.

  In step S700-8, the main CPU 110a displays the right hit display for turning on or off the LED of the right hit first display 67 based on the right hit display data or the right hit erase data set in the special symbol stop processing. The display control data for the right-handed first display unit corresponding to the signal is created.

  In step S700-9, the main CPU 110a creates high-probability gaming state display display control data for turning on the LED of the high-probability gaming state indicator 68 if the gaming state at the time of power restoration is the high-probability gaming state. To do.

  In step S700-10, the main CPU 110a creates display control data for the time saving game status indicator for turning on the LED of the time saving gaming status indicator 69 if the gaming status at the time of power restoration is the time saving gaming status.

  In step S700-11, the main CPU 110a generates external signal output data for outputting external information data (game information), information relating to abnormality, RAM clear execution information (security signal), etc. to the outside of the gaming machine. Performs signal output data creation processing.

  Next, the output control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the output control process in the main control board 110.

  In step S800-1, the main CPU 110a outputs various drive control data created in steps S700-1 to S700-2 to drive the special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b and the second starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b. Perform port output processing. Furthermore, external signal output data such as external information data (game information) created in step S700-11, information relating to abnormality, and RAM clear execution information (security signal) is output to the game information output terminal board 108.

  In step S800-2, the main CPU 110a, the first special symbol first indicator 60, the second special symbol first indicator 61, the normal symbol first indicator 62, the first special symbol reservation first indicator 63, the third Each LED of 2 special symbol reservation first indicator 64, normal symbol reservation first indicator 65, round number indicator 66, right hitting first indicator 67, high probability game state indicator 68, time saving game state indicator 69 In order to turn on, turn off, or blink, the display output processing for outputting the various display control data created in steps S700-3 to S700-10 is performed.

  In step S800-3, the main CPU 110a transmits the command set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120, and sends the command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. A command output process for transmitting to the production control board 130 is performed.

(Explanation of commands)
The types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130, the description of which is partially omitted in the flowchart of the main control board 110 described above, will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. 37 and 38 are diagrams showing types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130.

  The "design symbol designating command" indicates the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed, "MODE" is set to "E0H", and DATA information is set according to the type of the special symbol. In addition, since the type of special symbol is to determine the type of jackpot or the high probability game state as a result, the effect symbol designating command can be said to indicate the type of jackpot or the gaming state.

  In this effect symbol designating command, various special symbols are determined, and when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the effect symbol designating command corresponding to the determined special symbol is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, the effect symbol designating command corresponding to the special symbol determined when the variable display of the special symbol is started in step S311-10 is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately thereafter, the effect design designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  The "first special symbol memory designation command" indicates the number of reserved memories stored in the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area, and "MODE" is set to "E1H", and the number of reserved memories. The information of DATA is set according to.

  This first special symbol storage designation command, when the number of reserved storages stored in the first special symbol holding number (U1) storage area is switched, the first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the number of holding storages production control It is transmitted to the board 130. Specifically, when the value stored in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is increased or decreased in step S230-11 or step S310-7, the number corresponding to the increased or decreased reservation storage number The 1 special symbol memory designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. After that, the first special symbol storage designation command set in the transmission data storage area for effect in the above step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  The "second special symbol memory designation command" indicates the number of reserved memories stored in the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area, and "MODE" is set to "E2H", and the number of reserved memories. The information of DATA is set according to.

  This second special symbol storage designation command, when the number of reserved storages stored in the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area is switched, the second special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the number of reserved storages effect control It is transmitted to the board 130. Specifically, when the value stored in the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area is increased or decreased in step S240-17 or step S310-7, the number corresponding to the increased or decreased reservation storage number The 2 special symbol memory designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. After that, the second special symbol memory designation command set in the transmission data storage area for effect in the above step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  In the present embodiment, the "first special symbol storage designation command" and the "second special symbol storage designation command" are collectively referred to as "special symbol storage designation command".

  The "special symbol confirmation command" indicates that the special symbol is stopped and displayed, "MODE" is set to "E3H", and "DATA" is set to "00H". This special symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol first display device 60 or the second special symbol first display device 61 in step S320-3, the special symbol determination command is for the production of the main RAM 110c. It is set in the transmission data storage area. After that, immediately in step S800-3, the special symbol determination command set in the production transmission data storage area is transmitted to the production control board 130.

The "ordinary symbol confirmation command" indicates that the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed, "MODE" is set to "E3H", and "DATA" is set to "01H".
This normal symbol determination command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol first display unit 62 in step S410-14, the normal symbol confirmation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately thereafter, the normal symbol determination command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130.

  The "variation pattern designation command for the first special symbol" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the first special symbol first display 60, and "MODE" is set by "E6H", and various The information of DATA is set according to the fluctuation pattern of.

  This variation pattern designation command for the first special symbol, when the variation display of the special symbol of the first special symbol first display device 60 is started, for the first special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern of the determined special symbol The variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, in step S312-6, the first special symbol variation pattern designation command corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately thereafter, the first special symbol variation pattern designation command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is transmitted to the production control board 130.

  The "variation pattern designation command for the second special symbol" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the second special symbol first display 61, and "MODE" is set at "E7H", and various The information of DATA is set according to the fluctuation pattern of.

  This variation pattern designation command for the second special symbol, the second special symbol variation corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined when the variation display of the special symbol of the second special symbol first display 61 is started. A pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, in the step S312-6, the second special symbol variation pattern designation command corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Then, the second special symbol variation pattern designation command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130.

  In the present embodiment, the “first special symbol variation pattern designation command” and the “second special symbol variation pattern designation command” are collectively referred to as a “variation pattern designation command”.

  The "start prize designation command" is information for determining the result of the jackpot lottery in advance, and if it is based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 45, "MODE" is set to "E8H", If it is based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 47, "MODE" is set to "E9H", and the DATA information is set in accordance with various winning information.

  This start winning designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the game ball wins the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47, the starting winning designation command corresponding to the determined starting winning information.

  Specifically, in step S230-10 or S240-16, the start winning designation command corresponding to the determined winning information is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately thereafter, the start winning award designation command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is transmitted to the production control board 130.

  The "round designation command" indicates the number of jackpots that match various jackpot types, "MODE" is set to "EAH", and DATA information is set according to the number of jackpots. .

  As for this round designation command, when the jackpot round is started, a round designation command corresponding to the number of started rounds is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, when the opening / closing member 51 of the special winning opening 50 is opened in step S340-5 or step S340-16, a round designation command corresponding to the number of rounds when the opening is performed is transmitted to the main RAM 110c for presentation. It is set in the data storage area. After that, immediately in step S800-3, the special winning opening opening designation command set in the transmission data storage area for effect is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  The "opening designation command" indicates that various jackpot games (special gaming state) are started, "MODE" is set to "EBH", and DATA information is set according to the jackpot type. There is.

  As for this opening designation command, when various types of jackpots start, an opening designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  Specifically, at the start of the jackpot game process in step S330-23, the opening designation command corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. After that, the opening designation command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130.

  The "ending designation command" indicates that various types of jackpots have ended, "MODE" is set to "ECH", and DATA information is set according to the type of jackpot.

  As for this ending designation command, when various types of jackpots are finished, the ending designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  Specifically, at the start of the jackpot game ending process of step S340-18, an ending designation command corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately thereafter, the ending designation command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130.

  The “universal figure designation command” indicates the type of the ordinary symbol that is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol first display 62, and the “MODE” is set to “EDH”, and the data of DATA is set according to the type of the ordinary symbol. Information is set.

  In this universal figure designation command, various ordinary symbols are determined, and when the variable display of the ordinary symbols is started, the universal symbol designation command corresponding to the determined ordinary symbol is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  Specifically, when the variable display of the ordinary symbol is started in step S410-9, the universal symbol designating command corresponding to the determined ordinary symbol is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately thereafter, the universal figure designating command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130.

  The "universal figure variation pattern designation command" indicates the variation time of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol first display 62, and "MODE" is set to "EEH", according to the variation time of various ordinary symbols. Data information is set.

  This general pattern variation pattern designation command is a general control variation pattern designation command corresponding to the variation time of the determined normal symbol when the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol first display device 62 is started. Sent to 130. Specifically, when the variable display of the normal symbol is started in step S410-11, the general pattern variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation time of the normal symbol is the transmission data storage area for effect of the main RAM 110c. Is set to. Then, immediately in step S800-3, the universal figure variation pattern designation command set in the production transmission data storage area is transmitted to the production control board 130.

  The "ordinary symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved storages stored in the ordinary symbol reserved number (G) storage area, "MODE" is set to "EFH", and DATA is set in accordance with the number of reserved storages. Information is set.

  This normal symbol storage designation command, when the reserved storage number stored in the normal symbol reserve number (G) storage area is switched, a normal symbol storage designation command corresponding to the reserved storage number is transmitted to the effect control board 130. . Specifically, when the value stored in the normal symbol reservation number (G) storage area in step S14, step S250-7, or step S410-5 increases or decreases, the number of reserved storages after the increase or decrease is dealt with. A normal symbol memory designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately thereafter, the normal symbol storage designation command set in the transmission data storage area for effect in the above step S800-3 is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  The "game state designation command" indicates whether it is a time saving game state or a non-time saving game state, "MODE" is set to "F1H", and if it is a non-time saving game state, "DATA" is " "00H" is set, and "DATA" is set to "01H" if it is in a time saving game state.

  This game state designation command, at the start of variation of the special symbol, at the end of variation of the special symbol, at the start of the jackpot game and at the end of the jackpot, the game state designation command corresponding to the game state is transmitted to the effect control board 130. .

  Specifically, when the variable display of the special symbol is started in step S310-14, the high-probability game flag, the high-probability game count, the time-saving game flag, and the time-saving game count (J) are changed in step S330-13. When there is a possibility that it has been done, when the high probability game flag, the high probability game number, the time saving game flag and the time saving game number (J) are set in the step S350-6, the game state corresponding to the current game state. The designated command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. After that, the game state designation command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130.

  The “RAM clear designation command”, the “power-on designation command”, and the “power-restoration designation command” indicate whether or not power-on of the gaming machine 1 initializes the main RAM 110c. When “MODE” is set to “F2H” and the main RAM 110c is initialized, “DATA” is set to “00H” and “01H”, and when the main RAM 110c is not initialized, “DATA” is set. It is set to "02H".

  The RAM clear designation command, the power-on designation command, and the power-restoration designation command correspond to whether or not the main RAM 110c is initialized when the game machine 1 is powered on. The command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  Specifically, the RAM clear designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the RAM clear switch is turned on when the power is turned on (step S8). The power-on designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the RAM clear switch is turned on again and the information stored in the main RAM 101c is cleared (step S12). The power restoration specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the RAM clear switch is not turned on when the power is turned on (step S7).

  The "error designation command" indicates an error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1, "MODE" is set to "F3H", and "DATA" information is set according to the type of error.

  This error designation command is used when the game ball is won into the second starting port 47, when the magnetic detection switch 53a or the radio wave detection switch 54a detects it, when the winning confirmation detection switch 52a detects it, when the glass frame 4 is opened, When the lower tray 12 is full, when a dispensing abnormality occurs, an error designation command corresponding to the error type is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  Specifically, when a magnetic / radio wave abnormality is determined in step S600, an abnormal prize is determined in S260, an illegal ball is determined in S240-7, the payout control board 120 is used to control the glass frame 4 When it is detected, the lower tray 12 is full, the shortage of game balls for paying out is detected, an error designation command corresponding to the type of error is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately thereafter, the error designation command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130.

  The "error release designation command" indicates that the error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1 has been resolved, "MODE" is set to "F4H", and information of "DATA" is set according to the type of the resolved error. Is set.

  As for this error cancellation designation command, when the glass frame 4 is closed, when the lower tray 12 is full, when a dispensing abnormality is eliminated, etc., an error designation command corresponding to the type of error is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  Specifically, when it is detected that the glass frame 4 is closed, the lower tray 12 is full, and the shortage of gaming balls for payout is detected by the payout control board 120, the error release corresponding to the released error type is detected. The designated command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately thereafter, the error designation command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130.

(Main process of production control unit 130m)
A process executed by the sub CPU 130a in the effect control unit 130m will be described. First, the main processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a main process in the effect control unit 130m.

  When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 180, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

  The sub CPU 130a sets an interrupt prohibition that prohibits a timer interrupt in step S1000, and performs an initialization process in step S1001. In this processing, the sub CPU 130a reads the main processing program from the sub ROM 130b in response to power-on, initializes the flags and the like stored in the sub RAM 130c, and performs processing such as initial setting.

  In step S1002, the sub CPU 130a sets an interrupt permission that permits a timer interrupt, and in step S1003, performs a sub random number updating process. In this process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various random number values stored in the sub RAM 130c. After that, the process of step S1003 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of the production control unit 130m)
The timer interrupt process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process in the effect control unit 130m. The reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the effect control unit 130m generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds), so that the timer interrupt process described below is executed.

  In step S1100, the sub CPU 120a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a in the stack area.

  In step S1200, the sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing. In this process, the sub CPU 130a analyzes the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c. A specific description of the command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42.

  In addition, when the effect control unit 130m receives the command transmitted from the main control board 110, a command reception interrupt process of the effect control unit 130m (not shown) occurs and stores the received command in the reception buffer. After that, in step S1200, the received command is analyzed.

  In step S1300, the sub CPU 130a performs a timer update process for updating various timer counters used in the effect control unit 130m.

  In step S1400, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the signals of the effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a have been input, and when the signals of the effect button detection switch 17a or the like have been input, the image control unit 140. Performs effect input control processing for transmitting an effect button signal and the like.

  In step S1500, the sub CPU 130a, the special symbol second indicator 80, 81, the normal symbol second indicator 82, the special symbol reserve second indicator 83, 84, the normal symbol reserve second indicator 85, and right strike Data creation processing of various display control data output to the second display 87 is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 66.

  In step S1600, the sub CPU 130a performs a data output process. In this process, a display output process for outputting a signal such as the display control data created in S700 is performed. In addition, command output processing for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c to another board is also performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 67.

  In step S1700, the sub CPU 130a restores the information saved in step S1100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a.

(Command analysis processing of the production control unit 130m)
The command analysis processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a command analysis process (1) in the effect control unit 130m. In addition, FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a command analysis process (2) in the effect control unit 130m. The command analysis process (2) in FIG. 42 is performed subsequent to the command analysis process (1) in FIG. 41.

  First, in step S1201, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether or not there is a command in the reception buffer, and confirms whether or not the command has been received. In this process, if there is a command in the reception buffer, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1202. On the other hand, in this process, if there is no command in the reception buffer, the sub CPU 130a ends this command analysis process.

  In step S1202, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a customer waiting state designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is the customer waiting state designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1203. On the other hand, in this processing, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not the customer waiting state designation command, the sub CPU 130a shifts the processing to step S1204.

  In step S1203, the sub CPU 130a performs a customer waiting effect process. Specifically, 30 seconds after receiving the customer waiting state designation command, a customer waiting demo image is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 or the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, and power saving is in progress. Display images. When this process ends, the current effect control unit command analysis process ends.

  In step S1204, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special symbol storage designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is the special symbol storage designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1205. On the other hand, in this processing, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not the special symbol storage designating command, the sub CPU 130a moves the processing to step S1206.

  In step S1205, the sub CPU 130a analyzes the special figure reserved storage number from the special symbol storage designation command, and sets the analyzed special figure reserved storage number in the special figure reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c. I do. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 43. When this process ends, the current effect control unit command analysis process ends.

  In step S1206, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a start winning award designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is the start winning award designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1207. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not the start winning award designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1208.

In step S1207, the sub CPU 130a performs a hold icon display mode determination process that determines the display mode of the hold icon displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 based on the content of the start winning combination designation command. Specifically, the result of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the command and the variation pattern are specified from the start winning award designation command, and the change scenario for changing the display mode of the hold icon according to the expectation of being a jackpot is determined. To do. For example, the hold icon is displayed in white in the normal (default) display mode, in blue in the special display mode 1, in green in the special display mode 2, and in red in the special display mode 3 as a jackpot expectation level. May be set in the order of normal display mode (white) <special display mode 1 (blue) <special display mode 2 (green) <special display mode 3 (red).
Then, a hold icon display designating command for displaying the determined hold icon on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. When this process ends, the current effect control unit command analysis process ends.

  The hold icon display designating command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image controller 140 in the data output process of step S1600. Then, the image control unit 140 displays the hold icon based on the hold icon display designating command.

  In step S1208, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an effect symbol designating command. In this processing, if the command stored in the reception buffer is the effect symbol designating command, the sub CPU 130a moves the processing to step S1209. On the other hand, in this processing, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not the effect designating command, the sub CPU 130a shifts the processing to step S1210.

  In step S1209, the sub CPU 130a performs a stop symbol data determination process for determining the effect symbol 70a to be stopped and displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 based on the content of the received effect symbol designation command.

  In this stop symbol data determination process, the effect designating command is analyzed to determine whether or not there is a big hit, stop symbol data (big hit symbol data, lost symbol data) for identifying the type of big hit, and the determined stop symbol The data is set in the stopped symbol storage area of the sub RAM 130c. When this process ends, the current effect control unit command analysis process ends.

  In step S1210, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a variation pattern designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is the variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1211. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not the variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1213.

  In step S1211, the sub CPU 130a performs a variation effect pattern determination process. Specifically, in this process, the sub CPU 130a refers to the variation effect pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 45 to 47, and determines the effect mode (effect pattern) based on the change pattern designation command and the effect random number value. decide. A detailed description of the variation effect pattern determination process will be given later with reference to FIG. A detailed description of the variation effect pattern determination table will be given later with reference to FIGS. 45 to 47.

  Then, the sub CPU 130a sets the determined effect pattern in the symbol effect pattern storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and sets the determined effect pattern in the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170. For transmission, the effect pattern data indicating the effect pattern stored in the effect pattern storage area is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c.

  In step S1212, the sub CPU 130a uses the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, the audio output device 9, etc. based on the variation effect pattern determined in step S1211. The notice effect determination process for determining the notice effect to be performed is performed. Note that a specific description of this advance notice effect determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the current effect control unit command analysis process ends.

  In step S1213, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special symbol determination command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is the special symbol confirmation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1214. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not the symbol confirmation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1216.

  In step S1214, the sub CPU 130a, in order to stop and display the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) The stop designating command for the stop display is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and the special symbol stop display data for displaying the first special symbol second display 80 or the second special symbol second display 81 as a stop (the first 1 special symbol stop display data, the second special symbol stop display data) to perform the effect symbol fluctuation stop process to set in a predetermined processing area. Accordingly, when the first special symbol stop display data or the second special symbol stop display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S1500, and the created data is output in step S1600. Thereby, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol second indicator 80 or the second special symbol second indicator 81.

  The stop designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image controller 140 in the data output process of step S1600. Then, the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1, second special symbol display area DZ2) are stopped and displayed by the image control unit 140 ( This will be stopped).

  In step S1215, the sub CPU 130a performs an effect mode setting process for setting an effect mode for changing the effect mode of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, and the like. . In addition, here, when the mode change condition such as the number of times of the variable display reaches a predetermined number or the mode change lottery is won, the first effect mode (normal mode) or the second effect mode (MV mode) ) Is set. When this process ends, the current effect control unit command analysis process ends. The first effect mode and the second effect mode are set in the normal game state, but may be set in other game states.

  In step S1216, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a normal symbol storage designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is the normal symbol storage designating command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1217. On the other hand, in this processing, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not the normal symbol storage designating command, the sub CPU 130a moves the processing to step S1218.

  In step S1217, the sub CPU 130a analyzes the ordinary figure holding storage number from the normal symbol storage designation command, and the normal symbol holding display data for displaying the analyzed ordinary figure holding storage number on the ordinary symbol holding second display 85. Is set in a predetermined processing area, and the universal figure pending storage update processing is performed. As a result, when the normal symbol hold display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S1500, and the created data is output in step S1600, which is the normal symbol hold second. The display 85 normally displays the number of symbols held.

  In step S1218, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the universal pattern variation pattern designation command. In this process, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1219 if the command stored in the reception buffer is the universal figure variation pattern designation command. On the other hand, in this processing, the sub CPU 130a shifts the processing to step S1220 if the command stored in the reception buffer is not the universal figure variation pattern designation command.

  In step S1219, the sub CPU 130a performs the general-purpose roulette effect determination performed by the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, and the sub CPU 130a determines the normal symbol second display device. A normal symbol roulette effect determination process for setting normal symbol variable display data for causing the variable symbol 83 to perform variable symbol display (blinking of LED) is performed in a predetermined processing area. As a result, when the normal symbol variation display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S1500, and the created data is output in step S1600, which is the normal symbol second display. The variable display of the container 83 is started. The ordinary figure roulette effect is an effect that is performed when the time saving game state is the non-time saving game state, and specifically, the stop symbol data of the ordinary symbol is the ordinary symbol 1 and the auxiliary game is performed. It is a preliminary announcement that makes the player expect. When this process ends, the current effect control unit command analysis process ends.

  In step S1220, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a normal symbol determination command. In this process, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1221 if the command stored in the reception buffer is a normal symbol confirmation command. On the other hand, in this process, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1223 if the command stored in the reception buffer is not the normal symbol confirmation command.

  In step S1221, the normal symbol variation stop process for setting the normal symbol stop display data for stopping and displaying the normal symbol second display device 82 in a predetermined processing area is performed. As a result, when the normal symbol stop display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S1500, and the created data is output in step S1600, which is the normal symbol second display. The design is normally stopped and displayed on the container 82.

  In step S1222, the sub CPU 130a performs a long opening effect execution process for effecting that the second starting opening 47 is opened longer than usual. In this long opening production execution processing, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol data of the normal symbol is the normal symbol 1 and the auxiliary game is performed, and the stop symbol data of the normal symbol is the normal symbol 1 and the auxiliary game is performed. If it is called, a long opening effect is executed. When this process ends, the current effect control unit command analysis process ends.

  In step S1223, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a game state designation command. In this process, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1224 if the command stored in the reception buffer is the game state designation command. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not the game state designation command, the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S1225.

  In step S1224, the sub CPU 130a sets data indicating the gaming state based on the received gaming state designation command in the gaming state storage area in the sub RAM 130c, and the gaming state based on the received gaming state designation command is the time saving gaming state. And, if it is not the special gaming state (big hit gaming state), the gaming state in which the right hitting erasing data for erasing the display (LED lighting) of the right hitting second indicator 87 (LED off) is set in a predetermined processing area. Perform the setting process. When this process ends, the current effect control unit command analysis process ends. As a result, when the right-handed erase data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S1500, and the created data is output in step S1600. The display of 87 is erased.

  In step S1225, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether the command stored in the reception buffer is an opening designating command for jackpot. In this process, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1226 if the command stored in the reception buffer is the opening designation command. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not the opening designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1227.

  In step S1226, the sub CPU 120a performs a jackpot effect pattern determination process of determining a jackpot effect pattern. Specifically, in this processing, the sub CPU 130a refers to the jackpot effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65, and determines the jackpot effect mode (jackpot effect pattern) based on the opening designation command. In addition, a specific description of the jackpot effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 64. A detailed description of the jackpot effect pattern determination table will be given later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the current effect control unit command analysis process ends.

  In step S1227, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command. In this process, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1228 if the command stored in the reception buffer is the round designation command. On the other hand, in this processing, the sub CPU 130a shifts the processing to step S1229 unless the command stored in the reception buffer is the round designation command.

  In step S1228, the sub CPU 130a performs a round effect pattern determination process for determining a round effect pattern. In this round effect pattern determination processing, a round effect pattern is determined based on the round designation command and the jackpot effect pattern determined in step S1226, the determined round effect pattern is set in the round effect pattern storage area, and the determined round effect is determined. In order to transmit the pattern information to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170, a round effect pattern designation command based on the determined round effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. When this process ends, the current effect control unit command analysis process ends.

  The round effect pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. . Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 provide a round effect corresponding to the round effect pattern designation command (round effect pattern) to the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. The rendering device such as the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, the audio output device 9, the board lighting device 74, the frame lighting device 10, the board driving device 75, or the like is caused to execute.

  In step S1229, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an ending designating command for jackpot. In this processing, the sub CPU 130a moves the processing to step S1230 if the command stored in the reception buffer is the ending designating command for jackpot. On the other hand, in this processing, the sub CPU 130a shifts the processing to step S1231 if the command stored in the reception buffer is not the ending designation command.

  In step S1230, the sub CPU 130a performs a jackpot end effect pattern determination process of determining a jackpot end effect pattern. In this jackpot end effect pattern determination process, the jackpot end effect pattern is determined based on the ending designating command for jackpot, the determined hit end effect pattern is set in the effect pattern storage area, and the information of the determined hit end effect pattern is set. In order to transmit to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170, a jackpot end effect pattern designation command based on the determined jackpot end effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. When this process ends, the current effect control unit command analysis process ends.

  The jackpot end effect pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. It Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 perform the jackpot end effect corresponding to the jackpot end effect pattern designating command (jackpot end effect pattern) on the first image display device (main liquid crystal). ) 70, the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, the audio output device 9, the board lighting device 74, the frame lighting device 10, the board driving device 75, and the like.

  In step S1231, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether the command stored in the reception buffer is an error designation command. In this processing, if the command stored in the reception buffer is an error designation command, the sub CPU 130a shifts the processing to step S1232. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not the error designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1233.

  In step S1232, the sub CPU 130a performs an error notification process of notifying that an error (event) related to the security of the gaming machine 1 has occurred. In this error notification processing, the type of error designation command, that is, the type of error that has occurred, is determined, the error notification effect corresponding to the type of error that has occurred is determined, and the determined error notification effect is stored in the error notification effect storage area. In order to transmit the information of the set and determined error notification effect to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170, an error notification designation command based on the determined error notification effect is stored in the sub RAM 130c. Set to send buffer. When this process ends, the current effect control unit command analysis process ends.

  The error notification designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 provide an error notification effect corresponding to the error notification designation command to the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device. (Sub liquid crystal) 71, audio output device 9, board lighting device 74, frame lighting device 10, board driving device 75, and the like are executed.

  In step S1233, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an error cancellation designation command. In this process, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1234 if the command stored in the reception buffer is an error cancellation designation command. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not the error cancellation designating command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1235.

  In step S1234, the sub CPU 130a performs error notification cancellation processing for canceling the error notification that is already being executed. In this error notification cancellation processing, the type of the error cancellation designation command, that is, the type of the resolved error is determined, the error notification effect corresponding to the resolved error type is cleared from the error notification effect storage area, and the resolved error notification is performed. In order to transmit the effect release information to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170, an error notification release designation command based on the resolved error notification effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. . When this process ends, the current effect control unit command analysis process ends.

  The error notification cancellation designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. . Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 end the error notification effect corresponding to the error notification cancellation designation command.

  In step S1235, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a RAM clear designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is a RAM clear designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1236. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not the RAM clear designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1237.

  In step S1236, the sub CPU 130a performs a RAM clear process for notifying that the RAM clear switch has been turned on (pressed) and the power has been turned on. In the RAM clear processing, the information of the RAM clear notification effect for notifying that the RAM clear is being prepared is displayed on the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, until the RAM clear is turned on (pressed) again. In order to transmit to the drive control unit 170, the RAM clear notification designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. When this process ends, the current effect control unit command analysis process ends.

  The RAM clear notification designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. . Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 display the RAM clear effect corresponding to the RAM clear notification designation command on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display. The production device such as the device (sub liquid crystal) 71, the audio output device 9, the board lighting device 74, the frame lighting device 10, the board driving device 75, etc. is caused to execute.

  In step S1237, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a power-on designation command. In this process, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1238 if the command stored in the reception buffer is the power-on designation command. On the other hand, in this processing, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not the power-on designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the processing to step S1239.

  In step S1238, the sub CPU 130a performs a power-on process for notifying that the RAM clear switch has been turned on again and the information stored in the main RAM 101c has been cleared. In this power-on process, the RAM is cleared, and power-on effect information for notifying that the power has been turned on is transmitted to the image controller 140, the sound controller 150, the lamp controller 160, and the drive controller 170. The closing notification designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. When this process ends, the current effect control unit command analysis process ends.

  The power-on notification designating command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image controller 140, the sound controller 150, the lamp controller 160, and the drive controller 170 in the data output process of step S1600. . Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 display the power-on effect corresponding to the power-on notification designating command on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display. The production device such as the device (sub liquid crystal) 71, the audio output device 9, the board lighting device 74, the frame lighting device 10, the board driving device 75, etc. is caused to execute.

  In step S1239, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the power restoration specification command. In this processing, if the command stored in the reception buffer is the power restoration specification command, the sub CPU 130a shifts the processing to step S1240. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not the power restoration command, the sub CPU 130a ends the effect control unit command analysis process this time.

  In step S1240, the sub CPU 130a performs a power recovery process for notifying that the RAM clear switch has not been turned on (pressed) and the power has been turned on (power recovery). In this power restoration process, since information on a power restoration effect for notifying that the power is being restored is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170, a power restoration notification designation command Is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. When this process ends, the current effect control unit command analysis process ends.

  The power supply restoration designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 provide the power restoration effect corresponding to the power restoration designation command to the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device. (Sub liquid crystal) 71, audio output device 9, board lighting device 74, frame lighting device 10, board driving device 75, and the like are executed.

(Special figure reservation storage update process of the production control unit)
The special figure pending storage update process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the special figure reservation storage update process in the effect control unit 130m.

  First, in step S1205-1, the sub CPU 130a confirms the content of the special symbol storage designation command determined to be received in step S1204, and in step S1205-2, the special symbol storage designation command confirmed in step S1205-1. Based on the contents of, the special symbol reservation number is set to the special symbol reservation storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

  In step S1205-3, the sub CPU 130a displays the first special symbol holding number or the second special symbol holding number on the first special symbol holding second display 83 or the second special symbol holding second display 84 (LED The 1st special symbol reservation display data or the 2nd special symbol reservation display data for making it light or blink) is set to a predetermined processing area. Accordingly, when the first special symbol hold display data or the second special symbol hold display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S1500, and the created data is output in step S1600. Thereby, the first special symbol reservation number or the second special symbol reservation number is displayed on the first special symbol reservation second display 83 or the second special symbol reservation second display 84.

In step S1205-4, the sub CPU 130a causes the first reserved number display area SH1.
Alternatively, in order to display the first hold number or the second hold number in the second hold number display area SH2, the first hold number or the second hold number is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1 or the second hold number display area SH2. The special symbol reservation number display designating command for display is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and the current special symbol reservation storage update process is ended.

  The special symbol reservation number display designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140 in the data output process of step S1600. Then, the image control unit 140 causes the first holding number display area SH1 or the second holding number display area SH2 to display the first holding number or the second holding number. If the power recovery effect is being performed, the first hold number or the second hold number is restored and displayed in the first hold number display area SH1 or the second hold number display area SH2 after a predetermined time has elapsed.

(Variation effect pattern determination process of effect control unit)
The variation effect pattern determination process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the variable effect pattern determination process in the effect control unit 130m.

  First, in step S1211-1, the sub CPU 130a stores the variation pattern designation command determined to be received in step S1210 in the variation pattern designation command area of the effect information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. That is, the variation pattern designation command stored in the storage area for the effect information up to that point is overwritten by the new variation pattern designation command.

  In step S1211-2, the sub CPU 130a confirms the content of the variation pattern designation command stored in step S1211-1, and in step S12111-3, acquires the variation effect pattern determination random value.

  In step S1211-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command is due to a game ball entering the first starting opening 45. When it is due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 45 (S1211-4: Yes), the process is moved to step S1211-5. On the other hand, if it is not due to the game ball entering the first starting opening 45 (S1211-4: No), the process proceeds to step S1211-9.

  In step S1211-5, the sub CPU 130a acquires the current effect mode information set in the effect mode setting process of step S1215.

  In Step S1211-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the effect mode information acquired in Step S1211-5 is the effect mode 1 (normal mode). When the effect mode information is effect mode 1 (normal mode) (S1211-6: Yes), the process is moved to step S1211-7. On the other hand, if the effect mode information is not effect mode 1 (normal mode) (MV mode described later) (S1211-6: No), the process proceeds to step S1211-8.

  In step S1211-7, the sub CPU130a selects the variation effect pattern determination table for effect mode 1 shown in FIG. 45, and in step S1211-8, the sub CPU130a causes the variation effect pattern for effect mode 2 shown in FIG. The determination table is selected, and in step S1211-9, the sub CPU 130a selects the variation effect pattern determination table for the second starting opening shown in FIG. The variation effect pattern determination table for the effect mode 1, the variation effect pattern determination table for the effect mode 2, and the variation effect pattern determination table for the second starting opening are stored in the sub RAM 130c. 45 to 47, which will be described later.

  In step S1211-10, the sub CPU 130a determines a variation effect pattern. Specifically, the stop symbol data stored in the stop symbol storage area in step S1209, the random number value for variation effect pattern determination acquired in step S1211-3, and the selected variation effect pattern determination table are compared. The variation effect pattern is determined according to the selection rate set in the variation effect pattern determination table, and the determined variation effect pattern is stored in the variation effect pattern information storage area.

  The variation effect pattern includes a variation effect time, a variation display mode of the effect pattern 70a, reach effect presence / absence, reach effect content, effect button effect existence, effect button effect content, effect development configuration, and other variable effect effects. The components are associated. The variation effect pattern of the variation effect on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 or the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 is configured by a display mode of the variable display of the effect symbol and a character or the like. The display modes related to the object image and the background image are also associated with each other as a component of the variation effect.

  In step S1211-11, the sub CPU 130a identifies the variation effect pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation effect pattern, and sets the identified variation effect pattern designation command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c.

  The variation effect pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. . Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 provide the variation effect corresponding to the variation effect pattern designation command (variation effect pattern) to the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. The rendering device such as the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, the audio output device 9, the board lighting device 74, the frame lighting device 10, the board driving device 75, or the like is caused to execute.

  In step S1211-12, the sub CPU130a sets the variable effect time, which is the effect time corresponding to the variable effect pattern determined in step S1211-10, in the variable effect timer counter of the sub RAM130c, and in step S1211-13, the sub CPU The CPU 130a sets the variation effect data corresponding to the variation effect pattern in the variation effect data storage area of the sub RAM 130c.

  The variation effect timer counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in step S1200. The sub CPU 130a can specify the remaining time of the fluctuating effect, in other words, the time that has elapsed from the start of the fluctuating effect, by using the fluctuating effect timer counter.

  In step S1211-14, the sub CPU 130a performs a hold icon display update process. Specifically, the display mode of the hold icon displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is changed based on the change scenario of the hold icon determined in the hold icon display mode determination process of step S1207. Whether or not the display mode after change is determined, the hold icon change designation command corresponding to this determination is specified, and the specified hold icon change designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c.

  The hold icon change designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140 in the data output process of step S1600. Then, the display mode of the hold icon is changed by the image control unit 140 (the hold change notice is executed).

  In step S1211-15, the sub CPU 130a performs the variable icon display mode determination process. Specifically, based on the variation effect pattern determined in step S1211-10, whether or not the display mode of the variation icon displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is changed, and The display mode is determined, the variable icon designating command corresponding to this determination is identified, and the identified variable icon designating command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. When this process ends, the current variation effect pattern determination process ends.

  The variable icon designating command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image controller 140 in the data output process of step S1600. Then, the image control unit 140 displays the variable icon in a display mode corresponding to the variable icon designation command (executes the pending change notice).

  In step S1211-16, the sub CPU 130a, the special symbol variation display data for causing the first special symbol second display 80 or the second special symbol second display 81 to perform a variable display (blinking of the LED) of the special symbol Is set in a predetermined processing area. As a result, when the special symbol variation display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S1500, and the created data is output in step S1600. The variable display of the second display 80 or the second special symbol second display 81 is started.

  In step S1211-17, the sub CPU 130a, in order to variably display the first special symbol or the second special symbol, a special symbol variation display designation command for variably displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the sub RAM 130c. Set to the send buffer of.

  The special symbol variation display designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140 in the data output process of step S1600. Then, the image control unit 140 performs the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the first special symbol display area DZ1 or the second special symbol display area DZ2.

(Variable production pattern determination table)
45 to 47 are diagrams showing a variation effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a variation effect pattern. FIG. 45 is a variation effect pattern determination for the effect mode 1 which is referred to when performing variable display of the special symbol and the effect symbol 70a by entering the game ball into the first starting opening 45 in the effect mode 1 (normal mode). FIG. 46 is a table, and for the production mode 2 referred to when performing a variable display of the special symbol and the production symbol 70a by entering the game ball into the first starting opening 45 in the production mode 2 (MV mode). FIG. 47 is a variation effect pattern determination table, and FIG. 47 is a variation effect pattern determination for the second starting opening that is referred to when performing variable display of the special symbol and the effect symbol 70a by entering the game ball into the second starting opening. It's a table.

  In the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 45 to 47, the stop symbol data specified by the effect symbol designating command, the variation pattern of the special symbol specified by the variation pattern designating command, and the variation pattern designating command are received. The selection rate by the random number value for variation effect pattern determination acquired and the variation effect pattern which is the variation effect (including the variation display of the effect symbol) performed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol are associated with each other.

  What is described as pseudo 0, pseudo 2, pseudo 3, and pseudo 4 in () in the column of variation effect content (variation effect pattern) means “the number of times of execution of pseudo continuous notice”, "Continuous notice" means that during the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to one big hit lottery, the production symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and then changed again to change the production symbol 70a and the temporary stop a plurality of times. It means the advance notice by the variation mode to be performed. In addition, when the variation of the effect symbol 70a and the temporary stop are performed only once, the pseudo consecutive number is 0 times, and when the variation of the effect symbol 70a and the temporary stop are performed twice, the pseudo consecutive number is two times. When the variation of the effect symbol 70a and the temporary stop are performed three times, the pseudo consecutive number is three times, and when the variation of the effect symbol 70a and the temporary stop is performed four times, the pseudo consecutive number is four times. . Then, the pseudo 0 has the pseudo continuous number of 0 times, the pseudo 2 has the pseudo continuous number of 2 times, the pseudo 3 has the pseudo continuous number of 3 times, and the pseudo 4 has the pseudo continuous number of 4 times. In addition, the number of times of pseudo-repetition is executed only 4 times when the stop symbol data is the special symbol 10, the special symbol 11 or the special symbol 12, and when the number of times of pseudo-repetition is executed four times, it becomes a probability variation jackpot. It is confirmed. In the present embodiment, the effect control board 130 (sub CPU 130a) side determines whether or not to execute the pseudo continuous announcement and the number of pseudo continuous notices. However, the main control board 110 (main CPU 110a) side determines the effect control. You may make it notify to the board | substrate 130 (sub CPU130a). In addition, when the time of the fluctuating effect pattern is 20 seconds or less, the pseudo continuous announcement is not executed, but the pseudo continuous announcement is executed within the range of 2 to 3 times in which it is not certain that the probability variation jackpot is confirmed. It may be done.

  In the variation effect pattern determination table for effect mode 1 (normal mode) shown in FIG. 45, the shortened variation effect (3 seconds) associated with variation pattern 2 (shortened variation) and the variation pattern 3 (normal variation) are associated with each other. Normal fluctuation short performance (10 seconds) attached, normal fluctuation long performance (12 seconds) linked to fluctuation pattern 1 (normal fluctuation), and special long fluctuation performance (20 linked to fluctuation pattern 4 (normal reach) Seconds) and normal reach production (20 seconds), character short SP reach production (35 seconds), music short SP reach production (35 seconds) linked to variation patterns 5, 6, 11 and 12 (SP reach 1 and 2). And chance short SP reach production (35 seconds), character long SP reach production (40 seconds) linked to variation patterns 7 and 13 (SP reach 3) Music long SP reach production (40 seconds) and chance long SP reach production (40 seconds), character short SPSP reach production (50 seconds) linked to variation patterns 8, 9, 14 and 15 (SPSP reach 1 and 2) And the music short SPSP reach production (50 seconds), the variation patterns 10 and 16 (SPSP reach 3), the character long SPSP reach production (60 seconds) and the music long SPSP reach production (60 seconds), the variation pattern 17 ( 16 types of variable effect patterns such as a character short full-reach reach effect (90 seconds) associated with the full-revolution reach are set.

  In the variation effect pattern determination table for the effect mode 2 (MV mode) shown in FIG. 46, the shortened variation effect (3 seconds) associated with the variation pattern 2 (shortened variation) and the variation pattern 3 (normal variation) are associated with each other. Normal fluctuation short performance (10 seconds) attached, normal fluctuation long performance (12 seconds) linked to fluctuation pattern 1 (normal fluctuation), and special long fluctuation performance (20 linked to fluctuation pattern 4 (normal reach) Second) and normal reach production (20 seconds), variation short patterns 5, 6, 11 and 12 (SP reach 1 and 2) associated with music short SP reach production (35 seconds) and chance short SP reach production (35 seconds). , The music long SP reach production (40 seconds) and the chance long SP reach production (40 seconds) associated with the fluctuation patterns 7 and 13 (SP reach 3) Music short SPSP reach production linked to fluctuation patterns 8, 9, 14 and 15 (SPSP reach 1 and 2) (50 seconds), music long SPSP reach linked to fluctuation patterns 10 and 16 (SPSP reach 3) Twelve types of variable effect patterns are set, including an effect (60 seconds) and a music short full-rotation reach effect (90 seconds) associated with the variation pattern 17 (full-rotation reach).

  The variation effect pattern determination table for the second starting opening shown in FIG. 47 is shortened variation effect (3 seconds) associated with variation pattern 2 (shortened variation) and normal associated with variation pattern 3 (normal variation). Variable short production (10 seconds), normal long variation production (12 seconds) associated with variation pattern 1 (normal variation), special long variation production (20 seconds) associated with variation pattern 4 (normal reach), and normal reach Performance (20 seconds), special short reach performance 1 (40 seconds), special short reach performance 2 (40 seconds) and special short reach performance 3 (40 seconds) linked to variation patterns 7 and 13 (SP reach 3) , Special Long Reach Performance 1 (60 seconds), Special Long Reach Performance 2 (60 seconds) and Special Role linked to Variation Patterns 10 and 16 (SPSP Reach 3) Gurichi effect 3 (60 seconds), the fluctuation pattern 17 (full rotation reach) 12 kinds such special full rotation reach demonstration that tied (90 seconds) of the variation performance pattern is set.

  In the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45, the expectation value (expectation degree) at which the above-mentioned music-type reach effect is a big hit is set higher than the above-mentioned character-type reach effect. Further, the character short SP reach effect, the character long SP reach effect, the character short SPSP reach effect, the character long SPSP reach effect, and the character short full rotation reach effect are set in the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 46 and 47. Since it is not performed, it is a reach production dedicated to the production mode 1.

  Since the music short full-rotation reach effect set in the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46 is not set in the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 45 and 47, the reach effect dedicated to the effect mode 2 is reached. Can be said.

  The above-described special type reach effect set in the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 is not set in the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. It is a production variation pattern dedicated to variation display based on the entry of a game ball. In addition, regarding the special reach production, the pseudo continuous notice is always executed. Thus, in the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 47, the variation effect pattern is set so as to be distinguishable from the variation effect pattern of the variation display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 45.

  For the chance short SP reach effect and the chance long short SP reach effect set in the variable effect pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the stop symbol data is the special symbol 18 (miss) and the special symbol 14 (sudden sudden change jackpot). ) Will only be selected if. In other words, the chance-based SP reach effect can be said to be a dedicated variable effect pattern for effecting (inclining) whether or not a sudden change jackpot will suddenly occur. Since a sudden change big hit does not occur suddenly in the variation display based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 47, the chance production reach production is not set in the variation production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47.

  Further, in the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45, when the expected value (expectation level) of jackpot is high, the music-type reach effect is more easily selected than the character-type reach effect, and the expected value (expected value) of the jackpot is increased. The higher the degree), the easier it is to execute the pseudo continuous notice. Further, in the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46, the higher the expected value (expected degree) to be a big hit, the easier it is to carry out the pseudo-continuous announcement, and the higher the expected value to be a big hit (expected degree), the more the pseudo-continuous announcement is executed. It is easy to select the reach production that has a large number of times. Further, in the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47, the higher the expected value (expectation level) that is a big hit when the special short reach effects 1 to 3 are determined, the special short reach effect 1 <special short reach effect 2 < The selection rate increases in the order of special short reach performance, and the higher the expected value (expectation) that is a big hit when the special long reach performance is decided, the longer the special long reach performance 1 <the special long reach performance 2 <the special long reach performance will be. The selection ratio is set to increase in the order of the effect 3.

(Preliminary production determination process of production control unit)
The notice effect determination process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the notice effect determination process in effect control unit 130m.

  First, in step S1212-1, the sub CPU 130a selects the notice type determination table shown in FIG. 49, and in step S1212-2, the sub CPU 130a changes the variation stored in the variation pattern information storage area in step S1211-10. Get production pattern information. The advance notice type determination table is stored in the sub RAM 130c, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1212-3, the sub CPU 130a performs a notice effect type determination process. Specifically, the random number value for determining the notice type is acquired, the random number value for determining the notice type, the notice type determination table selected in step S1212-1, and the variable effect pattern information obtained in step S1212-2. Is checked, the notice type is determined according to the selection rate set in the notice type determination table, and the decided notice type is stored in the notice type information storage area.

  In step S1212-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the notice type is determined to be the symbol notice effect. If it is determined that the symbol notice effect has been determined (S1212-4: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1212-5. On the other hand, if it is determined that the symbol notice effect has not been determined (S1212-4: No), the process proceeds to step S1212-8.

  In step S1212-5, the sub CPU 130a selects the symbol notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50, and in step S1212-6, the sub CPU 130a performs a symbol notice pattern determination process. Specifically, a random number value for advance notice mode determination is acquired, the random number value for advance notice mode determination, the symbol advance notice mode determination table selected in step S1212-5, and the variable effect pattern acquired in step S1212-2. And, the symbol notice pattern (symbol notice form) is determined according to the selection rate set in the symbol notice form determination table, and the decided symbol notice pattern is stored in the notice pattern information storage area.

  In step S1212-7, the sub CPU 130a identifies the symbol notice pattern designation command corresponding to the determined symbol notice pattern, and sets the identified symbol notice pattern designation command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. When this process ends, the notice effect determination process of this time ends.

  The symbol notice pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. . Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, the drive control unit 170, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 the symbol notice effect corresponding to the symbol notice pattern designation command (variation effect pattern). , The second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, the audio output device 9, the board lighting device 74, the frame lighting device 10, the board driving device 75, and the like.

  In step S1212-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the notice type is determined to be the song notice effect. When it is determined that the music preview effect has been determined (S1212-8: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1212-9. On the other hand, if it is determined that the musical piece preview effect has not been determined (S1212-8: No), the process proceeds to step S1212-14.

  In step S1212-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the result of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) is a big hit. When it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit (S1212-9: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1212-11. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is not a big hit (S1212-9: No), the process proceeds to step S1212-10.

  In step S1212-10, the sub CPU 130a selects the losing song notice manner determination table shown in FIG. 53, and in step S1212-11, the sub CPU 130a selects the jackpot song notice manner determining table shown in FIG. To do. The details of the music announcement mode determination tables of FIGS. 53 and 54 will be described later.

  In step S1212-12, the sub CPU 130a performs a music announcement pattern determination process. Specifically, a random number value for preview mode determination is acquired, and this random number value for preview mode determination is collated with the song preview mode determination table selected in step S1212-10 or step S1212-11 to determine the song preview. A music notice pattern (music notice form) is determined according to the selection rate set in the form determination table, and the determined music notice pattern is stored in the notice pattern information storage area.

  In step S1212-13, the sub CPU 130a identifies the music announcement pattern designating command corresponding to the determined music announcement pattern, and sets the identified music announcement pattern designating command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. When this process ends, the notice effect determination process of this time ends.

  The music notice pattern designating command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. . Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 provide the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 with a music announcement effect corresponding to the music announcement pattern designating command (fluctuation effect pattern). , The second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, the audio output device 9, the board lighting device 74, the frame lighting device 10, the board driving device 75, and the like.

  In step S1212-14, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the notice type is determined to be the step-up notice effect. When it is determined that the step-up notice effect has been determined (S1212-14: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1212-15. On the other hand, when it is determined that the step-up notice production has not been determined (S1212-14: No), the notice production determination process of this time is ended.

  In Step S1212-15, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the result of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) is a big hit. When it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit (S1212-15: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1212-17. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is not a big hit (S1212-15: No), the process proceeds to step S1212-16.

  In step S1212-16, the sub CPU 130a selects the step-up notice manner determination table for loss shown in FIG. 60A, and in step S1212-17, the sub CPU 130a causes the jackpot step shown in FIG. The up notice mode determination table is selected. The details of the step-up notice mode determination table of FIG. 60 will be described later.

  In step S1212-18, the sub CPU 130a performs a step-up notice pattern determination process. Specifically, a random number value for advance notice mode determination is acquired, and the random number value for advance notice mode determination is collated with the step-up advance notice mode determination table selected in step S1212-16 or step S1212-17, and the step A step-up notice pattern (step-up notice form) is determined according to the selection rate set in the notice-up notice form determination table, and the determined step-up notice pattern is stored in the notice pattern information storage area.

  In step S1212-19, the sub CPU 130a identifies the step-up notice pattern designating command corresponding to the determined step-up notice pattern, and sets the identified step-up notice pattern designation command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. When this process ends, the notice effect determination process of this time ends.

  The step-up notice pattern designating command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. It Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 cause the first image display device (the main liquid crystal display device) to display the step-up notice effect corresponding to the step-up notice pattern designation command (variation effect pattern). ) 70, the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, the audio output device 9, the board lighting device 74, the frame lighting device 10, the board driving device 75, and the like.

(Announcement type determination table)
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a notice type determination table that is referred to when the notice type is determined in the notice effect type determination process of step S1212-3. The notice type determination table corresponds to the variation effect pattern, the selection rate based on the random number value for determining the notice type acquired when the notice type is determined, and the notice type of the notice effect executed during the variation effect according to the variation effect pattern. It is attached.

If the shortened variable effect is determined as the variable effect pattern, no notice, music notice effect, or step-up notice effect is selected according to the set selection rate, and the symbol notice effect is selected. There is no.
When the normal variation short effect is determined as the variation effect pattern, any of no notice, symbol notice effect, music notice effect, and step-up notice effect is selected according to the set selection rate.
When the normal long variation effect is determined as the variation effect pattern, any of the no notice, the symbol notice effect, the music notice effect, and the step-up notice effect is selected according to the set selection rate.

When the normal reach effect is determined as the fluctuating effect pattern, no notice, a pattern notice effect, or a music notice effect is selected according to the set selection rate, and the step-up notice effect is not selected.
When the special long variation effect is determined as the variation effect pattern, the music notice effect or the step-up notice effect is selected according to the set selection rate, and no notice and the symbol notice effect are not selected. . That is, it can be said that the notice production is always executed.

When a character-based reach effect (character short SP reach effect, character long SP reach effect, character short SPSP reach effect, character long SPSP reach effect, character short full rotation reach effect) is determined as the variable effect pattern, The pattern notice effect is always selected, and no notice, song notice effect, and step-up notice effect are never selected.
In the case where a music-based reach performance (music short SP reach performance, music long SP reach performance, music short SPSP reach performance, music long SPSP reach performance, music short full rotation reach performance) is determined as the variation performance pattern, The music notice production is always selected, and no notice, the pattern notice production, and the step-up notice production are never selected.

When the chance-type reach effect (chance short SP reach effect, chance long SP reach effect) is determined as the variable effect pattern, the step-up notice effect is always selected, and no notice, pattern notice effect, and song notice effect are selected. Is never selected.
When the special reach effect is determined as the variation effect pattern, the symbol notice effect is always selected, and no notice, the song notice effect, and the step-up notice effect are not selected.

  In this way, the notice effect that is executed or easily executed by the variation effect pattern is determined, and it can be said that the notice effect is determined based on the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery, the stop symbol data, and the variation pattern. It should be noted that although the possibility of execution of the notice effect and the selection rate are biased for each variation effect pattern, they may be executed uniformly without being biased, or may be biased differently.

(Design notice mode decision table)
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a symbol notice mode determination table that is referred to when determining a symbol notice pattern in the symbol notice pattern determination process of step S1212-6. In the symbol notice mode determination table, a variation effect pattern, a selection rate based on a notice mode determination random number value acquired when the symbol notice pattern is determined, and a type of the pattern notice pattern are associated with each other.

  The type of the pattern notice pattern is set from the pattern notice pattern 1 to the pattern notice pattern 12, and the effect of the effect design to be stopped (temporarily stopped or permanently stopped) on the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. It is a notice production that suggests types, colors, etc.

The “symbol notice pattern 1” is a notice effect that displays suggestion information suggesting the type of the left symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70.
The “symbol notice pattern 2” is a notice effect that displays suggestive information suggesting the type of the right symbol stopped and displayed in the right area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. "Is a notice effect that displays suggestion information suggesting the type of the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the central area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70.

The “symbol notice pattern 4” suggests the color of the left symbol stopped and displayed in the left side area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the color of the right symbol stopped and displayed in the right side area. This is a notice production that displays suggestive information.
The “symbol notice pattern 5” suggests the type of the left symbol stopped and displayed in the left area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and the color of the right symbol stopped and displayed in the right area. This is a notice production that displays suggestive information.
The “symbol notice pattern 6” suggests the type of the left symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and makes the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the central area ambiguous. This is a notice production that displays suggestive information.

The “design notice pattern 7” suggests the type of the left design that is stopped and displayed in the left area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and the color of the middle design that is stopped and displayed in the central area. This is a notice production that displays suggestive information.
The "symbol notice pattern 8" is a type of left symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left side area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and a middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the central area generates a pseudo continuous notice. It is a notice effect that displays suggestive information suggesting that it is a pseudo-relational pattern.
The "symbol notice pattern 9" vaguely suggests a middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the central area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and indicates the type of the right symbol that is stopped and displayed in the right area. This is a notice production that displays suggestive information.

The “design notice pattern 10” suggests the color of the middle design stopped and displayed in the central region of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the type of the right design stopped and displayed in the right region. This is a notice production that displays suggestive information.
The "symbol notice pattern 11" suggests that the middle symbol stopped and displayed in the central area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is a pseudo continuous symbol that generates a pseudo continuous notice, and is on the right side. It is a notice effect that displays suggestive information suggesting the type of the right symbol stopped and displayed in the area.
The "symbol notice pattern 12" is displayed as a left symbol stopped and displayed in the left side area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, a middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the center area, and a stop symbol and is displayed in the right side area. It is a notice effect that displays suggestive information that suggests that the right pattern.

  In addition, as a feature of the symbol notice mode determination table, the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) (fluctuation effect pattern) is a big hit (special result aspect) The higher the degree of expectation, the greater the number of symbols suggested The notice pattern is easy to be selected, and the variation notice (variable production pattern) of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) is a big hit (special result mode). Is easy to select. Since the symbol notice pattern 12 is selected only when the full-revolution reach effect is executed, it can be said that the symbol notice pattern 12 is a big hit confirmation notice effect.

  According to the feature of the symbol notice mode determination table, the player is delighted with the number of stop symbols suggested by the suggestion information of the symbol notice effect and the content of the suggestion information. Therefore, it is possible to effectively encourage the player's sense of expectation in the design notice production, and improve the interest of the game.

(Example of design notice production)
51 and 52 are diagrams showing a timing chart of the symbol notice effect and an example of the effect. Specifically, FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an example of the effect of the symbol notice effect when the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is executed by the variable effect pattern in which the reach does not occur, and FIG. 52 shows the variation in which the reach occurs. It is the figure which shows the production example of the design announcement production when variable display of production design 70a is executed with production pattern.

First, FIG. 51 will be described.
FIG. 51A is a timing chart of the variable display of the effect design 70a when the reach does not occur.
The variable display of the effect symbol 70a starts the variable display of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the left area, the central area, and the right area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 at the timing of T0. .

  Then, the left symbol temporarily stops in the left side area of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 at the timing of T2 after the timing of T1 which is a predetermined time after the variable display of the effect symbol 70a starts. , T4, the right symbol is temporarily stopped in the right area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. At this time, the left symbol and the right symbol are different types of symbols, and reach has not occurred.

  After that, the middle pattern is temporarily stopped in the central region of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 at the timing of T6, and the left side region of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 at the timing of T7. In the central area and the right area, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped, respectively, and the symbols are fixedly displayed until T8.

Hereinafter, the symbol notice effect will be described.
FIG. 51 (b) is a timing chart of the symbol notice pattern 1 executed during the variable display in which the reach does not occur in (a).
In the symbol notice effect by the symbol notice pattern 1, left symbol suggestion information indicating the left symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left side region of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 at the timing of T1 is displayed in the left side region. Then, at the timing of T2, the display of the left symbol suggestive information ends.

FIG. 51C is a timing chart of the symbol notice pattern 2 executed during the variable display in which the reach does not occur in FIG.
In the symbol notice effect by the symbol notice pattern 2, right symbol suggestion information indicating the right symbol stopped and displayed in the right side region of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 at the timing of T1 is displayed in the right side region. Then, at the timing of T4, the display of the right symbol suggestion information ends.

FIG. 51D is a timing chart of the symbol notice pattern 3 executed during the variable display in which the reach does not occur in FIG.
In the symbol notice effect according to the symbol notice pattern 3, middle symbol suggestion information suggesting a middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the central region of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 at the timing of T1 is displayed in the central region. Then, the display of the medium symbol suggestive information ends at the timing of T6.

FIG. 51 (e) is a timing chart of the symbol notice patterns 4 and 5 executed during the variable display in which the reach does not occur in (a).
The symbol notice effect according to the symbol notice patterns 4 and 5 is displayed at the left of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 in the left area of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 at the timing of T1, and the left symbol indicating information suggesting the left symbol and the right area are stopped. The right symbol suggestion information suggesting the right symbol is displayed in the left side region and the right side region, respectively. Then, the display of the left symbol suggestive information ends at the timing of T2, and the display of the right symbol suggestive information ends at the timing of T4.

FIG. 51 (f) is a timing chart of the symbol notice patterns 6, 7 and 8 executed during the variable display in which the reach does not occur in (a).
The symbol notice effect by the symbol notice patterns 6, 7 and 8 is left symbol suggestion information indicating the left symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left region of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 at the timing of T1 and stopped in the central region. The middle symbol suggestion information suggesting the middle symbols to be displayed is displayed in the left side region and the center region, respectively. Then, the display of the left symbol suggestive information ends at the timing of T2, and the display of the medium symbol suggestive information ends at the timing of T6.

FIG. 51 (g) is a timing chart of the symbol notice patterns 9, 10 and 11 executed during the variable display in which the reach of FIG.
The symbol notice effect by the symbol notice patterns 9, 10, and 11 is the middle symbol suggestion information suggesting the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the central region of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 at the timing of T1 and the right region is stopped. The right symbol suggestion information suggesting the displayed right symbol is displayed in the central region and the right region, respectively. After that, the display of the right symbol suggestive information ends at the timing of T4, and the display of the medium symbol suggestive information ends at the timing of T6.

FIG. 51 (h) is a diagram showing an example of effect by the symbol notice pattern 9.
At the timing of T1, as shown in (h1), a “?” Image that vaguely suggests a middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the central area of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and a right symbol that is stopped and displayed in the right area A "7" image that indicates that is displayed in the central area and the right area, respectively. At the timing of T2, the left symbol temporarily stops as shown in (h2), but the “?” Image and the “7” image do not change. At the timing of T4, the right symbol is temporarily stopped as shown in (h3), and the display of the "7" image ends. At the timing of T6, the middle symbol is temporarily stopped as shown in (h4), and the display of the "?" Image ends. After that, at the timing of T7, as shown in (h5), all symbols are fixedly displayed.

Next, FIG. 52 will be described.
FIG. 51A is a timing chart of the variable display of the effect design 70a when the reach occurs.
The variable display of the effect symbol 70a starts the variable display of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the left area, the central area, and the right area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 at the timing of T0. .

  Then, the left symbol temporarily stops in the left side area of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 at the timing of T2 after the timing of T1 which is a predetermined time after the variable display of the effect symbol 70a starts. , T4, the right symbol is temporarily stopped in the right area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. At this time, the left symbol and the right symbol are the same symbol, and reach is generated.

  Then, a predetermined reach effect is executed from T5 to T6, the middle pattern is temporarily stopped in the central area of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 at the timing of T6, and the first image display is performed at the timing of T7. The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped in the left side region, the central region, and the right side region of the display unit of the device (main liquid crystal) 70, respectively, and the symbol is fixedly displayed until T8.

  Hereinafter, the symbol notice effect will be described, but since (b), (c) and (e) are the same as (b), (c) and (e) of FIG. 51, the description thereof will be omitted here.

FIG. 52D is a timing chart of the symbol notice pattern 3 executed during the variable display in which the reach in FIG.
In the symbol notice effect according to the symbol notice pattern 3, middle symbol suggestion information suggesting a middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the central region of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 at the timing of T1 is displayed in the central region. Then, the display of the medium symbol suggestive information ends even though the medium symbol has not stopped at the timing of T5 when the reach effect is started. The display of the medium symbol suggestive information may be ended at the timing of T4 when the reach occurs.

FIG. 52 (f) is a timing chart of the symbol notice patterns 6, 7, and 8 executed during the variable display in which the reach in FIG.
The symbol notice effect by the symbol notice patterns 6, 7 and 8 is left symbol suggestion information indicating the left symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left region of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 at the timing of T1 and stopped in the central region. The middle symbol suggestion information suggesting the middle symbols to be displayed is displayed in the left side region and the center region, respectively. Then, the display of the left symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T2, and the display of the middle symbol suggestion information ends even though the middle symbol has not stopped at the timing of T5 when the reach effect is started. The display of the medium symbol suggestive information may be ended at the timing of T4 when the reach occurs.

FIG. 52 (g) is a timing chart of the symbol notice patterns 9, 10, and 11 executed during the variable display in which the reach in FIG.
The symbol notice effect by the symbol notice patterns 9, 10, and 11 is the middle symbol suggestion information suggesting the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the central region of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 at the timing of T1 and the right region is stopped. The right symbol suggestion information suggesting the displayed right symbol is displayed in the central region and the right region, respectively. After that, the display of the right symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T4, and the display of the middle symbol suggestion information ends even though the middle symbol has not stopped at the timing of T5 when the reach effect is started. The display of the medium symbol suggestive information may be ended at the timing of T4 when the reach occurs.

FIG. 52 (h) is a timing chart of the symbol notice pattern 12 executed during the variable display in which (a) reach occurs.
The design notice production by the design notice pattern 12 is left display suggestive information suggesting the left design which is stopped and displayed in the left side region of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 at the timing of T1, and is stopped and displayed in the center region. Medium symbol suggestion information that suggests a medium symbol, and right symbol suggestion information that suggests the right symbol that is stopped and displayed in the right area are at the stop position of the left symbol, the stop position of the middle symbol, and the stop position of the right symbol, respectively. Is displayed. Then, the display of the left symbol suggestive information ends at the timing of T2, the display of the right symbol suggestive information ends at the timing of T4, and the middle symbol does not stop at the timing of T5 when the reach effect starts. The display of the medium pattern suggestion information ends. The display of the medium symbol suggestive information may be ended at the timing of T4 when the reach occurs.

  In this way, in the case of the symbol notice pattern that displays the medium symbol suggestive information that suggests the medium symbol that is stopped and displayed at the end, if the reach does not occur, the medium symbol suggestive information is displayed until the medium symbol is stopped and displayed. Displayed, when reach occurs, by displaying the medium symbol suggestive information only until the timing when the reach effect is started, the reach effect is not obstructed by the medium symbol suggestive information, It is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game.

  It is also possible to display each symbol suggestion information on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71. In this case, the reach effect executed by the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. However, since it is not obstructed by the symbol suggestion information, the intermediate symbol suggestion information may be displayed until the intermediate symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, all the symbol suggestion information may be displayed until the reach effect is completed.

FIG. 52 (i) is a diagram showing an example of effect by the symbol notice pattern 12.
At the timing of T1, as shown in (i1), the "7" image that suggests the left symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left area of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the central area The suggested “7” image and the “7” image suggesting the right symbol stopped and displayed in the right side area are displayed in the left side area, the central area, and the right side area, respectively. At the timing of T2, the left symbol is temporarily stopped as shown in (i2), and the display of the "7" image in the left region is completed. At the timing of T4, the right symbol is temporarily stopped as shown in (i3), and the display of the "7" image in the right region is completed. At the timing of T5, as shown in (i4), the display of the "7" image in the central area ends with the start of the reach effect. At the timing of T6, all the symbols are temporarily stopped as shown in (i5), and at the timing of T7, all the symbols are fixedly displayed as shown in (i6), and it is displayed that the jackpot is a big hit.

(Music preview form determination table)
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a music announcement mode determination table for a loss, which is referred to when determining a music announcement pattern of a music announcement effect in the music announcement pattern determination process of step S1212-12, and FIG. 54 is described above. It is a figure which shows the music notice aspect determination table for jackpots referred when determining the music notice pattern of music notice production in the music notice pattern determination process of step S1212-12.

  In addition, the music preview effect is at least the effect display displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and / or the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 and the music output from the audio output device 9. One of them is a notice production that suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot (special result mode). In addition, the musical piece preview effect can be paraphrased as a specific effect.

  In the music announcement mode determination table for loss in FIG. 53 and the music announcement mode determination table for jackpots in FIG. 54, a variation effect pattern and a selection rate based on a random number value for announcement mode determination acquired when the music announcement pattern is determined. , And the type of music announcement pattern are associated with each other. The types of the music notice patterns are set from the music notice pattern 1 to the music notice pattern 28, and there are three types of music used, that is, the songs A to C.

  In the following description, the words "gase" and "book" will appear, but "gase" means that the song preview production will not develop thereafter, and "book" means that the song preview production will develop thereafter. Means

  The “musical notice pattern 1” executes a gaze predictive presentation that is expected to be executed when a musical production that suggests that the reach production of a musical composition may be executed during the variable display of the production design 70a. This is a notice production. The musical performance is a combination of the development suggestion display and any of the musical pieces A to C.

  The “musical notice pattern 2” is a gasse consisting of a combination of the display of the development suggestive production and the output of the musical composition A after the main predictive production that determines that the musical production is executed during the variable display of the production design 70a is executed. It is a notice effect for executing the first music effect. That is, the music effect is executed once and one type of music (music A) is output.

  The “song notice pattern 3” is a notice production that executes the second production production of a gasse consisting of a combination of the display of the development suggestion production and the output of the music B after the indication production is executed during the variable display of the production design 70a. . That is, the music effect is executed once and one type of music (music B) is output.

  "Music notice pattern 4" is a notice effect that executes the gasse third music effect that is a combination of the display of the development suggestion effect and the output of the music C after the main indication effect is executed during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. is there. That is, the music effect is executed once and one type of music (music C) is output.

  The "musical notice pattern 5" is a gascerech predictive presentation (development presentation and development presentation) that is expected to develop into a reach production of a musical piece after executing the main indication production and the first musical piece production while the production design 70a is being changed. This is a notice production that executes a reach-inspiring production. That is, the music effect is executed once and one type of music (music A) is output.

  The “musical notice pattern 6” is a noticeable presentation that executes the gascereach predictive presentation after executing the main predictive presentation and the second musical piece presentation during the variable display of the production design 70a. That is, the music effect is executed once and one type of music (music B) is output.

  The “song notice pattern 7” is a notice effect that executes the gasselich indication effect after executing the main indication effect and the third music effect during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. That is, the music effect is executed once and one type of music (music C) is output.

  The “music notice pattern 8” is a notice effect that executes the reach predictive effect after executing the main predictive effect and the first musical piece effect during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. That is, the music effect is executed once and one type of music (music A) is output.

  The "music notice pattern 9" is a notice effect that executes the reach predictive effect after executing the main predictive effect and the second musical piece effect during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. That is, the music effect is executed once and one type of music (music B) is output.

  "Music notice pattern 10" is a notice effect that executes the reach predictive effect after executing the main predictive effect and the third musical piece effect during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. That is, the music effect is executed once and one type of music (music C) is output.

  The “musical notice pattern 11” is a book that is executed after executing a pseudo predictive production and a pseudo-continuous production that produces a success of the pseudo continuous announcement while executing the main predictive production and the first tune music production during the variable display of the production design 70a. It is a notice effect that executes the first music effect and this reach predictive effect. In other words, the music effect is executed twice, but only one type (Music A) is output.

  The "song notice pattern 12" is a notice in which the main indication effect and the second geek second music effect are executed during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, and the pseudo second effect is executed and then the second music effect and the reach predictive effect are executed. It is a production. In other words, the music effect is executed twice, but only one type (Music B) is output.

  The "song notice pattern 13" is a notice that the main indication effect and the gasse third music effect are executed during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, and the third music effect and the reach predictive effect are executed after the pseudo continuous effect is executed. It is a production. In other words, the music effect is executed twice, but only one type (Music C) is output.

  The "song notice pattern 14" is a notice that the main sign effect and the first gasse first music effect are executed during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, and the second music effect and the reach predictive effect are executed after the pseudo continuous effect is executed. It is a production. That is, the music effect is executed twice and two types of music (music pieces A and B) are output.

  The "song notice pattern 15" is a notice in which the main indication effect and the second tune-related music effect are executed during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, and the pseudo third effect is executed and then the third music effect and the reach predictive effect are executed. It is a production. That is, the music effect is executed twice and two types of music (music pieces B and C) are output.

  The "song notice pattern 16" is a notice in which the main sign effect and the gasse third music effect are executed during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, and the first music effect and the reach predictive effect are executed after the pseudo continuous effect is executed. It is a production. That is, the music effect is executed twice and two types of music (music pieces C and A) are output.

  The “musical notice pattern 17” executes the main indication effect, the first gasse musical piece production and the pseudo continuous production during the variable display of the production pattern 70a, and then executes the first gasse first musical piece production and the pseudo continuous production, and finally This is a notice effect for executing the first music effect effect and the reach predictive effect effect. In other words, the music effect is executed three times, but only one type of music (music A) is output.

  The “song notice pattern 18” executes the main sign effect, the second gasse second music effect and the pseudo continuous effect during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, then executes the second gasse second music effect and the pseudo continuous effect, and finally This is a notice effect for executing the second music effect effect and the reach predictive effect effect. In other words, the music production is executed three times, but only one type of music (music B) is output.

  The “song notice pattern 19” executes the main indication effect, the gasse third music effect and the pseudo continuous effect during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, then executes the gasse third music effect and the pseudo continuous effect, and finally. This is a notice effect for executing the third music effect effect and the reach predictive effect effect. That is, the musical composition effect is executed three times, but only one type of musical composition (musical composition C) is output.

  The "musical notice pattern 20" executes the main indication effect, the first gasse musical piece effect and the pseudo continuous effect during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, and then executes the gasse first musical piece effect and the pseudo continuous effect, and finally. This is a notice effect for executing the second music effect effect and the reach predictive effect effect. That is, the music production is executed three times and two types of music (music A and B) are output, but the output of the second music (music B) is delayed.

  The “song notice pattern 21” executes the main indication effect, the second gasse second music effect and the pseudo continuous effect during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, and then executes the second gase second music effect and the pseudo continuous effect, and finally. This is a notice effect for executing the third music effect effect and the reach predictive effect effect. That is, the music production is executed three times and two types of music (music B and C) are output, but the output of the second music (music C) is delayed.

  The “song notice pattern 22” executes the main indication effect, the gasse third music effect and the pseudo continuous effect during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, then executes the gasse third music effect and the pseudo continuous effect, and finally. This is a notice effect for executing the first music effect effect and the reach predictive effect effect. That is, the music production is executed three times to output two types of music (music C and A), but the output of the second music (music A) is delayed.

  The “song notice pattern 23” executes the main indication effect, the first gasse musical piece effect and the pseudo continuous production during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, and then executes the second synthetic musical piece effect and the pseudo continuous production, and finally. This is a notice effect for executing the second music effect effect and the reach predictive effect effect. That is, the music effect is executed three times and two types of music (music A and B) are output, but the output of the second type of music (music B) is early.

  The “song notice pattern 24” executes the main indication effect, the second gasse second music effect and the pseudo continuous effect during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, and then executes the third gase third music effect and the pseudo continuous effect, and finally. This is a notice effect for executing the third music effect effect and the reach predictive effect effect. That is, the music production is executed three times and two types of music (music B and C) are output, but the second type of music (music B) is output at an early timing.

  The “musical notice pattern 25” executes the main indication effect, the gasse third music effect and the pseudo continuous production during the variable display of the production pattern 70a, and then executes the gasse first music production and the pseudo continuous production, and finally. This is a notice effect for executing the first music effect effect and the reach predictive effect effect. In other words, the music effect is executed three times and two types of music (music C and A) are output, but the second type of music (A) is output at an earlier timing.

  The “song notice pattern 26” executes the main indication effect, the first gasse music production and the pseudo continuous production during the variable display of the production pattern 70a, and thereafter executes the second guse music production and the pseudo continuous production, and finally. This is a notice effect for executing the third music effect and the reach predictive effect for confirming the development. That is, the musical composition effect is executed three times and three types of musical compositions (musical compositions A, B, and C) are output.

  The “musical notice pattern 27” executes the main predictive presentation effect, the gasse second musical piece production and the pseudo continuous production during the variable display of the production pattern 70a, and then executes the gasse third musical piece production and the pseudo continuous production, and finally. This is a notice effect for executing the first music effect effect and the reach predictive effect effect. That is, the musical composition effect is executed three times and three types of musical compositions (musical compositions B, C, and A) are output.

  The “song notice pattern 28” executes the main indication effect, the gasse third music effect and the pseudo continuous effect during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, and thereafter executes the gasse first music effect and the pseudo continuous effect, and finally. This is a notice effect for executing the first music effect effect and the reach predictive effect effect. That is, the music effect is executed three times and three types of music (music pieces C, A, and B) are output.

  As a first feature of the music announcement mode determination tables shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, one kind of music is executed by executing one music effect among music announcement effects (specific effects) that may be a big hit. When the output music notice patterns 8 to 10 are executed, the expectation (reliability) of jackpots is set to be higher in the order of music notice pattern 8 <music notice pattern 9 <music notice pattern 10. ing. In other words, the output music has a higher expectation (reliability) as a big hit in the order of music A <music B <music C. As a result, the player becomes more interested in the type of music to be output, and the interest regarding music notice production is improved.

  As a second feature of the music announcement mode determination tables shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, one kind of music is executed by performing music production twice, out of music announcement effects (specific effects) that may be a big hit. When the output of the music announcement patterns 11 to 13 is executed, the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot is set to be higher in the order of the music announcement pattern 11 <the music announcement pattern 12 <the music announcement pattern <13. Has been done. In other words, the output music has a higher expectation (reliability) as a big hit in the order of music A <music B <music C. As a result, the player becomes more interested in the type of music to be output, and the interest regarding music notice production is improved.

  As a third feature of the music announcement mode determination tables shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, two types of music are executed by performing music production twice, out of music announcement effects (specific effects) that may be a big hit. When the outputted music notice patterns 14 to 16 are executed, the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot is set to be higher in the order of music notice pattern 14 <music notice pattern 15 <music notice pattern 16. ing. That is, with respect to the music output in the first music production, the degree of expectation (reliability) of becoming a big hit increases in the order of music A <music B <music C. As a result, the player becomes more interested in the type of music to be output, and the interest regarding music notice production is improved.

  As a fourth feature of the music announcement mode determination table shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, among the music announcement effects (specific effects) that may be a big hit, the music announcement patterns 11 to 11 in which the music effects are performed twice. When 16 is executed, the expectation (reliability) that the music announcement patterns 14 to 16 in which two types of music are output is a jackpot rather than the music announcement patterns 11 to 13 in which only one type of music is output. Is set to be high. That is, the expectation (reliability) of a big hit is higher when two types of music are output than when only one type of music is output. As a result, the player becomes more interested in the musical piece preview production in expectation that many kinds of musical pieces are output, and the interest of the game is improved.

  As a fifth feature of the music announcement mode determination tables shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, among the music announcement effects (specific effects) that may be a big hit, the music announcement patterns 17 to 17 in which the music effects are executed three times. When 28 is executed, the expectation of a big hit is higher in the song announcement patterns 20 to 25 in which two types of songs are output than in the song announcement patterns 17 to 19 in which only one type of song is output, The expectation (reliability) of a jackpot is higher in the music announcement patterns 26 to 28 in which three types of music are output than in the music announcement patterns 20 to 25 in which only two types of music are output. As a result, the player becomes more interested in the musical piece preview production in expectation that many kinds of musical pieces are output, and the interest of the game is improved.

  As a sixth feature of the music preview mode determination tables shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, three music performances are executed, but two types of musics, out of music preview performances (specific performances) that may be a big hit. When the music announcement patterns 20 to 25 that are only output are executed, the second kind of music is produced in the second music production than the music announcement patterns 20 to 22 in which the second type of music is output in the third music production. The expectation (reliability) of the jackpot is higher in the music announcement patterns 23 to 25 in which the music is output. As a result, the player becomes more interested in the music preview production, expecting that different types of music will be output at an early stage, and the interest of the game is improved.

  As a seventh feature of the music announcement mode determination tables shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, of the music announcement effects (specific effects) that may be a big hit, the music announcement patterns 8 to 10 in which the music effect is executed only once. The music announcement patterns 11 to 16 in which the music production is executed twice have a higher expectation (reliability) of being a jackpot, and the music productions are more than the music announcement patterns 11 to 16 in which the music production is executed only twice. The predictive patterns 17 to 28 that are executed three times have a higher expectation (reliability) of a big hit. As a result, the player has a strong interest in the musical piece preview production, expecting that the musical piece production will be executed a large number of times, and the interest of the game is improved.

(Direction example of music preview production)
55 to 59 are diagrams showing a timing chart and an example of the effect of the music notice effect. Specifically, FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a music preview effect in which a music effect described below is executed only once, and FIGS. 56 and 57 show a music preview effect in which a music effect described below is executed twice. FIG. 58 and FIG. 59 are diagrams showing a music notice effect in which a music effect described later is executed three times.

First, FIG. 55 will be described.
FIG. 55A is a timing chart of the music announcement pattern 1.
At the timing of T0, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the gallant predictive effect are started. It should be noted that the gasse predictive presentation effect is a preliminary announcement effect that only causes (suggests) the possibility that a music effect described below may be executed. After that, the gasse predictive presentation effect ends at the timing of T1, the production design 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T2, and the production design 70a is finally stopped by the timing of T3. As described above, in the music announcement pattern 1, the music production is not executed even once.

FIG. 55 (b) is a timing chart of the music announcement patterns 2-4.
At the timing of T0, the variation display of the effect design 70a and the main indication effect are started. It should be noted that the present predictive effect is a predictive effect that confirms that the music effect will be executed. Thereafter, at the timing of T1, the display of the development suggestion effect and the gasse music effect including any combination of the music pieces A to C are executed. It should be noted that the gasse music production is a notice production that does not develop enough to expect development to reach predictive production. Then, the bad music production is finished at the timing of T4, the production design 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T5, and the production design 70a is finally stopped by the timing of T6. As described above, in the music announcement patterns 2 to 4, the music effect is executed only once.

FIG. 55 (c) is a timing chart of the music announcement patterns 5-7.
At the timing of T0, the variation display of the effect design 70a and the main indication effect are started. After that, at the timing of T1, the main music performance including the display of the development suggestion performance and any combination of the music A to C is executed. It should be noted that this musical piece performance is a preview production in which the development to reach predictive production is confirmed. Then, at the timing of T4, the gascereach predictive presentation effect including the development effect and the reach-inspiring effect is executed. It should be noted that the gasse reach predictive effect is a notice effect that does not develop to the extent that it can be expected to develop into a music type reach effect. After that, the gascereach predictive presentation effect is finished at the timing of T7, the production design 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T8, and the production design 70a is finally stopped by the timing of T9. As described above, in the music notice patterns 5 to 7, the music effect is executed only once.

FIG. 55 (d) is a timing chart of the music announcement patterns 8-10.
The variation display of the effect design 70a and the main predictive effect are started at the timing of T0, and the main music effect including the combination of the development suggestion effect display and the music A to C is executed at the timing of T1. Then, at the timing of T4, the actual reach predictive effect including the development effect and the reach-inspiring effect is executed. The reach predictive effect is a predictive effect in which the development of the music-based reach effect is confirmed. After that, the reach effect is started at the timing of T7, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T10, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped by the timing of T11. As described above, in the music notice patterns 8 to 10, the music effect is executed only once.

FIG. 55 (e) is a diagram showing an example of effect by the music notice pattern 8.
FIG. 55 (e1) is an example of effects during the main indication effect. Here, the effect image G1 is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and the character information (“chans?”) G2 is displayed on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71. Then, the displayed effect image G1 forms a development suggestion image (window) G3 shown in FIG. 55 (e2). In the case of a gasse predictive presentation, the development suggestion image (window) G3 is not formed and the effect image G1 and the character information G2 disappear.

  FIG. 55 (e2) is an example of the effect of the first music effect. Here, the intro (introduction) part of the music A is output from the audio output device 9, and the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is enlarged in accordance with the rhythm of the music A. The full screen is produced. Further, on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, history information (“song A”) G4 indicating (notifying) the player the music output during the music preview effect is displayed. In the case of Gase's first music effect, the development suggestion image G3 disappears without becoming the full screen.

  FIG. 55 (e3) and FIG. 55 (e4) are examples of effects of this reach predictive effect. Here, the development effect in which the character information (“Yoshisha! Yaruzo!”) Suggesting the development is displayed in the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is performed, and then the production effect is performed. A reach-inspiring effect that is expected to be reached using the design 70a is executed. Further, the history information G4 remains displayed on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71. Note that the musical piece preview effect according to the musical piece preview pattern 8 corresponds to the effects shown in FIGS. 55 (e1) to (e4), but may be shown in FIGS. 55 (e1) to (e3), or FIGS. 55 (e1) to (e5). ) Is good.

  FIG. 55 (e5) is an example of reach effect. Here, the music output A 9 is output from the audio output device 9 in a music effect, and the character is to cut the effect design 70a one after another on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 in accordance with the rhythm of the music A. Display performance is performed. The music output during the reach performance is not limited to the music A output in the music performance, and other music (for example, D to F) may be randomly selected and output. A plurality of music pieces (for example, music piece G to I for music piece A, music piece J to L for music piece B, music piece M to O for music piece C) are associated with each C, and You may make it output one.

  55 (e6) and FIG. 55 (e7) are examples of effects when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed (temporary stop and main stop). In FIG. 55 (e6), as a result of the variable display of the effect design 70a, the loss result mode (“767”) is stopped and displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71. The character information (“sorry”) indicating that it is lost is displayed. Further, in FIG. 55 (e7), the jackpot result mode (“777”) is stopped and displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 as a result of the variable display of the effect design 70a, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal). ) 71 displays character information (“sorry”) indicating a big hit.

Next, FIG. 56 will be described.
FIG. 56 (a) is a timing chart of the music announcement patterns 11-13.
The variation display of the effect design 70a and the main indication effect are started at the timing of T0, and the development of the development suggestion effect and the gasse music effect including any combination of the music pieces A to C are executed at the timing of T1. Then, when the bad music effect is finished at the timing of T2, the effect design 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T3. After that, at the timing of T4, the pseudo continuous production that produces the success of the generation of the pseudo continuous notice is executed, and at the timing of T5, the variable display of the production symbol 70a is restarted. Then, the main musical piece effect is executed at the timing of T6, and the main reach predictive effect is executed at the timing of T7. Then, the reach predictive effect is started at the timing of T7. After that, the reach effect is started at the timing of T8, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T9, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped by the timing of T10. As described above, in the music announcement patterns 11 to 13, the music effect is executed twice.

FIG. 56 (b) is a diagram showing an example of effect by the music notice pattern 11.
FIG. 56 (b1) is an example of an effect of the present predictive effect. Here, the effect image G1 is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and the character information (“chans?”) G2 is displayed on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71. Then, the development effect image (window) G3 shown in (e2) is formed by the displayed effect image G1.

  FIG. 56 (b2) is an example of an effect for the Gasse first music effect. In the Gasse first music effect, the intro (introduction) part of the music A is output from the audio output device 9, and the development suggestion image is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 according to the rhythm of the music A. The effect that G3 expands is performed, and finally it disappears without becoming the full screen. Further, on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, history information (“song A”) G4 indicating (notifying) the player the music output during the music preview effect is displayed.

  FIG. 56 (b3) is an example of an effect of pseudo continuous effect. Here, the pseudo continuous production is performed in which the window G5 including the character information indicating that the pseudo continuous notice has been successfully generated is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal). ) 71, the history information G4 remains displayed.

  FIG. 56 (b4) is an example of the effect of the first music effect. Here, the intro (introduction) part of the music A is output from the audio output device 9, and the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is enlarged in accordance with the rhythm of the music A. The full screen is produced. Further, the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 updates the display of the history information G4 indicating the music output during the music preview production (changes from “music A” to “A → A”).

  FIG. 56 (b5) and FIG. 56 (b6) are examples of effects of this reach predictive effect. Here, the development effect in which the character information (“Yoshisha! Yaruzo!”) Suggesting the development is displayed in the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is performed, and then the production effect is performed. A reach-inspiring effect that is expected to be reached using the design 70a is executed. Further, the history information G4 remains displayed on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71. In addition, although the music preview effect according to the music preview pattern 11 is shown in FIGS. 56 (b1) to (b6), the effects may be shown in FIGS. 56 (b1) to (b5) or FIGS. 56 (b1) to (b1) to (b6). It may be up to b7).

  FIG. 56 (b7) is an example of a reach effect. Here, the music output A, which is the last output in the music production, is output from the audio output device 9, and the character cuts the production design 70a one after another on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 in accordance with the rhythm of the music production A. Such a display effect is performed. The music output during the reach performance is not limited to the music A output in the music performance, and other music (for example, D to F) may be randomly selected and output. A plurality of music pieces (for example, music piece G to I for music piece A, music piece J to L for music piece B, music piece M to O for music piece C) are associated with each C, and You may make it output one. The display effect mode of the reach effect may be different or the same for each music output during the reach effect.

  FIG. 56 (b8) is an example of an effect when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed (temporary stop and main stop) in the loss result mode. Here, as a result of the variable display of the effect design 70a, the loss result mode (“767”) is stopped and displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and is lost on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71. The character information (“sorry”) indicating that is displayed.

Next, FIG. 57 will be described.
FIG. 57A is a timing chart when the music announcement patterns 14 to 16 are executed. Note that the execution timings of the various effects executed by the music announcement patterns 14 to 16 are the same as the timings of the various effects executed by the music announcement patterns 11 to 13 shown in FIG. To do.

  FIG. 57 (b) is a diagram showing an example of effect by the music notice pattern 14. Note that, with regard to the example of the performance by the music notice pattern 14 as well, since there are many similarities to the example of the production by the music notice pattern 8 shown in FIG. 55 except that the expectation (reliability) of being a jackpot is different, only different parts will be described. .

  FIG. 57 (b4) is an example of the effect of the second musical piece effect. Here, the intro portion of the music B is output from the audio output device 9, and the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is enlarged in accordance with the rhythm of the music B. The full screen is produced. Further, the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 updates the display of the history information G4 indicating the music output during the music preview production (changes from “music A” to “A → B”).

  FIG. 57 (b5) is an example of an effect of this reach predictive effect. Here, the development effect is performed in which the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 displays the thick character information (“Yoshisha! Yaruzo!”) Indicating the development in the development suggestion image G3. Specifically, in order to increase the expectation for the jackpot, the text information (“Yoshisha! Yaruzo!”) Is in bold, but the display mode can be changed by changing the text color or the text background. Just do it.

  Further, FIG. 57 (b8) is an example of an effect when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed (temporary stop and main stop) in the big hit result mode. Here, the jackpot result mode (“777”) is stopped and displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 as a result of the variable display of the effect design 70a, and the jackpot is displayed on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71. Character information (“big hit”) indicating that is displayed.

Next, FIG. 58 will be described.
FIG. 58A is a timing chart when the music announcement patterns 17 to 25 are executed.
The variation display of the effect design 70a and the main indication effect are started at the timing of T0, and the development of the development suggestion effect and the gasse music effect including any combination of the music pieces A to C are executed at the timing of T1. Then, when the bad music effect is finished at the timing of T2, the effect design 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T3. After that, at the timing of T4, the pseudo continuous production that produces the success of the generation of the pseudo continuous notice is executed, and at the timing of T5, the variable display of the production symbol 70a is restarted. Then, the bad music production is executed at the timing of T6. Then, when the bad music effect is finished at the timing of T7, the effect design 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T8. After that, the pseudo continuous effect is executed at the timing of T9, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is restarted at the timing of T10. Then, the musical composition effect is executed at the timing of T11. Then, the reach predictive effect is started at the timing of T12. After that, the reach effect is started at the timing of T13, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T14, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped by the timing of T15. As described above, in the music notice patterns 17 to 22, the music effect is executed three times.

FIG. 58 (b) is a diagram showing an example of effect by the music notice pattern 20.
FIG. 58 (b1) is an example of an effect of the present predictive effect. Here, the effect image G1 is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and the character information (“chans?”) G2 is displayed on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71. Then, the development effect image (window) G3 shown in (b2) is formed by the displayed effect image G1.

  FIG. 58 (b2) is an example of an effect for the Gasse first music effect. Here, the intro (introduction) part of the music A is output from the audio output device 9, and the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is enlarged in accordance with the rhythm of the music A. The production is done, and finally it disappears without making it full screen. Further, on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, history information (“song A”) G4 indicating (notifying) the player the music output during the music preview effect is displayed.

  FIG. 58 (b3) is an example of a pseudo-continuous production. Here, the pseudo continuous production is performed in which the window G5 including the character information indicating that the pseudo continuous notice has been successfully generated is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal). ) 71, the history information G4 remains displayed.

  FIG. 58 (b4) is an example of an effect of the Gasse first music effect. Here, the intro (introduction) part of the music A is output from the audio output device 9, and the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is enlarged in accordance with the rhythm of the music A. The production is done, and finally it disappears without making it full screen. Further, the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 updates the display of the history information G4 indicating the music output during the music preview production (changes from “music A” to “A → A”).

  FIG. 58 (b5) is an example of an effect of pseudo continuous effect. Here, the pseudo continuous production is performed in which the window G5 including the character information indicating that the pseudo continuous notice has been successfully generated is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal). ) 71, the history information G4 remains displayed.

  FIG. 58 (b6) is an example of the effect of the second musical piece effect. Here, the intro portion of the music B is output from the audio output device 9, and the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is enlarged in accordance with the rhythm of the music B. The full screen is produced. The second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 is updated with the display of the history information G4 indicating the music output during the music preview production (changed from “music A” to “A → A → B”). It

  FIG. 58 (b7) and FIG. 58 (b8) are examples of effects of this reach predictive effect. Here, the development effect in which the character information (“Yoshisha! Yaruzo!”) Suggesting the development is displayed in the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is performed, and then the production effect is performed. A reach-inspiring effect that is expected to be reached using the design 70a is executed. Further, the history information G4 remains displayed on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71. In addition, although the music preview effects by the music preview pattern 20 are effects (b1) to (b8), they may be effects (b1) to (b7) or (b1) to (b9). .

  FIG. 58 (b9) is an example of a reach effect. Here, the music output device 9 outputs the music B that is output in the music effect, and the character cuts the effect pattern 70a one after another on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 in accordance with the rhythm of the music B. Display performance is performed. The music output during the reach performance is not limited to the music B output in the music performance, but other music (for example, D to F) may be randomly selected and output. A plurality of music pieces (for example, music piece G to I for music piece A, music piece J to L for music piece B, and music piece M to O for music piece C) are associated with each C, and You may make it output one.

  FIG. 58 (b10) is an example of an effect when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed (temporary stop and main stop) in the loss result mode. Here, as a result of the variable display of the effect design 70a, the loss result mode (“767”) is stopped and displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and is lost on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71. The character information (“sorry”) indicating that is displayed.

Next, FIG. 59 will be described.
FIG. 59A is a timing chart when the music announcement patterns 26 to 28 are executed. Note that the execution timings of the various effects executed in the music announcement patterns 26 to 28 are the same as the timings of the various effects executed in the music announcement patterns 17 to 25 shown in FIG. Omit it.

  FIG. 59 (b) is a diagram showing an example of effect by the music notice pattern 26. Note that, with regard to the example of the effect by the music notice pattern 28, there are many similar parts to the example of the effect by the music notice pattern 20 shown in FIG. 58 except that the expectation (reliability) of being a jackpot is different. Therefore, only different parts will be described. .

  FIG. 59 (b4) is an example of an effect for the second musical piece effect of Gase. Here, the intro portion of the music B is output from the audio output device 9, and the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is enlarged in accordance with the rhythm of the music B. The full screen is produced. Further, the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 updates the display of the history information G4 indicating the music output during the music preview production (changes from “music A” to “A → B”).

  FIG. 59 (b6) is an example of the effect of the third musical piece effect. Here, the intro portion of the music C is output from the audio output device 9, and the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is enlarged in accordance with the rhythm of the music C. The full screen is produced. Further, the display of the history information G4 indicating the music output during the music preview production is updated on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 (changed from “A → B” to “A → B → C”). To be done.

  FIG. 59 (b7) is an example of an effect of this reach predictive effect. Here, the development effect is performed in which the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 displays the thick character information (“Yoshisha! Yaruzo!”) Indicating the development in the development suggestion image G3. Specifically, the character information (“Yoshisha! Yaruzo”) is shown in bold to increase the expectation for jackpots, but the display mode can be changed, such as by changing the character color or the background of the character. Good.

  FIG. 59 (b10) is an example of an effect when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed (temporary stop and main stop) in the big hit result mode. Here, the jackpot result mode (“777”) is stopped and displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 as a result of the variable display of the effect design 70a, and the jackpot is displayed on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71. Character information (“big hit”) indicating that is displayed.

  As described above, in the music preview production (specific performance) of the present embodiment, the higher the degree of expectation that a jackpot game (special game state) occurs, the more the number of music output during execution of the music preview production (type of music, It is set to increase the number of output), but conversely, the higher the degree of expectation that a big hit game (special game state) will occur, the more the number of songs that are output during execution of the music notice effect (specific effect) The number of types of music and the number of outputs may be reduced. Further, although the type of music and the number of times of output are listed as the number of music, only one of them may be used.

  Further, in the case of the variable effect pattern in which the reach state does not occur, the music preview effect (specific effect) of the present embodiment is from the time when the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started until the effect symbol 70a is first temporarily stopped. Although the music effect is performed in the meantime, the music effect may be performed after the first temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a. Further, the musical effect may be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 1 to 2 times) before the production symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, and the musical effect may be performed a predetermined number of times (1 to 2 times) after the production symbol 70a is temporarily stopped. .

  Further, in the case of the reach variation effect pattern in which the reach state is generated, the music preview effect (specific effect) of the present embodiment is a song from the start of the variable display of the effect pattern 70a until the reach state is generated. Although the performance is performed, the music performance may be performed after the reach state occurs. In addition, the music effect may be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 1 to 2 times) before the reach state occurs, and the music effect may be performed a predetermined number of times (1 to 2 times) after the reach state occurs.

  Further, in the music preview effect (specific effect) of the present embodiment, an intro (prelude) part of any of the music A to C is output during the music effect, but the music is composed of a plurality of elements such as a melody part and a chorus part. When configured, the melody part or the chorus part may be used for the musical effect. Also, the types of music output during the music production are not limited to the three types A to C, and may be more or less. Further, although the musical performance is intermittently performed, it may be continuously performed.

  Further, the music preview effect (specific effect) of the present embodiment is configured by a combination of the music output and the display effect, but may be only the music output. In addition, the history information of the music output during the music preview production is displayed on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 so that the player can easily grasp the degree of expectation of the special game state. , May be displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, or may be displayed on neither the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 nor the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71. May be.

  In addition, during execution and / or non-execution of the music notice effect (specific effect), an explanation effect for explaining what the music notice effect is may be executed. Specifically, the expectation that a big hit will change depending on the number of songs (type of song) that is output for the song preview production, and that the number of songs (type of song) that is output for the song preview production is a big hit It is preferable that the character information such as "is likely to occur" is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and / or the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71.

(Step-up notice mode determination table)
FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a step-up notice mode determination table that is referred to when a step-up notice pattern is determined in the step-up notice pattern determination processing in step S1212-18. Specifically, FIG. 60 (a) is a diagram showing a step-up preliminary announcement mode determination table for losing, and FIG. 60 (b) is a diagram showing a step-up preliminary announcement mode determining table for jackpot.

  The step-up notice effect changes (changes) the step effect image displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and / or the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 over a plurality of stages. ) Is a notice effect for notifying that a predetermined specific effect is executed. In addition, the specific effect is an effect that is expected to be a jackpot (sudden change), and can be rephrased as an acquisition challenge effect for obtaining a jackpot (sudden change).

  In the step-up notice mode determination table for loss shown in FIG. 60A and the step-up notice mode determination table for jackpot shown in FIG. 60B, the change effect pattern and the notice obtained when the step-up notice pattern is determined. The selection rate based on the random number for mode determination is associated with the type of the step-up notice pattern. The types of step-up notice productions are roughly classified into three types from step-up notice productions 1 to step-up notice productions 3, and step-up notice patterns with branch numbers attached to each of step-up notice productions 1 to 3. Is set multiple times.

  In the step-up notice effect 1, the degree of expectation that the character information to be displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and / or the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 will be executed as a specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) ( (Reliability) or sudden probability change It is a notice production that changes stepwise (continuously or intermittently) according to the degree of expectation (reliability) that is a big hit, and the maximum (final) number of steps (number of steps) is "3" Is set to. It should be noted that the execution of the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) is set to be determined when the third step effect (stage effect) corresponding to the maximum number of steps “3” is started.

  In the step-up notice effect 2, the degree of expectation that the character image displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and / or the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 will be subjected to the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) ( (Reliability) or sudden probability change It is a notice production that changes stepwise (continuously or intermittently) according to the degree of expectation (reliability) that becomes a big hit, and the maximum number of steps (number of steps) is set to "4". ing. Even if the fourth step effect (stage effect) corresponding to the maximum number of steps “4” is started, the execution of the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) is not finalized unless the fourth step effect is executed to the end. Is set.

  In the step-up notice effect 3, the degree of expectation that the telop image to be displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and / or the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 will be executed as a specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) ( (Reliability) or sudden probability change It is a notice production that changes stepwise (continuously or intermittently) according to the degree of expectation (reliability) to be a big hit, and the maximum number of steps (number of steps) is set to "3". ing. Even if the third step effect (stage effect) corresponding to the maximum number of steps “3” is started, the execution of the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) is not finalized unless the third step effect is executed to the end. Is set.

  Further, in the following description, the word "step-up" may be expressed as "SU". That is, the step-up notice production may be expressed as an SU notice production, the step-up notice manner determination table may be expressed as a SU notice manner determination table, and the step-up notice pattern may be expressed as a SU notice pattern.

  The "SU notice pattern 1-1" is for gradually drawing the character information G1 corresponding to step 1 of the SU notice effect 1 on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. This is a notice effect for executing the step effect.

  In the "SU notice pattern 1-2", after the first step effect of the SU notice effect 1 is executed during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the character information G2 corresponding to step 2 of the SU notice effect 1 is displayed on the first image. This is a notice effect for executing the second step effect that is gradually drawn on the device (main liquid crystal) 70.

  The "SU notice pattern 1-3" is character information G3 corresponding to step 3 of the SU notice effect 1 after executing the first step effect and the second step effect of the SU notice effect 1 during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Is gradually drawn on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and after the character information G3 of step 3 has been drawn, character information G4 (character information G1) indicating that the third step effect has been executed to the end It is a notice effect that executes the third step effect of displaying (images in which 3 to 3 are arranged).

  The "SU notice pattern 2-1" is a first step in which the character image A corresponding to step 1 of the SU notice effect 2 is gradually displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. This is a notice effect for executing the effect.

  The "SU notice pattern 2-2" is the first image display of the character image B corresponding to step 2 of the SU notice effect 2 after executing the first step effect of the SU notice effect 2 during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. It is a notice effect that executes the first step effect that is gradually made to appear in the device (main liquid crystal) 70.

  The “SU notice pattern 2-3” is a character image C corresponding to step 3 of the SU notice effect 2 after executing the first step effect and the second step effect of the SU notice effect 2 during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Is a notice effect for executing the third step effect for gradually appearing on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70.

  The “SU notice pattern 2-4” is executed in step 4 of the SU notice effect 2 after executing the first step effect, the second step effect and the third step effect of the SU notice effect 2 during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. This is a preliminary presentation effect in which the corresponding character information D is gradually made to appear on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and the fourth step effect A is executed in which the character image D ends without completely appearing.

  The “SU notice pattern 2-5” is executed in step 4 of the SU notice effect 2 after executing the first step effect, the second step effect and the third step effect of the SU notice effect 2 during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. This is a notice effect in which the corresponding character information D is gradually made to appear on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the fourth step effect B in which the character image D completely appears is executed.

  The “SU notice pattern 3-1” is a first step in which the telop image A corresponding to step 1 of the SU notice effect 3 is gradually displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. This is a notice effect for executing the effect.

  In the “SU notice pattern 3-2”, the telop image B corresponding to step 2 of the SU notice effect 3 is displayed as the first image after executing the first step effect of the SU notice effect 3 during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. This is a notice effect that executes a second step effect that is gradually made to appear in the device (main liquid crystal) 70.

  “SU notice pattern 3-3” is a telop image C corresponding to step 3 of SU notice effect 3 after executing the first step effect and the second step effect of SU notice effect 3 during the variable display of effect symbol 70a. Is a notice effect for executing the third step effect A in which the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 gradually appears, and the telop image C ends without completely appearing.

  The “SU notice pattern 3-4” is executed in step 4 of the SU notice effect 3 after executing the first step effect, the second step effect and the third step effect of the SU notice effect 3 during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. This is a notice effect in which the corresponding telop image D is gradually made to appear on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the third step effect A in which the telop image D completely appears is executed.

  As a first feature of the step-up notice mode determination table shown in FIG. 60, when the number of executed step effects is large (3 or 4), the number of executed step effects is small (1 or 2) The expectation that the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) is executed is higher than that. As a result, the player becomes interested in the number of step effects to be executed, and the interest in the step-up notice effect and the interest in the game are improved.

  As a second characteristic of the step-up notice mode determination table shown in FIG. 60, the expectation (reliability) of sudden sudden big hit is high in the order of step-up notice effect 1 <step-up notice effect 2 <step-up notice effect 3. The points are as follows. As a result, the player becomes interested in the type of the step-up notice effect to be executed, and the interest of the step-up notice effect and the interest of the game are improved.

  As a third feature of the step-up notice mode determination table shown in FIG. 60, the start timing is delayed (start timing is different) in the order of step-up notice effect 1 <step-up notice effect 2 <step-up notice effect 3. To be As a result, it is possible to lengthen the period in which the player is expected to start the step-up notice effect. Further, since it becomes possible to infer the type of the step-up notice production executed depending on the start time of the step-up notice production, the interest of the game is improved. The start timings of the step-up notice effects 1 to 3 may be the same.

  As a fourth feature of the step-up notice mode determination table shown in FIG. 60, a step-up notice effect (SU notice effect 1 and SU notice effect 3) in which the final step (final stage) is set to “3”, and the final step The point is that the step-up notice effect (SU notice effect 2) in which (final stage) is set to "4" is set. As a result, the number of steps in which the player has the most expectation for the development to the specific effect changes depending on the type of the step-up notification effect, and it is possible to prevent the step-up notification effect from getting tired.

(Example of step-up notice production)
61 to 63 are diagrams showing a timing chart of a step-up notice effect and an example of effect. Specifically, FIG. 61 is a diagram showing the step-up notice effect 1, FIG. 62 is a diagram showing the step-up notice effect 2, and FIG. 63 is a diagram showing the step-up notice effect 3.

First, FIG. 61 will be described.
FIG. 61 (a) is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 1-1.
The variable display of the effect design 70a is started at the timing of T0, the first step effect of the SU notice effect 1 is started at the timing of T1 (20th frame), and the first step effect is ended at the timing of T2. The effect design 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing, and the effect design 70a is permanently stopped by the timing of T4.

FIG. 61 (b) is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 1-2.
The variable display of the effect design 70a is started at the timing of T0, and the first step effect is started at the timing of T1. Then, when the second step effect of the SU notice effect 1 is started at the timing of T2 and the second step effect is ended at the timing of T5, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T6, and the effect symbol is changed by the timing of T7. Stop 70a.

FIG. 61 (c) is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 1-3.
The variable display of the effect design 70a is started at the timing of T0, the first step effect is started at the timing of T1, and the second step effect is started at the timing of T2. Then, the third step effect (final step effect) of the SU notice effect 1 is started at the timing of T5, and the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) is started at the timing of T8 which overlaps with the end part of the third step effect, and at T9. When the production design 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing, the specific production is ended at the timing of T10, and the production design 70a is stopped by the timing of T11.

FIG. 61 (d) is a diagram showing an example of effect by the SU announcement pattern 1-3.
FIG. 61 (d1) shows an example of an effect immediately before the end of the first step effect. Here, the character information G1 corresponding to step 1 is all displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 indicates step 1. The character information M1 is displayed. In the case of the SU notice pattern 1-1, the character information G1 is not entirely drawn and the first step effect ends.

  FIG. 61 (d2) shows an example of an effect immediately before the end of the second step effect. Here, the character information G2 corresponding to step 2 is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 in a drawn state, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 indicates step 2. The character information M2 is displayed. In the case of the SU notice pattern 1-2, the character information G2 is not entirely drawn and the second step effect ends.

  FIG. 61 (d3) is an example of an effect in the middle of the third step effect. Here, the character information G3 corresponding to step 3 is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 in a drawn state, and it is shown on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 that it is step 3. The character information M3 is displayed.

  FIG. 61 (d4) is an example of an effect immediately before the end of the third step effect (the end part). Here, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 displays the character information G4 indicating that the third step effect has been executed to the end, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 congratulates the player. Character information M4 (“I did it”) is displayed. Although not shown in order to avoid visual comprehension, the first image is displayed from the timing of T8 when the end part of the third step effect and the beginning part of the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) overlap. The device (main liquid crystal) 70 is displayed such that the introduction image G5 of the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) gradually appears in front of the character information G4.

  FIG. 61 (d5) is an example of an effect immediately after the start of the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect). Here, the introduction image G5 of the specific effect is completely displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and the character information M5 ("" indicating that the specific effect is being performed on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71. Acquiring challenge ”) is displayed.

  FIG. 61 (d6) is an example of an effect in the middle of the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect). Here, an image in which the enemy and the ally character start a battle is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and character information indicating that the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 is performing a specific effect. M5 (“Getting Challenge”) is displayed.

  FIG. 61 (d7) is an example of an effect immediately before the end of the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect). Here, as a result of the battle between the two characters performed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, an image in which the teammate character has won is displayed, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 is displayed. Character information M5 (“acquiring challenge”) indicating that the specific effect is being displayed is displayed.

  FIG. 61 (d8) is an example of an effect after the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) is completed. Here, an image showing that a sudden change (big hit) has been obtained is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and character information celebrating the player is displayed on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 (“ You did it! ”) Is displayed. Further, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, a combination of the effect symbols 70a that are the jackpot result mode is stopped and displayed (main stop) in accordance with the timing of stop of variation of the special symbol. In addition, here, the combination of the effect symbols 70a that are the big hit result mode is stopped and displayed (main stop), but if the result of the big hit lottery is a loss, the combination of the effect symbols 70a that is the loss result mode is stopped. It will be displayed (stopped).

  It should be noted that, as a feature of the step-up advance notice effect 1 shown in FIG. 61, the transition to the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) is confirmed at the time when the third step effect (final step) is started, One of the points is that step effect time <third step effect time <second step effect time. By doing so, it becomes possible to increase the expectation of whether or not the third step effect is developed at the time of the second step effect (in the middle of the step-up notice effect) when the player does not have much expectation. , It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the step-up notice effect 1 of the present embodiment, the first step effect time is set to <the third step effect time, but conversely, it is set to the first step effect time> the third step effect time. Good. In this way, it is easy to increase the player's expectation at the time of the first step effect.

Next, FIG. 62 will be described.
FIG. 62A is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 2-1.
The variable display of the effect design 70a is started at the timing of T0, the first step effect of the SU notice effect 2 is started at the timing of T1 (30th frame), and the first step effect is ended at the timing of T2. The effect design 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing, and the effect design 70a is permanently stopped by the timing of T4.

FIG. 62B is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 2-2.
The variable display of the effect design 70a is started at the timing of T0, and the first step effect is started at the timing of T1. Then, the second step effect of the SU notice effect 2 is started at the timing of T2. After that, when the second step effect is finished at the timing of T4, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T6, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped by the timing of T7.

FIG. 62C is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 2-3.
The variable display of the effect design 70a is started at the timing of T0, the first step effect is started at the timing of T1, the second step effect is started at the timing of T2, and the third step of the SU notice effect 2 is started at the timing of T4. Start the production. After that, when the third step effect is finished at the timing of T5, the effect design 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T6, and the effect design 70a is finally stopped by the timing of T7.

FIG. 62D is a timing chart of the SU announcement pattern 2-4.
The variable display of the effect design 70a is started at the timing of T0, the first step effect is started at the timing of T1, the second step effect is started at the timing of T2, and the third step effect is started at the timing of T4. Then, the fourth step effect A (final step effect: unfinished) of the SU notice effect 3 is started at the timing of T5. After that, the fourth step effect A is finished halfway at the timing of T7, and the effect design 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T9, the effect design 70a is stopped by the timing of T10.

FIG. 62 (e) is a timing chart of the SU announcement pattern 2-5.
The variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing of T0, the first step effect is started at the timing of T1, the second step effect is started at the timing of T2, and the third step effect is started at the timing of T4. At the timing of T5, the fourth step effect B (final step effect: completion) is started. After that, the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) is started at the timing of T8, and the effect design 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T11, the specific effect is ended at the timing of T12, and the effect design 70a is completely stopped by the timing of T13. To do.

FIG. 62 (f) is a diagram showing an example of effect by the SU announcement pattern 2-5.
FIG. 62 (f1) is an example of an effect immediately before the end of the first step effect. Here, the character image G1 corresponding to step 1 is all displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 indicates that it is step 1. The information M1 is displayed. It should be noted that in the case of the SU notice pattern 2-1, the first step effect ends without all the character images G1 appearing.

  FIG. 62 (f2) is an example of effects immediately before the end of the second step effect. Here, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is displayed with all the character images G2 corresponding to step 2 appearing, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 is a character indicating that it is step 2. The information M2 is displayed. In addition, in the case of the SU notice pattern 2-2, the second step effect ends without all the character images G2 appearing.

  FIG. 62 (f3) is an example of an effect immediately before the end of the third step effect. Here, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is displayed with all the character images G3 corresponding to step 3 appearing, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 indicates that it is step 3 Information M3 is displayed. In the case of the SU notice pattern 2-3, the third step effect is finished without all the character images G3 appearing.

  FIG. 62 (f4) is an example of an effect immediately before the end of the fourth step effect. Here, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is displayed with all the character images G4 corresponding to step 4 appearing, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 is a character indicating that it is step 4. Information M4 is displayed. In addition, in the case of the SU notice pattern 2-4, the third step effect is finished without all the character images G4 appearing.

  62 (f5) to (f8) show the same flow of effect as in FIGS. 61 (d5) to (d8), and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted here, but in FIG. 62 (f8), FIG. Similarly to the above), in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the combination of the effect symbols 70a that is the jackpot result mode (or the loss result mode) is stopped and displayed (main stop) in accordance with the change stop timing of the special symbol. Will be done. The contents of the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) when the step-up notice effect 1 is passed and the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) when the step-up notice effect 2 is passed may be different. The type of specific effect to be executed each time is executed may be determined by lottery.

  It should be noted that as a feature of the step-up advance notice effect 2 shown in FIG. 62, the transition to the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) is not decided unless the fourth step effect (final step) is completed, and therefore the first step effect is produced. The point is time <second step effect time <third step effect time <fourth step effect time. By doing so, the player's expectation and frustration can be effectively fueled by the performance difference from the step-up notice effect 1 (whether or not the transition to the specific effect is decided by the execution of the final step effect). Therefore, a synergistic effect can be expected.

  In the step-up notice effect 2, the effect time of the third step effect <the effect time of the fourth step effect A is set, but the character image G4 does not completely appear in the fourth step effect A, so the third step effect time A The step effect time may be greater than the effect time of the fourth step effect A. Further, the time of all step effects may be the same, or the effect time may be longer when all step effects are completed than when they are unfinished.

Next, FIG. 63 will be described.
FIG. 63A is a timing chart of the SU announcement pattern 3-1.
The variable display of the effect design 70a is started at the timing of T0, the first step effect of the SU notice effect 3 is started at the timing of T1 (40th frame), and the first step effect is ended at the timing of T2. The effect design 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing, and the effect design 70a is permanently stopped by the timing of T4.

FIG. 63 (b) is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 3-2.
The variable display of the effect design 70a is started at the timing of T0, and the first step effect is started at the timing of T1. Then, the second step effect of the SU notice effect 3 is started at the timing of T2. After that, when the second step effect is finished at the timing of T5, the effect design 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T6, and the effect design 70a is finally stopped by the timing of T7.

FIG. 63 (c) is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 3-3.
The variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing of T0, the first step effect is started at the timing of T1, the second step effect is started at the timing of T2, and the third step of the SU notice effect 2 at the timing of T5. Start production A (final step production: incomplete). After that, when the third step effect A is finished at the timing of T6 and the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the effect symbol 70a is permanently stopped by the timing of T7.

FIG. 63 (d) is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 3-4.
The variable display of the effect design 70a is started at the timing of T0, the first step effect is started at the timing of T1, the second step effect is started at the timing of T2, and the third step effect B (the final step is effected at the timing of T5. Production: Complete) begins. After that, the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) is started at the timing of T8, and the effect design 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T9, the specific effect is ended at the timing of T10, and the effect design 70a is completely stopped by the timing of T11. To do.

FIG. 63 (e) is a diagram showing an example of effect by the SU notice pattern 3-4.
FIG. 63 (e1) is an example of an effect immediately before the end of the first step effect. Here, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is displayed with all the telop images G1 corresponding to step 1 appearing, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 is a character indicating that it is step 1. The information M1 is displayed. In the case of the SU notice pattern 3-1, the first step effect is finished without all the telop images G1 appearing.

  FIG. 63 (e2) is an example of an effect immediately before the end of the second step effect. Here, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is displayed with all the telop images G2 corresponding to step 2 appearing, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 is a character indicating that it is step 2. The information M2 is displayed. It should be noted that in the case of the SU notice pattern 3-2, the second step effect is finished without all the telop images G2 appearing.

  FIG. 63 (e3) is an example of an effect immediately before the end of the third step effect. Here, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is displayed with all the telop images G3 corresponding to step 3 appearing, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 indicates that step 3 is in effect. Information M3 is displayed. In addition, in the case of the SU notice pattern 3-3, the third step effect is finished without all the telop images G3 appearing.

  FIG. 63 (e4) shows an example of effects immediately before the end of the third step effect. Here, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 displays the character information G4 indicating that the third step effect has been executed to the end, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 congratulates the player. Character information M4 (“I did it”) is displayed.

  63 (e5) to (e8) have the same effect flow as FIGS. 61 (d5) to (d8) and FIGS. 62 (f5) to (f8), so detailed description thereof will be omitted here, but FIG. In 63 (e8), as in FIG. 61 (d8) and FIG. 62 (e8), in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the jackpot result mode (or the loss result) is adjusted in accordance with the timing of the change stop of the special symbol. The combination of the effect patterns 70a which are the modes will be stopped and displayed (main stop). In addition, the content of the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) when the step-up notice effect 1 or the step-up notice effect 2 is passed and the content of the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) when the step-up notice effect 3 is passed Alternatively, each time the specific effect is executed, the type of the specific effect to be executed may be determined by lottery.

  As a feature of the step-up advance notice effect 3 shown in FIG. 63, the transition to the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) is not confirmed unless the third step effect (final step) is completed, and therefore the first step effect is produced. The point is time <second step effect time <third step effect time. By doing so, the player's expectation and frustration can be effectively fueled by the performance difference from the step-up notice effect 1 (whether or not the transition to the specific effect is decided by the execution of the final step effect). Therefore, a synergistic effect can be expected.

  In the step-up notice effect 3 of the present embodiment, the second step effect time <the effect time of the third step effect A, but the character image G4 does not appear for the third step effect A, which is unfinished. Therefore, the effect time of the second step effect> the effect time of the third step effect A may be set. Further, the time of all step effects may be the same, or the effect time may be longer when all step effects are completed than when they are unfinished.

  Further, as a feature of the step-up notice productions 1 to 3 shown in FIGS. 61 to 63, no matter which step-up notice production is executed, the specific production (acquisition challenge production) starts from the change start of the production design 70a. The time until it is performed is the same (the 374th frame), and all the step effects (from the first step effect to the last step effect) are executed by then. Specifically, in the step-up notice effect 1, the transition (execution) to the specific effect is confirmed at the time when the execution of the third step effect is started, so at least a part of the third step effect by the 374th frame. Is executed. In the step-up notice effect 2, the transition (execution) to the specific effect is confirmed when the fourth step effect B has been executed to the end (completion). Therefore, the fourth step effect B ends (completion) by the 374th frame. ) Is executed. In the step-up notice effect 3, the transition (execution) to the specific effect is confirmed when the third step effect B is executed to the end (completion), so that the third step effect B ends (completion) by the 374th frame. ) Is executed. That is, the player is notified (indicated) that the transition to the specific effect has been confirmed before the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) is started. By doing so, it is possible to execute different step-up notice effects with the same variation effect pattern, and it is possible to widen the selection range of the step-up notice effect in one variation effect pattern.

(Big hit performance pattern determination process)
The jackpot effect pattern determination process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing a big hit production pattern determination process in the production control unit 130m.

  First, in step S1226-1, the sub CPU 130a confirms the content of the opening designating command determined to be received in step S1225, and in step S12226-2, selects the jackpot effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. The jackpot effect pattern determination table is stored in the sub RAM 130c, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1226-3, the sub CPU130a collates the opening designation command confirmed in step S1226-1 with the jackpot effect pattern determination table selected in step S12226-2, and hits the jackpot according to the jackpot effect pattern determination table. The effect pattern is determined, and in step S1226-4, the determined jackpot effect pattern is stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c.

  In step S1226-5, the sub CPU130a specifies the jackpot effect pattern designation command corresponding to the jackpot effect pattern determined in step S1226-3, and sets the specified jackpot effect pattern designation command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM130c. .

  The jackpot effect pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. . Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, the drive control unit 170, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the big hit effect corresponding to the big hit effect pattern designation command (big hit effect pattern). The rendering device such as the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, the audio output device 9, the board lighting device 74, the frame lighting device 10, the board driving device 75, or the like is caused to execute.

  In step S1226-6, the sub CPU 130a sets right hitting display data for causing the right hitting second display device 87 to perform right hitting display (LED lighting) in a predetermined processing area, and the present jackpot effect pattern determination processing. To finish. As a result, when the right-handed display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S1500, and the created data is output in step S1600, so that the right-handed second display device is displayed. Right-handed display is performed at 87.

(Big hit production pattern decision table)
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a jackpot effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a jackpot effect pattern in step S1226-3.

  As shown in FIG. 65, in the jackpot effect pattern determination table, the opening designation command and the special game effect pattern are associated with each other, and the effect contents are described as a reference.

  The jackpot production pattern 1 executes promotion production between the opening of the special winning opening 50 in the fifth round game and the closing of the special winning opening 50 in the eighth round game, and as a result, promotion fails. It is a jackpot effect pattern that executes promotion failure effect to notify (notify) that.

  Big hit production pattern 2 executes promotion production from the opening of the special winning opening 50 in the fifth round game to the closing of the fourth prize, and as a result, announces (sends) that promotion was successful. It is a jackpot production pattern for performing production.

  The jackpot production pattern 6 executes the promotion production between the opening of the special winning opening 50 in the fifth round game and the closing of the special winning opening 50 in the 15th round game, and as a result, promotion fails. It is a jackpot effect pattern that executes promotion failure effect to notify (notify) that.

  The jackpot production pattern 7 executes promotion production during the fifth round game from the opening of the special winning opening 50 to the closing of the eleventh prize, and as a result, announces (sends) that the promotion was successful. It is a jackpot production pattern for performing production.

  The jackpot effect patterns 3, 4, 5, 8, 9 are jackpot effect patterns in which the promotion effect that indicates whether or not the type of the jackpot game is promoted is not executed.

  The jackpot effect pattern 5 is a jackpot effect pattern that executes a sudden probability variation effect that notifies (notifies) that the high probability game state has been entered.

(Data creation process)
The data creation process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. 66. 66 is a flowchart showing the data creation process in the effect control unit 130m.

  First, in step S1500-1, the sub CPU 130a, based on the special symbol variation display data, the special symbol stop display data set in the variation effect pattern determination process or the effect symbol variation stop process, the first special symbol second display LED of 80 or the second special symbol second display 81 is turned on, the special symbol second display display control data corresponding to the special symbol display signal for turning off or off is created.

  In step S1500-2, the sub CPU 130a, based on the ordinary symbol variation display data and the ordinary symbol stop display data set in the ordinary symbol roulette effect determination process or the ordinary symbol variation stop process, the LED of the ordinary symbol second display 82. Display control data for the normal symbol second display corresponding to the normal symbol display signal for turning on, blinking or extinguishing.

  In step S1500-3, the sub CPU 130a, based on the special symbol hold display data set in the special symbol hold storage update process, the first special symbol hold second display 83, the second special symbol hold second display 84. The display control data for the special symbol holding second display corresponding to the special symbol holding display signal for turning on, blinking or extinguishing the LED is created.

  In step S1500-4, the sub CPU 130a is a normal symbol for turning on, blinking or extinguishing the LED of the normal symbol holding second display 85 based on the normal symbol holding display data set in the ordinary symbol holding storage update process. Create display control data for the normal design hold second display corresponding to the hold display signal.

  In step S1500-5, the sub CPU 130a turns on or off the LED of the right-handed second display 87 based on the right-handed display data or the right-handed erase data set in the game state setting process or the jackpot effect pattern determination process. The display control data for the right-handed second display device corresponding to the right-handed display signal for causing the display is created.

(Data output process)
The data output process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a data output process in the effect control unit 130m.

  First, in step S1600-1, the sub CPU 130a, the first special symbol second indicator 80, the second special symbol second indicator 81, the normal symbol second indicator 82, the first special symbol reservation second indicator 83. , In order to turn on each LED of the second special symbol hold second indicator 84, the normal symbol hold second indicator 85, the right-handed second indicator 87, created in the above step S1500-1 to step S1500-5 Performs output processing for a display device that outputs various display control data.

  In step S1600-2, the sub CPU 130a performs a command output process of transmitting various commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170. To do.

(Specific example of display result of each display)
Here, using FIG. 68, the first special symbol first indicator 60, the second special symbol first indicator 61, the first special symbol second indicator 80, the second special symbol second indicator 81, the second A specific example of the display result that is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display on the one-image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 will be described.

  First, the details of the variable display of various symbols, which is performed before the display result is derived on each display, will be described.

  In the first special symbol first display device 60 and the second special symbol first display device 61, when the power is turned on (RAM clear), the right ends of the six LEDs lined up in the left-right direction to be the special symbol display area are turned on (missing special symbol). The initial special symbol of the same mode as that) is displayed), and the variable display of the special symbol is performed based on the establishment of the starting condition. Specifically, the lighting position is moved one by one in a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.25 seconds) from the leftmost LED to the rightmost LED, and finally one or more LEDs are turned on. Lost special symbol or jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Then, the lost special symbol or the jackpot special symbol which is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol first display device 60, until the variable display is started on the first special symbol first display device 60 (the second special symbol first While executing the variable display on the display device 61 and during the jackpot game), the state of being stopped and displayed is maintained, and the special symbol or the jackpot special symbol stopped by the second special symbol first display device 61 is displayed. , Next, until the variable display on the second special symbol first display 61 is started (while the variable display is being executed on the first special symbol first display 60 or while the jackpot game is being executed), the display remains stopped. It is designed to maintain the state of.

  In the first special symbol second display 80 and the second special symbol second display 81, one LED that is the fourth symbol display area when the power is turned on (RAM clear) is turned off (in the same manner as the lost fourth symbol). The initial 4th symbol is displayed), and the variable display of the 4th symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol (synchronization). Specifically, turning off and turning on one LED is repeated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.5 seconds), and finally the LED is turned off or turned on and the lost fourth symbol or the jackpot fourth symbol is stopped and displayed. The LED lighting cycle may be earlier than the LED lighting cycle (0.25 seconds) of the special symbol first display.

  Then, the fourth special symbol or the big hit fourth symbol which is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol second display 80 is until the variable display is started on the first special symbol second display 80 (the second special symbol). While executing the variable display on the second display 81 and during the jackpot game), the state of being stopped and displayed is maintained, and the fourth special symbol or the jackpot that is stopped on the second special symbol second display 81 is displayed. The fourth symbol is stopped until the variable display is started on the second special symbol second display 81 (while the variable display is being executed or the jackpot game is being executed on the first special symbol second display 80). It is designed to remain displayed.

  In the image display device, when the power is turned on (RAM is cleared), three effect symbols 70a (a lost effect symbol or a jackpot effect symbol) that are predetermined in the effect symbol display area (left side area, central area, right side area) are different from the initial effect. In the state of displaying (design), the variation display of the effect design 70a is performed so as to be synchronized (synchronized) with the variation display of the special symbol. Specifically, the three effect symbols 70a are scrolled in the vertical direction, and finally the lost effect symbol or the jackpot effect symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Then, the lost effect design or the jackpot effect design stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area is either until the variable display is next started, until the customer waiting effect is executed, or until the jackpot game is executed. Is maintained in the state of being stopped and displayed, and when the customer waiting effect is executed or when the big hit game is executed, it is not displayed in the effect symbol display area. The initial effect design may have the same aspect as the lost effect design.

  Further, in the image display device, when the power is turned on (RAM clear), one predetermined special symbol (initial special symbol in the same manner as the lost special symbol) is displayed in the special symbol display areas DZ1 and DZ2. The variable display of the special symbol is performed so as to synchronize (synchronize) with the variable display of the special symbol. Specifically, the display mode of one special symbol is changed, and finally the lost special symbol or the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Then, the lost special symbol or the jackpot special symbol stopped and displayed in the special symbol display area is until the variable display is next started, the customer waiting effect is executed, or the jackpot game is executed. Is maintained in the state of being stopped and displayed, and when the customer waiting effect is executed or when the big hit game is executed, it is not displayed in the special symbol display area.

  As explained above, the size of the area of the fourth symbol display area arranged inside the game area 5a is smaller than that of the special symbol display area (the special symbol second indicator than the special symbol first indicator). Since the number of LEDs is smaller, the area inside the game area 5a is not extremely narrowed. In addition, the size of the special symbol display area is larger than the fourth symbol display area (the number of LEDs of the special symbol first indicator is larger than that of the special symbol second indicator), so to the player On the other hand, it becomes easier to accurately inform the result of the game.

  Next, a specific example of the display result that is stopped and displayed on each display as a result of the variable display will be described.

On the special symbol first display devices 60, 61, one of the display result showing one kind of lost special symbol and the display result showing 22 kinds of jackpot special symbol is derived and displayed.
Specifically, in the display result showing the lost special symbol, one LED at the right end is lit up and the remaining LEDs are extinguished as in the case of power-on (RAM clear). That is, the display result showing the lost special symbol on the first special symbol first display 60 and the display result showing the lost special symbol on the second special symbol first display 61 are the same display result.
On the other hand, in the display result showing the jackpot special symbol, the two to five LEDs are turned on and the remaining LEDs are turned off.

  As a result of the special symbol determination, it is different from the jackpot game (the special winning opening 50 is opened for a predetermined time or intermittently, but the degree of advantage to the player is lower than that of the jackpot game, and the game state is changed. (Do not let) When the small hit game can be executed, in the display result showing the small hit special symbol on the special symbol first display 60, 61, the display result showing the lost special symbol or the display result showing the big hit special symbol It is better to have a display result different from. Also, if the small hit game is one type, the display result showing the small hit special symbol will also be one type, but if there are multiple types of small hit games, the display result showing the small hit special symbol will also be small. It is advisable to make a plurality of types corresponding to the types of games.

On the special symbol second display devices 80, 81, one of the display result showing one kind of lost fourth symbol and the display result showing one kind of jackpot fourth symbol is derived and displayed.
Specifically, in the display result showing the lost fourth symbol, one LED is turned off as in the case of power-on (RAM clear).
On the other hand, in the display result showing the big hit fourth symbol, one LED is turned on.

  In addition, when the above-mentioned small hit game can be executed, in the display result showing the small hit fourth symbol on the special symbol second display 80, 81, the display result showing the lost fourth symbol or the big hit fourth It is preferable that the display result is different from the display result showing the symbol. Also, if the small hit game is one type, the display result showing the small hit fourth symbol will also be one kind, but if there are a plurality of small hit games, the display result showing the small hit fourth symbol also It is advisable to make a plurality of types corresponding to the types of small games.

In the effect symbol display area of the image display devices 70 and 71, one of the display results showing the 23 or more types of lost effect symbols and the display result showing the 10 types of jackpot effect symbols is derived and displayed.
Specifically, in the display result showing the lost effect symbols, the combination of the three effect symbols that are not the same and have no regularity (variation) is stopped.
On the other hand, in the display result showing the jackpot effect design, the combination of the three effect symbols (nine kinds of 111 to 999) or the combination of the three effect symbols having regularity (753) is in a stopped state.

  In addition, when the above-mentioned small hit game can be executed, in the display result showing the small hit effect design on the image display devices 70, 71, the display result showing the lost effect design and the display result showing the big hit effect design. May have different display results, but may have the same display result as the display result showing a predetermined jackpot effect design. Further, when the small hit game is one type, the display result showing the small hit production pattern is also one kind, but when there are a plurality of small hit games, the display result showing the small hit production pattern is also small. It is advisable to make a plurality of types corresponding to the types of games.

In the special symbol display area of the image display devices 70, 71, one of a display result showing one kind of lost special symbol and a display result showing one kind of jackpot special symbol is derived and displayed.
Specifically, in the display result showing the lost special symbol, the "x" symbol is in a stopped state as in the case of turning on the power (RAM clear).
On the other hand, in the display result showing the jackpot special symbol, the “◯” symbol is in a stopped state.
In addition, when the above-mentioned small hit game can be executed, in the display result showing the small hit special symbol in the special symbol display area of the image display device 70, 71, the display result showing the lost special symbol or the big hit special symbol It is preferable that the display result is different from the display result indicating. Also, if the small hit game is one type, the display result showing the small hit special symbol will also be one type, but if there are multiple types of the small hit game, the display result showing the small hit special symbol will also be small. It is advisable to make a plurality of types corresponding to the types of games.

  As described above, while there are multiple types of display results showing the jackpot special symbol, there is only one type of display result showing the lost special symbol, so if you only remember the display result showing the lost special symbol, you can hit the jackpot. It is possible to easily determine whether or not there is a loss. It should be noted that if the display result showing the lost special symbol is smaller than the type of the display result showing the big hit special symbol, the display result showing the lost special symbol may be two or more types.

  Further, in the display result showing the lost special symbol, only one LED is turned on, whereas in the display result showing the jackpot special symbol, since two or more LEDs are turned on, it is easy to determine whether it is a jackpot or a loss. It becomes possible to do.

  Further, since there are a plurality of types of display results (LED lighting mode) for each jackpot special symbol, it is difficult to instantly determine which kind of jackpot game is to be executed, and which kind of jackpot game is to be executed. It is possible to improve the player's expectation for.

  Further, when the display result showing the lost special symbol is derived and displayed, the LED different from the LED that is turned on at the start of the variation is lit, so that the variation display of the special symbol is performed even when the variation time is extremely short. It becomes possible to recognize what was broken.

  Further, when the display result showing the jackpot special symbol is derived and displayed, at least one LED different from the LED that lights at the start of variation lights up, so even if the variation time is extremely short, the special symbol It is possible to recognize that the variable display has been performed.

  Moreover, since there are fewer types of display results showing the big hit 4th symbol and display results showing the big hit special symbol than the types of display results showing the big hit special symbol, by confirming the 4th symbol and the special symbol, It is possible to instantly judge whether it is a big hit or a loss. It should be noted that the types of display results showing the jackpot special symbol may be smaller than the types of display results showing the jackpot fourth symbol and the display results showing the jackpot special symbol.

  In addition, since there are fewer types of display results showing big hit special symbols than types of display results showing big jackpot special symbols, there are fewer types of display results showing big hit special symbols, so check the production symbols. It makes it easier to predict the type of jackpot game. Note that the types of display results showing the jackpot special symbols may be smaller than the types of display results showing the jackpot effect symbols.

  In addition, since the size of the display result showing the lost special symbol and the size of the display result showing the lost fourth symbol are the same or similar (both are displayed by one LED), it becomes easy to understand the correspondence between the two. , It becomes easier to recognize that it is a loss.

  Further, since the display result showing the jackpot special symbol includes the one that turns on the LED that is turned on in the display result showing the losing special symbol, it shows the losing special result when the display result showing the jackpot special symbol is derived. It is possible to reduce the bad impression of the display result.

  In addition, regardless of which kind of jackpot game is played, the display result showing the jackpot special symbol includes the one that turns on the LED that lights up in the display result showing the lose symbol special symbol. It is possible to further reduce the bad impression of the display result indicating.

  Also, during the variable display on the special symbol first display 60, 61, there is no state in which all the LEDs are off or a plurality of LEDs are lit, and one LED is always lit. Therefore, it becomes easy to understand that the variable display is being performed.

  Further, during the variable display on the special symbol first display device 60, 61, except for the display result showing the lost special symbol, a plurality of special symbols (from the left side 1 to 5 from the left are not finally stopped and displayed. The second LED is turned on (displayed), so that it is easy to understand that the variable display is being performed.

(Display Examples of First Game Information Display Device, Second Game Information Display Device, and First Image Display Device)
69 to 74 are diagrams showing display examples of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. Specifically, FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a display example during the reach effect (SP reach effect) being performed in the non-time saving game state, and FIG. 70 is the reach effect ((reach effect being performed in the time saving game state. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a display example during (SP reach effect), FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a display example during blackout effect, movement effect by the movable effect member, and FIGS. 72 to 73 are during jackpot game. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a display example, and FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a display example at the time of occurrence of power interruption.

First, FIG. 69 will be described.
FIGS. 69 (a), (b), and (c) are scenes (e1), (e5), and (e6) of the example of the effect by the music notice pattern 8 of FIG. In FIG. 55 (e), the hold icons (first hold icons H11 to H14, second hold icons H21 to H24), the variable icon TH, the hold number display (first hold number display, second hold number display) ), The special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) was omitted and explained, but it will be explained in detail here.

FIG. 69 (a) is a main indication effect (pre-reach effect). Here, in the first game information display device 59, the first special symbol first display 60 performs a variable display of the first special symbol that turns on the LEDs in a predetermined order, and the first special symbol reservation first display 63. Indicates that two LEDs are lit and that two first reservations are stored.
Further, the second special symbol first indicator 61 and the normal symbol first indicator 62 turn on a predetermined LED, indicating that the second special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped, and the second special symbol hold first The display 64 and the normal symbol holding first display 65 turn off all the LEDs, indicating that the holding (the second holding, the ordinary drawing holding) is not stored.

In the second game information display device 79, the first special symbol second display 80 corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol, performs a variable display in which the LED blinks at a predetermined interval, and holds the first special symbol. The 2 indicator 83 lights two LEDs to indicate that two first reservations are stored.
Further, the second special symbol second indicator 81 and the normal symbol second indicator 82 turn off the LED, indicating that the second special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped, and the second special symbol reservation second indicator. 84 and the normal symbol reservation second display 85 turn off any of the LEDs, indicating that the reservation (second reservation, general figure reservation) is not stored.

In the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the normal display mode of the hold icon H11 is displayed on the first display section 70B1 of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, and the second display section of the special display mode 3 is displayed. The (red) hold icon H12 is displayed, the change icon TH is displayed in the change icon display area 70D, and "2" indicating the first hold number is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1. . Also, in the first special symbol display area DZ1, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol.
Further, since the second hold is not stored, the hold icon is not displayed in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and “0” is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2. Also, since the second special symbol has not changed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display area DZ2.

  Then, FIG. 69 (b) is a reach effect (SP reach effect) after the development effect is performed. The change of the first special symbol is continued, and a new hold (first hold, second hold, public figure hold) has not occurred, so the first game information display device 59 and the second game information display device. In 79, the same display as in FIG. 69A is continuously displayed.

On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, display of the hold icons in the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 and the change icon TH in the change icon display area 70D. Is erased, and the effect design 70a is displayed in a small size at the upper left so as not to interfere with the reach effect (SP reach effect).
In addition, the number of holding display areas (first holding number display area SH1, second holding number display area SH2) holding numbers (first holding number, second holding number) and special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1) The special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the second special symbol display area DZ2) are continuously displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 69 (a).

Then, FIG. 69 (c) is an effect in which the reach effect (SP reach effect) is finished and the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. Here, in the first game information display device 59, the first special symbol first display 60 displays the LED in a lighting mode indicating a loss (for example, only the rightmost LED is lit), and the stop display of the first special symbol is displayed. Is going.
In addition, because new hold (1st hold, 2nd hold, universal figure hold) has not occurred, the first special symbol hold 1st display 63, the 2nd special symbol 1st display 61, the 2nd special symbol hold The first display 64, the normal design first display 62, and the normal design reservation first display 65 continue to display the same display as in FIGS. 69 (a) and (b).

In the second game information display device 79, the first special symbol second display 80 turns off the LED in response to the stop display of the first special symbol, indicating that the variation of the first special symbol is a loss. There is.
In addition, because the new hold (1st hold, 2nd hold, universal figure hold) has not occurred, the first special symbol hold second indicator 83, the second special symbol second indicator 81, the second special symbol hold The second display 84, the normal symbol second display 82 and the normal symbol holding second display 85 continue to display the same display as in FIGS. 69 (a) and (b).

On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the fluctuations that have not been displayed during the reach effect (SP reach effect). The display of the icon display area 70D is displayed again, the hold icon H11 is displayed on the first display portion 70B1 of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, and the hold icon H12 is displayed on the second display portion. Further, the variation icon displayed in the variation icon display area 70D disappears after the variation ends. Further, "2" indicating the first number of reservations is displayed in the first number of reservations display area SH1. Moreover, the stop display of the effect symbol 70a and the first special symbol display area DZ1 is performed in a manner showing a gap corresponding to the stop display of the first special symbol.
Since the second hold is not stored, the hold icon is not displayed in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and “0” is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2. Also, since the second special symbol has not changed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display area DZ2.

As described above, in the variable effect (other than the reach effect (SP reach effect)) performed in the non-time saving game state, the variable display of the special symbol is the special symbol first display 60 of the first game information display device 59. , 61, the special symbol second display 80, 81 of the second game information display device 79, the effect symbol 70a of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1 , And the second special symbol display area DZ2), it is easy to understand the variable display of the special symbol.
Further, the display of the number of holdings (the first number of holdings, the second number of holdings) is the special symbol holding first display 63, 64 of the first game information display device 59 and the special symbol holding number of the second game information display device 79 2 display devices 83 and 84, a hold icon display area (first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and a hold number display area ( Since it is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2), the hold numbers (first hold number, second hold number) can be easily grasped.

  On the other hand, during the reach effect (SP reach effect), in order to focus the reach effect (SP reach effect), the hold icon display area (first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. , The display of the hold icon in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4) is erased, but the display of the hold number (first hold number, second hold number) is the special symbol hold of the first game information display device 59. First display 63, 64, special symbol reservation second display 83, 84 of the second game information display device 79, reservation number display area of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 (first reservation number display Since the display is made in the area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2), the hold number (first hold number, second hold number) can be grasped.

  In addition, during a specific reach effect (SP reach effect) that is executed during the normal gaming state, an effect pattern displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 so as not to interfere with the reach effect (SP reach effect). Although 70a is reduced and displayed, the special symbol displayed on the special symbol first display device 60, 61, the fourth symbol displayed on the special symbol second display device 80, 81, and the special symbol display area DZ1, Since the size of the special symbol displayed on the DZ2 is maintained without being displayed in a reduced size, it is possible to confirm whether or not the variable display is performed by checking each display even if the production symbol 70a is lost. Is possible.

  In the first special symbol hold second display 83 and the second special symbol hold second display 84, since the hold change notice for changing the display mode is not executed, the display showing the number of holds is always normal. It will be displayed in the display mode. Therefore, it becomes easier to understand the number of holds itself than the hold icon for executing the hold change notice.

  Further, in the first special symbol hold first display 63 and the second special symbol hold first display 64, since the hold change notice for changing the display mode is not executed, the display showing the number of holds is always normal. It will be displayed in the display mode. Therefore, it becomes easier to understand the number of holds itself than the hold icon for executing the hold change notice.

  Further, in the first number-of-holds display area SH1 and the second number-of-holds display area SH2, since the hold change notice for changing the display mode is not executed, the display indicating the number of hold is always displayed in the normal display mode. It will be. Therefore, it becomes easier to understand the number of holds itself than the hold icon for executing the hold change notice.

  In addition, in the icon display area including the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the variable icon display area 70D, the first hold icon corresponding to the start of the variable display. When the number or the second hold number decreases, the first hold icon or the second hold icon moves (shifts) to the variable icon display area 70D to display the variable hold icon as the variable icon (the hold number decreases. The specific holding that indicates that the first holding number display area SH1 and the second holding number display area SH2 are formed in the holding number display area corresponding to the start of the variable display. When the number or the second hold number decreases, the number is simply subtracted without performing the hold reduction effect as described above. Therefore, it becomes easy to grasp the pure reserved number itself by checking the reserved number display area. In addition, displaying as the icon may be included in the specific effect.

In addition, even during the reach effect (SP reach effect), the hold number (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 (first hold number display area SH2). Although the display of the 1-hold number and the 2nd-hold number was displayed without being erased, the hold number (first-hold number) of the hold-number display area (first-hold number display area SH1, second-hold number display area SH2) Number, second hold number) may also be erased. Further, similarly in the SP reach effect of FIG. 70 (b), the blackout effect of FIG. 71 (a), the movement effect of FIG. The display of the number of holdings (first holding number, second holding number) in the second holding number display area SH2) may be deleted.
In this way, the hold icon display area (first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 during the specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, blackout effect, movement effect). , The second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4), and the hold numbers (first hold number, second hold) of the hold icons and the hold number display areas (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2). Even if the display of (number) is erased, the display of the number of holdings (the first number of holdings, the second number of holdings) is held in the special symbol holding second display 83, 84 of the second game information display device 79 ( Since the first hold number and the second hold number are displayed, the hold number (first hold number, second hold number) can be grasped.

Next, FIG. 70 will be described.
FIG. 70 is a display example of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 during the reach effect (SP reach effect) performed in the time saving game state. is there.

FIG. 70 (a) is a variation effect before the reach effect (SP reach effect) in the time saving game state. Here, in the first game information display device 59, the second special symbol first display 61 performs a variable display of the second special symbol that causes the LEDs to blink in a predetermined order, and the second special symbol reservation first display 64. Indicates that two LEDs are turned on, and two second holds are stored. Moreover, the normal symbol first display 62 is performing a variable display of the normal symbol in which the LEDs are blinked in a predetermined order. Further, since the right-handed first display 67 is in the time saving game, the LED is turned on and the right-handed display is performed.
The first special symbol first indicator 60 predetermined LED is turned on, showing that the first special symbol is stopped, the first special symbol reservation first indicator 63 and the normal symbol reservation first indicator 65 Indicates that none of the LEDs is turned off, and the hold (first hold, universal figure hold) is not stored.

In the second game information display device 79, the second special symbol second display 81 performs a variable display in which the LED blinks at predetermined intervals corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol hold second The display 84 lights two LEDs to indicate that two second holds are stored. In addition, the normal symbol second display 82, corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol, performs the variable display of the normal symbol in which the LEDs are blinked in a predetermined order. Further, since the right-handed second display 87 is in the time saving game, the LED is turned on and the right-handed display is performed.
The first special symbol second display 80 turns off the LED, indicating that the first special symbol is stopped, the first special symbol holding second display 83 and the normal symbol holding second display 85 All the LEDs are turned off, indicating that the hold (second hold, universal figure hold) is not stored.

In the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the effect symbol 70a and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display area DZ2 are variably displayed corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. Further, the hold icons H21 and H22 are displayed on the first display portion 70C1 and the second display portion 70C2 of the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the change icon is displayed on the change icon display area 70D. In the 2 hold number display area SH2, "2" indicating the second hold number is displayed. Further, since the time saving game is being performed, the image G10 "right hitting →→" is displayed on the upper right of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70.
Since the first hold is not stored, the hold icon is not displayed in the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, and “0” is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1. Moreover, since the first special symbol does not change, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display area DZ1 is stopped and displayed. Further, on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, character information G11 (“MM RUSH”) indicating that it is in the second specific game state (“high probability game state” and “time saving game state”) is displayed. ing.

And FIG.70 (b) is reach production (SP reach production). Here, in the first game information display device 59, since the second special symbol is being continuously changed, the second special symbol first display 61 is performing the variable display as in FIG. 70 (a). . Then, the second hold newly occurred one, and the second hold number became three, so the second special symbol hold first display 64 blinks the left LED and lights the right LED, This shows that three second reservations are stored. In addition, two new universal figure reservations have occurred, and the number of universal figure reservations has become two, so the normal symbol reservation first indicator 65 lights two LEDs, and two general figure reservations are stored. It indicates that
Since the first hold has not occurred newly, the first special symbol hold first display 63 remains off.

In the second game information display device 79, the second special symbol second display 81 performs variable display corresponding to the second special symbol as in FIG. 70 (a). Then, the second hold newly occurred one, and the second hold number became three, so the second special symbol hold second display 84 blinks the left LED and lights the right LED, This shows that three second reservations are stored. In addition, two new universal figure reservations have occurred, and the number of universal figure reservations has become two, so the normal symbol reservation second indicator 85 lights two LEDs, and two general figure reservations are stored. It indicates that
Since the first hold has not newly occurred, the first special symbol hold second display 83 remains off.

  On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the reach effect (SP reach effect) using the character image is performed. Further, the display of the hold icons in the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, the change icon TH in the change icon display area 70D is deleted, and the effect design 70a is displayed in a small size in the upper left. Then, the reach effect (SP reach effect) is not hindered. Further, the number of holdings display area (first holding number display area SH1, second holding number display area SH2) holding number (first holding number, second holding number) and special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1) The special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the second special symbol display area DZ2) are continuously displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 70 (a). Further, on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, character information G12 (“SP reach”) indicating that the reach effect (SP reach effect) is being displayed.

Then, FIG. 70 (c) is an effect in which the reach effect (SP reach effect) ends and the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. Here, in the first game information display device 59, the second special symbol first display 61 displays the LED in a lighting mode indicating a loss (for example, only the rightmost LED is lit), and a stop display of the second special symbol. Is going.
In addition, because new hold (1st hold, 2nd hold, universal figure hold) has not occurred, the 1st special symbol 1st indicator 60, the 1st special symbol hold 1st indicator 63, the 2nd special symbol hold The first display unit 64 and the normal symbol holding first display unit 65 perform the same display as in FIG. 70 (b). Also, the right-handed first display 67 remains lit.

In the second game information display device 79, the second special symbol second display 81 turns off the LED corresponding to the stop display of the second special symbol, indicating that the variation of the second special symbol is a loss. There is.
In addition, because the new hold (1st hold, 2nd hold, universal figure hold) has not occurred, the first special symbol second display 80, the first special symbol hold second display 83, the second special symbol hold The second display 84 and the normal symbol holding second display 85 perform the same display as in FIG. 70 (b). Further, the right-handed second display 87 is still lit.

On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the effect symbol 70a and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display area DZ2 are stopped and displayed in a manner showing a gap in correspondence with the stop display of the second special symbol. ing. In addition, the display of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the variable icon display area 70D that were not displayed during the reach effect (SP reach effect) is displayed again, and In the 2 hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, the hold icon H21 is displayed on the first display portion 70C1, the hold icon H22 is displayed on the second display portion 70C2, and the hold icon H23 is displayed on the third display portion 70C3. ing. Further, the variation icon displayed in the variation icon display area 70D disappears after the variation ends. Further, in the second hold number display area SH2, "3" indicating the second hold number is displayed.
Since the first hold is not stored, the hold icon is not displayed in the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, and “0” is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1. Further, since the first special symbol has not changed, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display area DZ1 is stopped and displayed. Further, on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, character information (“sorry”) indicating that the image is lost is displayed.

As described above, in the variable effect (other than the reach effect (SP reach effect)) performed in the time saving game state, the variable display of the special symbol is the special symbol first display 60 of the first game information display device 59, 61, the special symbol second display 80, 81 of the second game information display device 79, the effect symbol 70a of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1, Since it is displayed in the second special symbol display area DZ2), the variable display of the special symbol can be easily grasped.
Further, the display of the number of holdings (the first number of holdings, the second number of holdings) is the special symbol holding first display 63, 64 of the first game information display device 59, and the special symbol holding first of the second game information display device 79. 2 display devices 83 and 84, a hold icon display area (first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and a hold number display area ( Since it is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2), the hold numbers (first hold number, second hold number) can be easily grasped.
Further, the right-handed display is a right-handed first display 67 of the first game information display device 59, a right-handed second display 87 of the second game information display device 79, and a first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. The image G10 “right-handed →→” is displayed, so that the right-handed display is easy to understand.

  On the other hand, during the reach effect (SP reach effect), the hold icon display area (first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is held. Although the display of the icon is erased, the display of the number of holdings (the first number of holdings, the second number of holdings) is the special symbol holding first display 63, 64 of the first game information display device 59, and the second game information. With the special symbol holding second display 83, 84 of the display device 79 and the holding number display area (first holding number display area SH1, second holding number display area SH2) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 Since it is displayed, the number of reservations (first number of reservations, second number of reservations) can be grasped.

  Further, during a specific reach effect (SP reach effect) executed during the time saving game state, an effect pattern displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 so as not to interfere with the reach effect (SP reach effect). Although 70a is displayed in a reduced size, the special symbol displayed on the special symbol first display 60, 61, the fourth symbol displayed on the special symbol second display 80, 81 and the special symbol display area DZ1, DZ2 Since the size of the special symbol to be displayed is maintained without being reduced, it is possible to confirm whether or not the variable display is performed by checking each display even if the visual effect 70a is lost. Becomes

  In addition, the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the hold icons in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the change icon TH in the change icon display area 70D. As the effect of deleting the display, the SP reach effect has been described as an example as shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, but the effect is not limited to the SP reach effect.

  For example, the display of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 suddenly goes dark during a change effect as shown in FIG. Or during a production that develops into a reach production (so-called blackout production), the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 and the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. The hold icon and the display of the variable icon TH in the variable icon display area 70D are erased, and the display of the number of holdings (first holding number, second holding number) is the special symbol holding number of the first game information display device 59. 1 display 63, 64, the special symbol reservation second display 83, 84 of the second game information display device 79, the reservation number display area of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 (first reservation number display Frequency SH1, to be displayed out with the second number of holding display region SH2).

  By doing so, it is possible to prevent the blackout effect from being hindered and to let the player know the number of holdings (first holding number, second holding number).

  Further, when the moving effect using the movable effect member 73 is performed during the variable effect, the first hold on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is performed when the movable effect member 73 is moved as shown in FIG. 71 (b). The display of the hold icons in the icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 and the change icon TH in the change icon display area 70D is erased, and the hold number (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed. ) Is a special symbol reservation first display 63, 64 of the first game information display device 59, a special symbol reservation second display 83, 84 of the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device ( The main liquid crystal 70 is displayed in the reserved number display area (first reserved number display area SH1, second reserved number display area SH2).

  By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp the number of holdings (the first number of holdings, the second number of holdings) while preventing the movement effect from being hindered.

  Also, although not shown, in the SPSP reach effect, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is also used as in the case of FIG. 69 (b), FIG. 1 The hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the hold icons in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 and the display of the change icon TH in the change icon display area 70D are erased, and the hold number (first hold number, second The display of the number of reservations) is the special symbol reservation first display 63, 64 of the first game information display device 59, the special symbol reservation second display 83, 84 of the second game information display device 79, and the first image display. The device (main liquid crystal) 70 is displayed in the reserved number display area (first reserved number display area SH1, second reserved number display area SH2).

  By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp the number of holdings (first holding number, second holding number) while preventing the SPSP reach effect from being hindered.

Next, FIGS. 72 to 73 will be described.
72 to 73 are display examples of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 during the jackpot game.

FIG. 72 (a) is the first round game effect of the big hit game. Here, in the first game information display device 59, the first special symbol first indicator 60 is an LED in a stop mode (for example, only the second LED from the left is lit) showing a probability variation jackpot 2 (special symbol “B”). Is turned on, the stop display of the first special symbol is performed, and the number-of-rounds indicator 66 turns on the LED in a mode showing the number of rounds (8 rounds) of a probability variation big hit (for example, only the fourth LED from the left is turned on). , Indicates that the number of rounds of the big hit game this time is eight, and the first special symbol reservation first indicator 63 blinks two LEDs, indicating that four first reservations are stored. . Further, since the right-handed first display 67 is in the big hit game, the LED is turned on and the right-handed display is performed.
The second special symbol first indicator 61 and the normal symbol first indicator 62 turn on a predetermined LED, indicating that the second special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped. Further, the second special symbol hold first display 64 and the normal symbol hold first display 65 turn off any LED, indicating that the hold (second hold, general figure hold) is not stored.

In the second game information display device 79, the first special symbol second indicator 80 lights and displays the LED, and performs a stop display indicating that it is a big hit, and the first special symbol reservation second indicator 83 has two LEDs. One blinks to indicate that four first reservations are stored. In addition, the right-handed second display 87 turns on the LED to perform right-handed display.
The second special symbol second display 81 and the normal symbol second display 82 turn on a predetermined LED, indicating that the second special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped. Further, the second special symbol hold second display 84 and the normal symbol hold second display 85 turn off all the LEDs, indicating that the hold (second hold, normal figure hold) is not stored.

In the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the first round game effect of the big hit game is performed, and the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 and the second hold that have been displayed before the big hit game is started. The hold icons in the icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 and the display of the variable icon in the variable icon display area 70D are deleted. Further, “4” indicating the first number of reservations is displayed in the first number of reservations display area SH1. Further, in the first special symbol display area DZ1, a stop display showing a big hit of the first special symbol is performed corresponding to the stop display of the first special symbol. Further, since the jackpot game is being played, the image G10 "right hitting →→" is displayed on the upper right of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70.
Since the second hold is not stored, "0" is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2 and the second special symbol does not change, so the second special symbol display area DZ2 is stopped and displayed. ing. Further, on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, character information G13 (“round 1”) indicating the number of round games currently being played is displayed.

And FIG.72 (b) is promotion production performed from the 1st opening of the big winning opening 50 of the 5th round game to the 4th closing. Here, in the first game information display device 59, since the universal figure hold newly occurs, the normal symbol hold first display 65 blinks four LEDs, and four ordinary figure hold is stored. Shown, the normal symbol first display 62 is performing a variable display of the normal symbol to blink the LED in a predetermined order. The display other than the normal symbol first display 62 and the normal symbol holding first display 65 continues to display the same display as in FIG. 72 (a).
Further, in the second game information display device 79, the normal symbol reservation second display 85 blinks four LEDs, indicating that four ordinary figure reservations are stored, and the normal symbol second display 82 is predetermined. The variable display of the normal symbols is made to blink the LED in the order of. The display other than the normal symbol second display 82 and the normal symbol holding second display 85 continues to display the same display as in FIG. 72 (a).

On the other hand, on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, an effect using a character image corresponding to the promotion effect is displayed. Here, the display of the image G10 “right hit →→” which has been displayed before the promotion effect is erased is deleted.
In addition, the number of holding display areas (first holding number display area SH1, second holding number display area SH2) holding numbers (first holding number, second holding number) and special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1) , The second special symbol display area DZ2) special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are continuously displayed. In the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, the character information indicating the number of round games is erased (not displayed).

  And FIG.72 (c) is the movement production of the movable production member 73 during promotion production. Here, in the first game information display device 59 and the second game information display device 79, the same display as in FIG. 72B is continuously displayed.

  In the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the effect image G15 is displayed according to the movable effect member 73 moving to the front surface of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. Further, as in FIG. 72 (b), the image G10 “right hit →→” display remains erased, and the special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1, second special symbol display area DZ2) is a special symbol. The (first special symbol, second special symbol) is continuously displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 72 (b). On the other hand, the display position of the display of the number of holdings (first holding number, second holding number) in the holding number display area (first holding number display area SH1, second holding number display area SH2) is changed, as shown in FIG. ), The special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1, second special symbol display area DZ2) is displayed below.

  In this way, depending on the effect performed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the number of holdings (the first holding number, the holding number display area SH1, the second holding number display area SH2) of the holding number display area (first holding number, By changing the display position of the (second hold number), the effect displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the display of the hold numbers (first hold number, second hold number) are mutually displayed ( It prevents the production) from being hindered.

  And FIG. 73 (a) is an effect that is performed from the fifth opening of the special winning opening 50 of the fifth round game after the promotion effect. Here, in the first game information display device 59 and the second game information display device 79, the same display as in FIG. 72 (c) is performed.

On the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, an effect is displayed using the character image to notify (notify) that the jackpot game will be continued after the fifth round game. Further, the display of the image G10 “right-handed →→” which was not displayed during the promotion effect is displayed again.
In addition, the number of holding display areas (first holding number display area SH1, second holding number display area SH2) holding numbers (first holding number, second holding number) and special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1) , The second special symbol display area DZ2) special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are continuously displayed. Further, on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, character information G13 (round 5) indicating the number of round games that have been erased (not displayed) is displayed.

  And FIG.73 (b) is an ending production of a jackpot game. Here, in the first game information display device 59 and the second game information display device 79, the same display as in FIG. 73 (a) is performed.

  On the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, an effect using a character image corresponding to the ending effect is displayed. Further, the number of holdings display area (first holding number display area SH1, second holding number display area SH2) holding number (first holding number, second holding number), special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1) , The second special symbol display area DZ2) special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the image G10 "Right → →" display is the same display as in FIG. 73 (a) is continuously displayed. There is. Further, on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, character information G13 (“BONUS end”) indicating that the jackpot game has ended is displayed.

  Then, FIG. 73 (c) is an effect showing that the jackpot game is over and the game is shifted to a time saving game. Here, the round number display 66 of the first game information display device 59 ends (turns off) the display of the number of rounds when the jackpot is over. In the first game information display device 59, the same display as in FIG. 73 (b) is displayed except for the round number display 66. The second game information display device 79 also displays the same display as in FIG. 73 (b).

On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the variable icon display area 70D that were not displayed during the big hit game are displayed. The display is displayed again, and the hold icons H11 to H14 are displayed on the first display portion 70B1, the second display portion 70B2, the third display portion 70B3, and the fourth display portion 70B4 of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4. There is. Further, “4” indicating the first number of reservations is displayed in the first number of reservations display area SH1.
Since the second hold is not stored, the hold icon is not displayed in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and “0” is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2. Further, in the special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1, second special symbol display area DZ2), since the first special symbol and the second special symbol have not changed, stop display is performed. Further, on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, character information G11 (“MM RUSH”) indicating that it is in the second specific game state (“high probability game state” and “time saving game state”) is displayed. It

As described above, during the big hit game, the hold icon in the hold icon display area (the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4) in order to pay attention to the big hit game effect, the variation. Although the display of the variable icon TH in the icon display area 70D is erased, the display of the number of holdings (first holding number, second holding number) is the special symbol holding first display 63 of the first game information display device 59. , 64, the special symbol holding second display 83, 84 of the second game information display device 79, and the holding number display area (first holding number display area SH1, second) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. Since it is displayed in the hold number display area SH2), it is possible to grasp the hold number (first hold number, second hold number).
Further, the right-handed display is a right-handed first display 67 of the first game information display device 59, a right-handed second display 87 of the second game information display device 79, and a first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. Since the image G10 is displayed as “right-handed →→” display, the right-handed display is easy to understand.

  Further, even during the jackpot game, during the promotion production, the image G10 "right hitting →→" display of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is deleted, but the right hitting display is the first game information display. Since the right-handed first display 67 of the device 59 and the right-handed second display 87 of the second game information display device 79 are displayed, the right-handed display (right-handed) can be grasped.

  Further, in the right-handed display, the LED of the first right-handed indicator 67, which is not marked, is lit, and the LED of the second right-handed indicator 87, which is marked as “right-handed”, is lit. The image G10 of the image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is displayed as "right-handed →→". In other words, the right-handed second display device 87 is more easily recognized by the right-handed second display device 87 than the right-handed first display device 67, and the right-handed second display device 87 is also displayed. Also, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is displayed in a display mode that is easier for the player to recognize. Further, the right-handed second display device 87 is provided closer to the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 than the right-handed first display device 67, and the right-handed second display device 87 is also a right-handed player. The right-handed second indicator 87 is easier for the player to recognize than the first indicator 67.

Next, FIG. 74 will be described.
FIG. 74 is a display example of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 when power failure occurs.

FIG. 74 (a) is a variation effect before the reach effect in the normal game state. Here, in the first game information display device 59, the first special symbol first display device 60 performs a variable display of the first special symbol blinking the LEDs in a predetermined order, and the first special symbol reservation first display device 63. Indicates that four LEDs are blinking, and four first reservations are stored.
The second special symbol first indicator 61 and the normal symbol first indicator 62 turn on a predetermined LED, indicating that the second special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped. Further, the second special symbol hold first display 64 and the normal symbol hold first display 65 turn off any LED, indicating that the hold (second hold, general figure hold) is not stored.

In the second game information display device 79, the first special symbol second display 80 corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol, performs a variable display in which the LED blinks at a predetermined interval, and holds the first special symbol. The 2 indicator 83 blinks four LEDs, indicating that four first reservations are stored.
The second special symbol second indicator 81 and the normal symbol second indicator 82 turn off the LED, indicating that the second special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped. Further, the second special symbol hold second display 84 and the normal symbol hold second display 85 turn off all the LEDs, indicating that the hold (second hold, normal figure hold) is not stored.

In the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the effect symbol 70a and the first special symbol in the first special symbol display area DZ1 are variably displayed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, the hold icons H11 to H14 are displayed on the first display portion 70B1, the second display portion 70B2, the third display portion 70B3, and the fourth display portion 70B4 of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, and the variable icon display is performed. The variation icon TH is displayed in the area 70D. Further, “4” indicating the first number of reservations is displayed in the first number of reservations display area SH1.
Since the second hold is not stored, the hold icon is not displayed in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and “0” is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2. Also, since the second special symbol has not changed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display area DZ2.

  Then, the power is cut off and the supply of the power supply voltage is cut off, so that there is nothing in any of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. It is not displayed (FIG. 74 (b)).

  Then, when the power is restored, as shown in FIG. 74 (c), the first game information display device 59 and the second game information display device 79 are restored at substantially the same timing. Specifically, the first game information display device 59, which is controlled by the main CPU 110a, displays all based on the backup data (special symbol first indicator 60, 61, normal symbol first indicator 62, special symbol hold). 1st display 63, 64, normal symbol reservation 1st display 65, round number display 66, right hitting 1st display 67, high probability game state indicator 68, and time saving game state indicator 69) restoration However, the second game information display device 79 controlled by the sub CPU 130a is special on the basis of the special symbol reservation storage designation command (step S13) and the normal symbol storage designation command (step S14) transmitted from the main CPU 110a at the time of restoration. The display of the symbol holding second display devices 83, 84 and the normal symbol holding second display device 85 is restored. On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, when the image control unit 140 receives the power restoration designating command (step S7) transmitted from the main CPU 110a at the time of restoration, the fact that the power is restored is notified. Perform power restoration.

  Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time, the image control unit 140 displays the number of holdings on the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 based on the special symbol holding storage designation command (step S13) transmitted from the main CPU 110a at the time of restoration. The hold number display (first hold number display, second hold number display) in the areas (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) is restarted (restored) (FIG. 74 (d)).

  As described above, when the power failure occurs and is restored, the display of the number of holdings (first holding number, second holding number) is the special symbol first display device 60, 61 of the first game information display device 59. And, the special symbol second display 80, 81 of the second game information display device 79 is restored and displayed at substantially the same timing, and thereafter, the number-of-holds display area (first hold) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. The number-of-holds display (first number-of-holds display, second number-of-holds display) of the number display area SH1 and the second number-of-holds display area SH2 is restored and displayed. That is, when the power is restored, the number of holdings in the second game information display device 79 is more than the number of holdings (first holding number, second holding number) in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. The display of (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed (restored) first.

  Thus, by restoring the display of the number of holdings (the first number of holdings, the second number of holdings) on the second game information display device 79 prior to the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the first Even during the power restoration effect on the image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the number of holdings (first holding number, second holding number) is displayed on the second game information display device 79, so the holding number ( The player can recognize the first number of reservations and the second number of reservations.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display of the number of reserved special symbols is usually the special symbol reservation first display 63, 64 of the first game information display device 59, and the special symbol reservation second of the second game information display device 79. 2 display devices 83 and 84, a hold icon display area (first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and a hold number display area ( It is displayed at four places, the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2), but in a specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, blackout effect, movement effect) and big hit effect. If inside, the special symbol reservation first display 63, 64 of the first game information display device 59, the special symbol reservation second display 83, 84 of the second game information display device 79, the first image table Apparatus (main LCD) 70 number of holding the display area of the (first number of holding display region SH1, second number of holding display region SH2) is displayed in three places with. In addition, if after the restoration after the power interruption, the special symbol reservation first display 63, 64 of the first game information display device 59, and the special symbol reservation second display 83, 84 of the second game information display device 79. It is displayed in two places.
In other words, depending on the progress of the game, the display of the number of reserved special symbols may be displayed in two places, three places, and four places.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the reserved icon display areas 70B, 70C and the reserved icons displayed there are more than the LEDs of the special symbol reservation first indicators 63, 64 and the special symbol reservation second indicators 83, 84. Is large, and is displayed near the center of the gaming machine so that it can be easily seen by the player, but it is a special symbol than the hold icon display areas 70B and 70C and the hold icons displayed there. Even if it is easy for the player to visually recognize by enlarging the LEDs of the holding first display 63, 64 and the special symbol holding second display 83, 84, or by arranging them at a position closer to the center of the gaming machine. Good.

  68 to 74, the numbers of reserved display areas SH1 and SH2 and the arithmetic numerals displayed therein are larger than those of the reserved icon display areas 70B and 70C and the reserved icons displayed therein. Although it is easy to see, the hold icon display areas 70B and 70C and the hold icons displayed there are made larger than the hold number display areas SH1 and SH2 and the numerical figures displayed there. You may make it easy.

(Structures of the first game information display device 59 and the second game information display device 79)
FIG. 75 is a front view of the first game information display device 59. In the present embodiment, the first game information display device 59 is arranged at the lower left of the game area 5a adjacent to the outer rail 2410a, but the invention is not limited to this and may be arranged at various positions. it can.

  The first game information display device 59 mainly displays information relating to special symbol determination and normal symbol determination (in other words, information relating to profits given to the player in the game). More specifically, the first game information display device 59 includes first and second special symbol first indicators 60, 61, first and second special symbol reservation first indicators 63, 64, a round number indicator 66, It can be configured as a right hitting first display 67, a high-probability game state display 68, a time saving game state display 69, a normal symbol first indicator 62, and a normal symbol holding first indicator 65.

  In addition, the second game information display device 79 also displays information relating to profits to be given to the player in the game, and similarly, the first and second special symbol second display devices 80, 81, the second. 1, it can be configured as a second special symbol reservation second display 83, 84, a right-handed second display 87, a normal symbol second display 82, and a normal symbol reservation second display 85.

(Details of the structure of the first game information display device 59)
As shown in FIG. 75, the first game information display device 59 has a plurality of LEDs 4045 arranged in two rows. These LEDs 4045 are the first and second special symbol first indicators 60, 61, the first and second special symbol reservation first indicators 63, 64, the high probability game state indicator 68, the time saving game state indicator 69. , The right-handed first indicator 67, the number of rounds indicator 66, the normal symbol first indicator 62, and the normal symbol reservation first indicator 65 are configured. The LEDs 4045 are arranged in parallel in two rows along the launch ball guide path of the game ball formed by the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 (see FIG. 1). The arrangement of the LEDs 4045 is not limited to this, and the LEDs 4045 may be arranged in one row along the launch ball guide path of the game ball, or may be arranged in three or more rows. Alternatively, they may be arranged independently of the launch ball guide path.

  As shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, the first game information display device 59 includes a first display substrate 4200 on which a plurality of LEDs 4045 are surface-mounted, and a first cover that covers at least the front side of the first display substrate 4200. A member 4202 and a protective member 4204 that covers the rear side of the first display substrate 4200 are provided. That is, the first display substrate 4200 is housed by the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204. The first game information display device 59 is installed in a standing posture so that the first display substrate 4200 arranged between the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 is along the board surface of the game board 5. Then, the first game information display device 59 is configured by the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 so that it is difficult or inaccessible from the outside to the first display substrate 4200. The first game information display device 59 is attached to the plate member by fitting it into a mounting opening (not shown) formed in the plate member that constitutes the game plate 5, and the front side faces the front side of the game plate 5 to play the game. The light of the LED 4045 is visible to a person. Further, the first game information display device 59 has its rear surface facing the back side of the game board 5 (plate member), and the connector 4100 (FIG. 76) described later provided so as to face the back side of the game board 5 It is accessible from the back side. The first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 may be combined to form a cover member.

  The first game information display device 59 fixes the first cover member 4202 or the protection member 4204, which forms the outer shell of the first game information display device 59, by screwing, gluing, or any other method to the game board 5. It is attached. Here, the first game information display device 59 is difficult to remove from the game board 5 by adhesion or the like, is difficult to reassemble, or the first game information display device 59 and the game board 5 when removed from the game board 5. It may be attached with a structure in which a trace remains. In other words, the mounting structure of the first game information display device 59 and the game board 5 is a structure that is difficult to remove without destroying the game board 5 or the first game information display device 59, or the game board 5 or the 1 game information display device 59 is a structure that cannot be assembled as it is due to breakage or deformation, or the game board 5 or the first game information display device 59 is broken or deformed by removal, so that the game board 5 or the first game information display device 59 may have at least one structure in which a trace of removal remains.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the first display substrate 4200 is a printed circuit board provided with a plurality of LEDs 4045 on the front surface facing the player, and light can be emitted from each LED 4045 to the front side. ing. The LED 4045 is surface-mounted on the first display substrate 4200, not through-hole mounting for fixing the lead of the LED 4045 to the hole of the printed board. In the first display substrate 4200, the light emitting element of the LED 4045 and the solder for fixing the light emitting element to the first display substrate 4200 are on the same front surface of the first display substrate 4200. That is, in the first display substrate 4200, the lead for connecting the LED 4045 to the circuit does not protrude on the rear surface thereof, and the solder for fixing the LED 4045 is not arranged on the rear surface. In the present embodiment, a plurality of LEDs 4045 are arranged side by side in two rows in the upper region of the first display substrate 4200. As the LED 4045, either full color or single color may be used, and a plurality of LEDs may be configured by combining full color and single color. Further, as the LED 4045, either a chip type or a shell type can be used as long as it can be surface-mounted, but the chip type is preferable from the advantage of reducing the space. Under the control of the control means of the main control board 110 (see FIG. 5), the first display board 4200 controls the states of lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the LEDs 4045, and the states of turning on, extinguishing, blinking, etc. Information relating to the profit to be given to the player is displayed by the combination of these and the state change.

  By surface-mounting the LEDs 4045 on the first display substrate 4200 in this manner, the arrangement space of the LEDs 4045 on the first display substrate 4200 can be reduced, and the first display substrate 4200 can be made more compact. it can. Further, by surface-mounting the LED 4045 on the first display substrate 4200, it is possible to reduce the weight and reduce failures. Further, by mounting the LED 4045 on the front surface of the first display substrate 4200, the mounting of the LED 4045 does not affect the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 like the through hole mounting. Therefore, the first display substrate 4200 can arrange other electronic components on the rear surface corresponding to the mounting area where the plurality of LEDs 4045 are mounted on the front surface, and the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 can be effectively used. It can be used, and the first display substrate 4200 can be made more compact.

  The LED 4045 has either a configuration in which the light emitting element is arranged so as to project from the surface of the first display substrate 4200 (see FIG. 77) or a configuration in which the light emitting element is embedded so as not to project from the surface of the first display substrate 4200. May be. The first display substrate 4200 may be provided with a reflection portion that easily reflects white light or the like in the front surface area in which the plurality of LEDs 4045 are mounted, or it is difficult to reflect black light or the like in the front surface area. You may provide an absorption part. When the light emitting element of the LED 4045 protrudes from the surface of the first display substrate 4200, by providing a reflecting portion around the light emitting element, the light emitted from the LED 4045 is reflected by the reflecting portion and can be efficiently used. Further, when the light emitting element of the LED 4045 is embedded in the first display substrate 4200, by providing an absorbing portion around the light emitting element, the light emitted from the LED 4045 by the absorbing portion is diffused on the front surface of the first display substrate 4200. Can be prevented.

  FIG. 80 is a front view of the first display substrate 4200 viewed from the front surface side. The first special symbol first indicator 60 is composed of six LEDs 4045 on the left side in the upper row, and the second special symbol first indicator 61 is composed of six LEDs 4045 in the upper row. The first special symbol reservation first indicator 63 is composed of two LEDs 4045 arranged between the first special symbol first indicator 60 and the second special symbol first indicator 61, and the second special symbol. The reserved first indicator 64 is composed of two LEDs 4045 on the right side of the second special symbol first indicator 61. On the right side of the second special symbol reservation first display 64, high probability game state display 68, time saving game state display 69, right striking first display 67 in this order, LED4045 constituting these one by one They are arranged side by side. In addition, the round number indicator 66 is composed of eight LEDs 4045 on the left side of the lower row, the normal symbol first indicator 62 is constituted by three LEDs 4045 on the right side of the round number indicator 66, and the normal symbol holding first indicator 65 is composed of two LEDs 4045 from the lower right side. The number and arrangement of the plurality of LEDs 4045 in each display are not limited to the above.

  As shown in FIG. 81, the first display substrate 4200 is provided with a connector 4100 on the rear surface opposite to the surface on which the LEDs 4045 are mounted, and via a harness (not shown) connected to the connector 4100. , The first game information display device 59 and the main control board 110 are electrically connected. The connector 4100 is a so-called jack to which a plug provided at the end of the harness is attachable / detachable, and may have either a male terminal shape or a female terminal shape. The connector 4100 may be through-hole mounted to fix the lead of the connector 4100 to the hole of the printed board, but in the present embodiment, it is surface-mounted on the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200. Further, in the connector 4100, the connector opening into which the plug provided at the end of the harness is inserted is opened rearward in FIG. 81. Thus, the main body of the connector 4100 and the solder for fixing the connector 4100 to the first display substrate 4200 are on the same rear surface of the first display substrate 4200. That is, the lead for connecting the connector 4100 to the circuit does not protrude from the front surface of the first display substrate 4200, and the solder for fixing the connector 4100 is not arranged on the front surface. By surface-mounting the connector 4100 on the first display substrate 4200 in this manner, the arrangement space of the connector 4100 on the first display substrate 4200 can be reduced, and the first display substrate 4200 can be made more compact. be able to.

  The connector 4100 is arranged on the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 at a position corresponding to the mounting area of the plurality of LEDs 4045 mounted on the surface of the first display substrate 4200. That is, the mounting regions of the plurality of LEDs 4045 and the connector 4100 overlap with each other with the first display substrate 4200 sandwiched between the front and back. By mounting the connector 4100 on the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 in this manner, the mounting of the connector 4100 does not affect the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 like through-hole mounting. Therefore, in the first display substrate 4200, the connector 4100 can be arranged on the rear surface corresponding to the mounting area where the plurality of LEDs 4045 are mounted on the front surface, and the front and rear surfaces of the first display substrate 4200 can be effectively made. By using this, the first display substrate 4200 can be made more compact.

  As shown in FIG. 81, a chip-type resistor 4500 serving as a current limiting unit is mounted on the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200. In the present embodiment, a plurality of resistors 4500 do not overlap the connector 4100. They are arranged side by side. Further, the resistor 4500 may be through-hole mounted by fixing the lead of the resistor 4500 to the hole of the printed board, but in the present embodiment, it is surface-mounted on the first display substrate 4200. The first display substrate 4200 has a resistor 4500 and solder for fixing the resistor 4500 to the first display substrate 4200 on the same rear surface of the first display substrate 4200. That is, the first display substrate 4200 has no lead protruding from the front surface for connecting the resistor 4500 to the circuit, and solder for fixing the resistor 4500 is not disposed on the front surface. In the present embodiment, a plurality of resistors 4500 are arranged side by side in the upper region of the first display substrate 4200. As shown in FIG. 83, the resistor 4500 is arranged between the connector 4100 and the plurality of LEDs 4045 in the circuit of the first display substrate 4200, and limits the current flowing through the plurality of LEDs 4045 to be a predetermined value or less. This prevents an excessive current from flowing in each LED 4045.

  Thus, by mounting the resistor 4500 on the first display substrate 4200, even if the resistor 4500 fails, it can be dealt with by replacing the first game information display device 59, and maintenance is possible. It will be easier. Since the replacement of the first game information display device 59 can be easily performed, it is possible to shorten the idle period of the game and avoid spoiling the interest of the game. Further, by surface-mounting the resistor 4500 on the first display substrate 4200, the arrangement space of the resistor 4500 on the first display substrate 4200 can be reduced, and the first display substrate 4200 can be made more compact. it can.

  The resistor 4500 may be arranged on the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 at a position corresponding to the mounting area of the plurality of LEDs 4045 mounted on the front surface of the first display substrate 4200. In this case, the mounting area of the plurality of LEDs 4045 and the mounting area of the plurality of resistors 4500 may be entirely overlapped or partially overlapped with the first display substrate 4200 sandwiched in front and rear. As described above, by mounting the resistor 4500 on the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200, the mounting of the resistor 4500 does not affect the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 like through-hole mounting. Therefore, in the first display substrate 4200, the resistor 4500 can be arranged on the rear surface corresponding to the mounting area where the plurality of LEDs 4045 are mounted on the front surface, and the front and rear surfaces of the first display substrate 4200 can be effectively made. By using this, the first display substrate 4200 can be made more compact. The mounting areas of the plurality of LEDs 4045 and the mounting areas of the plurality of resistors 4500 may be arranged so as not to overlap with each other with the first display substrate 4200 sandwiched between the front and back sides.

  As shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, the first cover member 4202 includes a front cover portion 4208 having windows 4206 corresponding to the LEDs 4045 mounted on the surface of the first display substrate 4200, and a front cover portion 4208. A lateral cover portion 4210 formed so as to rise to the rear side is provided on the peripheral edge of 4208. The first cover member 4202 is formed in a box shape that is opened rearward by the front cover portion 4208 and the lateral cover portion 4210, and the first display member is provided in an inner region surrounded by the front cover portion 4208 and the lateral cover portion 4210. The substrate 4200 can be stored. Then, when the first display substrate 4200 is housed in the inner area of the first cover member 4202, the first display substrate 4200 is closer to the front cover portion 4208 side than the open end (rear end) of the horizontal cover portion 4210. Located on the front side), the entire first display substrate 4200 is housed inside the first cover member 4202. In other words, the first cover member 4202 covers the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 on which the LEDs 4045 are mounted with the front cover portion 4208, and the peripheral surface of the first display substrate 4200 with the horizontal cover portion 4210. The presence of the first cover member 4202 makes it difficult to access the front surface and the peripheral surface of the first display substrate 4200 from the outside. In the first cover member 4202 of the present embodiment, the inner region is formed so as to match a part of the outer edge of the first display substrate 4200, and when the first display substrate 4200 is stored in the inner region, the horizontal cover portion 4210 is provided. By contacting the inner surface with the peripheral surface of the first display substrate 4200, the first display substrate 4200 can be held so as not to be displaced.

  In this way, the first display substrate 4200 is arranged in a state of being housed in the first cover member 4202, which makes it difficult to access the first display substrate 4200 from the front side or the lateral side, and It is possible to prevent fraud on the board 4200. Even if the first display substrate 4200 is to be removed, it is difficult to access the first display substrate 4200 as described above. Therefore, the first display substrate 4200 should be removed from the first cover member 4202. Can be difficult.

  As shown in FIGS. 77 and 82, the first cover member 4202 has a window 4206 penetrating through the front cover portion 4208 in the front-rear direction corresponding to the LED 4045, by the window defining portion 4212 formed in the front cover portion 4208. Well defined. The window 4206 may be provided so as to correspond to each of the plurality of LEDs 4045 (the present embodiment), or may be provided so as to correspond to a predetermined number of two or more LEDs 4045 among the plurality of LEDs 4045. The window 4206 has a polygonal shape such as a quadrangle or a circular shape, and is formed to be larger than the outer shape of the corresponding LED 4045 so that the corresponding one or a plurality of LEDs 4045 are entirely inside. The windows 4206 are formed in two rows in the first cover member 4202, and when the first cover member 4202 is arranged in a state of covering the front side of the first display substrate 4200, each window 4206 is provided with each LED 4045. Is arranged at a position corresponding to, and the state of lighting of each LED 4045 facing each window 4206 can be visually confirmed through the window 4206.

  As shown in FIGS. 77 and 82, the first cover member 4202 penetrates the front cover portion 4208 in the front-rear direction and defines a window 4206 formed corresponding to the LED 4045, and the state of the LED 4045 corresponding to the window 4206 is defined. The window defining unit 4212 is configured to be distinguishable for each window 4206. The window defining portion 4212 has a configuration in which it is formed in a cylindrical shape protruding rearward from the front cover portion 4208 (this embodiment) and a portion corresponding to the front side of the mounting region of the LED 4045 in the front cover portion 4208 is formed thick. It is provided depending on the configuration. When the window defining portion 4212 is formed of a tubular body, the window defining portions 4212 may be separated from each other and independent, or some of the adjacent window defining portions 4212 may be integrated. . Between the front side opening of the window 4206 facing the front side and the rear side opening of the window 4206 facing the corresponding LED 4045, by the window defining portion 4212, for example, the horizontal cover portion 4210 or the first display substrate 4200 or more The window defining portion 4212 functions as a light guiding portion that guides the light emitted from the LED 4045, and a light is prevented from being diffused by providing a certain long distance. In other words, even if the front cover portion 4208 and the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 are provided with a gap, or if the portion of the front surface of the front cover portion 4208 corresponding to the LED 4045 is projected to the front side, By the window defining portion 4212 that defines the window 4206, the light of the LED 4045 can be guided to the front side without exception.

  As shown in FIG. 77, the first cover member 4202 is combined with the first display substrate 4200 so that the window defining portion 4212 faces the front surface of the first display substrate 4200, and the first display substrate 4200 is formed. The entire circumference of the LED 4045 mounted on the front surface is individually surrounded by the window defining portion 4212. In the present embodiment, the rear end of the window defining portion 4212 formed in a tubular shape is in contact with the front surface of the first display substrate 4200, and the adjacent LED 4045 is partitioned by the window defining portion 4212. Note that the first cover member 4202 and the first display substrate 4200 can be connected to the rear surface of the front cover portion 4208 only by the contact between the window defining portion 4212 of the first cover member 4202 and the front surface of the first display substrate 4200. It is basically configured so that there is a gap with the surface of the first display substrate 4200. As described above, the LED 4045 corresponding to the window 4206 is surrounded by the window defining portion 4212 that defines the window 4206. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 4045 does not diffuse and the state of the LED 4045 passes through the window 4206. Can be more easily identified. Further, since the rear end of the window defining portion 4212 is in contact with the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 and closes the gap between the front cover portion 4208 and the first display substrate 4200, light does not flow from the gap. Leakage into the window 4206 can be prevented, and the states of the LEDs 4045 can be clearly distinguished. Moreover, even if an illegal tool is intruded through the window 4206, the window defining section 4212 can block the illegal tool only in the window 4206, so that the illegal act can be more appropriately prevented. The window defining portion 4212 may be faced with a rear end (rear surface) and the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 such that a slight gap is left between them.

  As shown in FIG. 82, the first cover member 4202 includes a protrusion-shaped alignment portion 4600 that projects rearward from the rear surface of the front cover portion 4208. The alignment section 4600 is integrally formed with the window defining section 4212 so as to project rearward from the rear surface of the window defining section 4212 facing the front surface of the first display substrate 4200. The alignment portion 4600 is configured to fit in the substrate hole 4400 (see FIG. 80) formed in the first display substrate 4200 and to align the first display substrate 4200 with the first cover member 4202. ing. In the first cover member 4202, a plurality of alignment portions 4600 are dispersedly arranged on the rear surface of the front cover portion 4208 so as to be separated from each other. Note that, among the plurality of alignment sections 4600, there may be one that is formed apart from the window defining section 4212. Each alignment part 4600 is formed in a cylindrical shape. Although the alignment portion 4600 projects rearward from the rear surface of the window defining portion 4212, its rear end is located in front of the rear end of the horizontal cover portion 4210 and is housed inside the first cover member 4202. .

  The first display substrate 4200 has a substrate hole 4400 formed so as to penetrate in the plate thickness direction, and the substrate hole 4400 is also formed in a circular shape in accordance with the columnar alignment portion 4600. Further, the substrate hole 4400 is set to have the same opening dimension as or slightly larger than the outer shape of the alignment portion 4600. The alignment part 4600 and the substrate hole 4400 are provided so that the numbers and positions correspond to each other. 4200 relative positions are defined. Therefore, the first cover member 4202 and the first display substrate 4200 are assembled in a state in which they are positioned vertically and horizontally with each other by fitting the alignment portion 4600 and the substrate hole 4400.

  As described above, since the first cover member 4202 and the first display substrate 4200 are assembled in a state where they are positioned by the fitting of the alignment portion 4600 and the substrate hole 4400, the LED 4045 and the LED 4045 correspond thereto. The window 4206 and the window 4206 can be aligned without any shift, and the state of the LED 4045 can be more preferably identified. Further, since the alignment section 4600 is formed integrally with the window definition section 4212 and is reinforced by the window definition section 4212, the alignment section 4600 may be configured to project rearward from the window definition section 4212. It is possible to avoid damage and deformation of the. By forming the alignment section 4600 integrally with the window defining section 4212, the projecting dimension thereof can be shortened, and damage or deformation of the alignment section 4600 can be more preferably avoided.

  As shown in FIG. 81, the first display substrate 4200 has a plurality of substrate holes 4400 formed so as to sandwich the connector 4100. Positioning portions 4600 are provided on the first cover member 4202 so as to sandwich the connector 4100 mounted on the first display substrate 4200 and correspond to each of the plurality of substrate holes 4400. More specifically, the first display substrate 4200 has a pair of substrate holes 4400 that are arranged in a symmetrical positional relationship with the connector 4100 sandwiched in the left and right (in the present embodiment), vertically or diagonally. The first cover member 4202 is provided with a pair of alignment portions 4600 corresponding to each of the pair of substrate holes 4400. As described above, in the first game information display device 59, the alignment structure including the alignment portion 4600 and the board hole 4400 into which the alignment portion 4600 is fitted is not unevenly distributed in only one region of the connector 4100, but sandwiches the connector 4100. It is provided dispersedly in the regions on both sides.

  In the first game information display device 59, the alignment structure of the first cover member 4202 and the first display substrate 4200 by the alignment portion 4600 and the substrate hole 4400 into which the alignment portion 4600 is fitted is provided in both sides of the connector 4100. It is distributed. The connector 4100 is a portion to which a force is applied when the plug of the harness is attached / detached, and the first display substrate 4200 can be prevented from being displaced by the alignment structure arranged with the connector 4100 sandwiched therebetween.

  As shown in FIG. 79, the protection member 4204 is plate-shaped, and a connector opening 4300 penetrating in the front-back direction is formed in accordance with the connector 4100 protruding from the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200. The connector opening 4300 is formed so as to match the outer shape of the connector 4100, and there is no large gap between the connector opening 4300 and the connector 4100 that has passed through the connector opening 4300. The protection member 4204 is formed in a state in which at least a part of a rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 housed in the first cover member 4202 covers the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 from the outside so as to be difficult to access. It is attached to the cover member 4202 (this embodiment) or the first display substrate 4200. The protection member 4204 is disposed by fitting inside the first cover member 4202, and is also disposed behind the first display substrate 4200 housed inside the first cover member 4202. The protective member 4204 of the present embodiment is formed in an outer shape that matches the inner region of the first cover member 4202 defined by the lateral cover portion 4210. When the protective member 4204 is housed in the inner area of the first cover member 4202, the peripheral surface of the protective member 4204 is in contact with the inner surface of the horizontal cover portion 4210, and the protective member 4204 is held so as not to be displaced vertically and horizontally. . Then, when the protective member 4204 is housed in the inner area of the first cover member 4202, the rear surface of the protective member 4204 is aligned with the open end (rear end) of the lateral cover part 4210 or the front cover part is more than the open end. The protection member 4204 is disposed on the 4208 side (front side), and the entire protection member 4204 is housed in the inner area of the first cover member 4202.

  As described above, since the rear side of the first display substrate 4200 is covered with the protection member 4204, it is difficult to access the first display substrate 4200 from the rear side, and the first display substrate 4200 can be tampered with. It can be prevented. Further, the presence of the protective member 4204 makes it difficult to remove the first display substrate 4200 from the first cover member 4202. Here, since the protection member 4204 is housed in the inner area of the first cover member 4202, it is difficult for the protection member 4204 itself to be removed by being obstructed by the first cover member 4202.

  As shown in FIG. 77, the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 are assembled by a fitting structure with unevenness, and after assembly, they are difficult to remove, reassemble, or when disassembled, the first cover member. It is configured such that a trace of removal remains on either the member 4202 or the protection member 4204. The fitting structure is such that the claw-shaped engaging portion 4214 provided on one of the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 (the protection member 4204 in this embodiment) is attached to the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204. The first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 are fitted to the engagement receiving portion 4216 provided on the other side (the first cover member 4202 in the present embodiment), and the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 are caught by the engagement portion 4214 and the engagement receiving portion 4216 being caught. It is integrated. The fitting structure is provided at a plurality of locations corresponding to each other on the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204, and is distributed on the sides facing each other across the first display substrate 4200 in the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204. Is provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, the first cover member 4202 is provided with an engagement receiving portion 4216 on the lateral cover portion 4210. The engagement receiving portion 4216 is provided on the open end side of the horizontal cover portion 4210 so as to form an opening edge on the rear side of the engagement opening formed through the horizontal cover portion 4210. The lateral cover portion 4210 is formed to have a thin plate thickness by making a front portion of the lateral cover portion open outward, and the engagement receiving portion 4216 is provided over the opening side of the concave portion. That is, in the present embodiment, the engagement receiving portion 4216 is thinner than the lateral cover portion 4210 and is provided so as to be recessed on the inner side, so that the engagement portion 4214 is easily fitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, the protection member 4204 is provided with an engagement portion 4214 that projects from the outer edge along the plate surface of the protection member 4204. The width of the engagement portion 4214 and the width of the engagement receiving portion 4216 (engagement opening) are set to be substantially the same, and the thickness of the engagement portion 4214 in the front-rear direction and the dimension of the engagement opening in the front-rear direction are equal to each other. Are set to be substantially the same, and when the engaging portion 4214 is fitted into the engaging receiving portion 4216, the engaging portion 4214 is positioned by hitting the opening edge of the engaging opening. The engaging portion 4214 has a front surface which is an inclined surface such as an arc shape or a flat surface which is inclined rearward toward the protruding end, and a rear surface which is a flat surface along the rear surface of the protection member 4204. In other words, the engagement portion 4214 extends so that the front surface intersects the engagement receiving portion 4216 at an angle, and the rear surface intersects the engagement receiving portion 4216 in an orthogonal or nearly orthogonal relationship. It has been extended. Thereby, when the engagement portion 4214 is fitted into the engagement receiving portion 4216, the first cover member 4202 is elastically deformed so as to be expanded by the inclination of the front surface of the engagement portion 4214 that abuts the engagement receiving portion 4216, and the engagement is performed. It is possible to easily get over the receiving portion 4216 and fit the engaging portion 4214 into the engaging opening. Then, when the engaging portion 4214 is fitted in the engaging opening, the engaging receiving portion 4216 is caught and the rearward movement of the engaging portion 4214 is blocked. Here, when the engagement portion 4214 and the engagement receiving portion 4216 are fitted together, the rear surface of the engagement portion 4214 and the engagement receiving portion 4216 face each other in a parallel relationship and are caught, so the engagement portion 4214. The first cover member 4202 is not guided by the engagement portion 4214 so as to be spread out, unlike the case where the first cover member 4202 is fitted into the engagement receiving portion 4216. Therefore, it is substantially impossible to remove the protection member 4204 from the first cover member 4202 by fitting the engagement portion 4214 into the engagement receiving portion 4216.

  As described above, according to the fitting structure of the engagement portion 4214 and the engagement receiving portion 4216, it becomes difficult to remove the protection member 4204 from the first cover member 4202, and the protection member 4204 removes the first display substrate 4200. It is possible to protect and prevent fraudulent acts on the first display substrate 4200. Further, when the engagement portion 4214 or the engagement receiving portion 4216 is destroyed and the protective member 4204 is forcibly removed from the first cover member 4202, the first cover member 4202 has a trace of the destruction of the engagement receiving portion 4216. As a result, a trace that the engaging portion 4214 is destroyed remains on the protection member 4204, and it becomes easy to find out that there was an illegal act. Furthermore, when the protective member 4204 is forcibly removed from the first cover member 4202, at least one of the engaging portion 4214 and the engaging receiving portion 4216 is broken, so that the protective member 4204 is attached to the first cover member 4202 again. Cannot be reassembled, making it difficult to reassemble.

  The first game information display device 59 of the present embodiment is configured such that the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 are difficult to remove, reassemble, and removal marks remain. As a result, the first display substrate 4200, which is disposed so as to be sandwiched between the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204, is substantially difficult to remove from the first cover member 4202. It is difficult to reassemble and a trace of removal is left on the first cover member 4202. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act on the first display substrate 4200, and even if there is a fraudulent act, it can be easily detected.

  As shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, on the front side of the first cover member 4202, an identification unit 4220 that can identify the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs 4045 individually or as a combination of the light emission modes of two or more LEDs 4045 is arranged. . The identification unit 4220 is provided on the front side of the window 4206 and is provided around the transmissive portion 4222, which is a first region that can transmit light or affects the transmitted light. Is also provided with a shielding portion 4224 as a second area which is less likely to transmit light. In addition, the identification unit 4220 may include a combination area 4226 (FIG. 75) that is displayed on the shielding unit 4224 and that shows the light emission modes of the two or more LEDs 4045 as a combination. The identification means 4220 of this embodiment is formed in a sheet shape and is attached to the front surface of the first cover member 4202. The identifying means 4220 is preferably formed in a shape that matches the front surface region of the first cover member 4202 where the window 4206 is open. In the present embodiment, the identifying means 4220 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the first cover member 4202. Has been done. In addition, in the present embodiment, the identification means 4220 and the first cover member 4202 are adhered, but the size of the identification means 4220 and the method of attaching the identification means 4220 to the first cover member 4202 are not limited to this.

  The transmissive part 4222 of this embodiment is located in front of the window 4206 of the first cover member 4202 so that the light emitted from the LED 4045 corresponding to the window 4206 can be transmitted and affects the transmitted light. It has become. The transmissive portion 4222 is provided so as to cover the entire front side opening of the window 4206, and the transmissive portion 4222 on the front side of the window 4206 prevents the LED 4045 disposed inside the window 4206 and the window 4206 from being directly visible from the front side. I am doing it. Here, "influences the light" means, for example, a mode in which the LED 4045 is hard to be visually recognized by making it semitransparent, a mode in which the light emitted from the LED 4045 is colored by coloring, and It refers to a mode in which the light emitted from the LED 4045 is diffused to make it look large, a mode in which the light emitted from the LED 4045 is viewed to be small by converging the light, a mode in which these are combined, and the like. Light is diffused by the transmissive portion 4222. The transmissive part 4222 is configured as a part of the sheet attached to the front surface of the first cover member 4202, and is arranged in alignment with the plurality of windows 4206 provided in the first cover member 4202, and the plurality of transmissive parts 4222 are used as identification means. 4220. That is, in the identifying means 4220, a transparent portion 4222 having a rectangular shape matching the window 4206 is formed with the same size as the window 4206, and the transparent portion 4222 closes the front opening of the window 4206.

  Since the front side of the window 4206 is closed by the transparent portion 4222 in this manner, it is difficult to access the LED 4045 surface-mounted on the first display substrate 4200 from the front side of the first game information display device 59. You can That is, the transmissive part 4222 can prevent an illegal act from being performed on the first display substrate 4200 through the window 4206 that penetrates to the inside of the first cover member 4202. Moreover, since the light emitted from the LED 4045 can be adjusted by the transmissive portion 4222, the state of the LED 4045 can be more easily identified and the state of the adjacent LED 4045 can be easily distinguished.

  Around the transmissive portion 4222, a shielding portion 4224 configured to make it more difficult for light to pass than the transmissive portion 4222 that covers the window 4206 is provided. In other words, the shielding portion 4224 is arranged on the front side of the first cover member 4202 so as to surround the window 4206. The shielding portion 4224 is provided so as to surround the entire circumference of the transmissive portion 4222, and in the present embodiment, constitutes a portion other than the transmissive portion 4222 in one sheet forming the identification means 4220. The shielding portion 4224 is arranged so as to overlap the area other than the window 4206 on the front surface of the front cover portion 4208 of the first cover member 4202 so as not to cover the inside of the window 4206. The shielding portion 4224 is configured by a color that absorbs light of a wide wavelength such as black, or a dark color that has a low degree of brightness (absorbs light well) such as a cold color such as navy blue and that of the transmitting portion 4222. Is different.

  In this way, since the shield portion 4224, which is difficult for light to pass through, is provided around the transmissive portion 4222, the transmissive portion 4222 can be made easy to understand, and the situation of the LED 4045 recognized through the transmissive portion 4222 is further improved. It is easy to distinguish. Further, even if the window 4206 and the transmissive portion 4222 are misaligned, the window 4206 cannot be visually recognized directly, and it is difficult to understand that they are misaligned. In addition, if the window 4206 is covered with the transmissive part 4222, the transmissive part 4222 surrounded by the shielding part 4224 shines, so that the influence on the identification of the LED 4045 can be reduced.

  The shielding portion 4224 is not limited to the configuration in which the same sheet of the transmitting portion 4222 is set, and the front surface itself of the front cover portion 4208 of the first cover member 4202 is set as the shielding portion 4224, and the transparent portion of the sheet is set. Other configurations may be used, such as a configuration in which the shielding portion 4224 appears on the front side by arranging no sheet through or on the front side of the shielding portion 4224.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the combination area 4226 is partitioned by partition markers 4228 formed of a frame line (in the present embodiment) displayed on the shield 4224. The partition mark 4228 is displayed so as to surround the plurality of transmissive portions 4222, and the combined area 4226 surrounded by the partition marker 4228 can be recognized separately from other areas. For example, 1st, 2nd special symbol 1st indicator 60,61, 1st, 2nd special symbol reservation 1st indicator 63,64, high probability game state indicator 68, time saving game state indicator 69, right strike In the first indicator 67, the number of rounds indicator 66, the ordinary symbol first indicator 62, and the ordinary symbol reservation first indicator 65, among these, a plurality of LEDs 4045 (transmissive portion 4222) constitutes an indicator. For the object, a group of transmissive portions 4222 corresponding to the display is surrounded by partition markers 4228 to form a combination area 4226 corresponding to each display. Note that the partition mark 4228 is not limited to the form of the frame line, and may have a configuration such that a character is attached, the color in the combination area 4226 is changed, or the like so that it can be recognized that it is distinguished from other areas. .

  As shown in FIG. 75, specifically, the transmissive portion 4222 corresponding to the six LEDs 4045 on the left side of the upper row is surrounded by the partition marker 4228, and the combination area 4226 corresponding to the first special symbol first display device 60 is displayed. To do. The transmissive part 4222 corresponding to the six LEDs 4045 in the upper row is surrounded by the partition marker 4228, and the combination area 4226 corresponding to the second special symbol first display 61 is displayed. Surrounding the transparent portion 4222 corresponding to the two LEDs 4045 arranged between the first special symbol first display device 60 and the second special symbol first display device 61 with the partition indicator 4228, the first special symbol reservation second The combination area 4226 corresponding to one display 63 is displayed. The transparent portion 4222 corresponding to the two LEDs 4045 on the right side of the second special symbol first display 61 is surrounded by the partition indicator 4228, and the combination area 4226 corresponding to the second special symbol reservation first display 64 is displayed. Further, the transmissive part 4222 corresponding to the eight LEDs 4045 on the left side of the lower row is surrounded by the partition marker 4228, and the combination area 4226 corresponding to the round number indicator 66 is displayed. The transmissive part 4222 corresponding to the three LEDs 4045 on the right side of the round number display 66 is surrounded by the partition mark 4228, and the combination area 4226 corresponding to the normal symbol first display 62 is displayed. The transmissive part 4222 corresponding to the two LEDs 4045 from the lower row right side is surrounded by the partition mark 4228, and the combination area 4226 corresponding to the normal symbol holding first display 65 is displayed.

  In this way, by displaying the combination area 4226, the states of the LEDs 4045 in the area are associated and recognized, which makes it easier for the player to recognize the information based on the combination of the LEDs 4045.

As shown in FIG. 78, the identifying means 4220 includes a first layer 4230 that easily transmits light,
It is a sheet shape having a second layer 4232 which is arranged on the front side of the region other than the window 4206 in the first cover member 4202 so as to be overlapped with the first layer 4230 and which is less likely to transmit light than the first layer 4230. In other words, the portion corresponding to the transmissive portion 4222 is configured only by the first layer 4230 that transmits light, and the portion corresponding to the shield portion 4224 that is difficult to transmit light is composed of the first layer 4230 and the second layer 4232. It is composed of laminated parts. Since the laminated portion has the second layer 4232, it is difficult for light to pass therethrough as a whole, which prevents light from passing through the shield portion 4224. Here, in the laminated portion, the first layer 4230 is arranged on the first cover member 4202 side (rear side), and the second layer 4232 is arranged on the front side (front side). The identification unit 4220 is obtained by, for example, stacking the second layer 4232 on a sheet including the first layer 4230 by painting or printing, and a visible step is formed between the transmissive portion 4222 and the shielding portion 4224. Absent.

  When the first game information display device 59 is attached to the plate member of the game board 5, the connector 4100 on the rear surface is exposed to the rear side of the game board 5. The first game information display device 59 can be attached / detached to / from the connector 4100 with the harness attached to the plate member of the game board 5, which is convenient.

  As the first cover member 4202, the front cover portion 4208, the lateral cover portion 4210, the window defining portion 4212, the engagement receiving portion 4216, and the alignment portion 4600 are integrally formed of a thermoplastic resin or the like. A molded product made of synthetic resin is used. As the protective member 4204, a molded product is used in which each part such as the engaging part 4214 is integrally formed of synthetic resin such as thermoplastic resin.

  Note that the first display substrate 4200 is attached to the first cover member 4202 by welding or bonding the first display substrate 4200 to the first cover member 4202 while the surface is covered with the first cover member 4202. On the other hand, it may be attached in a state that it is difficult to remove, difficult to reassemble, or a trace of removal remains.

(Modification of the first game information display device 59)
Next, a modified example of the first game information display device 59 will be described. Here, differences from the above-described first game information display device 59 will be mainly described, and description of similar configurations will be basically omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the first game information display device 59 is arranged on the rear side of the cover member 4800 installed on the game board 5, and the front side is covered by the cover member 4800. The covering member 4800 is a member that functions to close or fill the front and rear area on the front side of the game board 5, and is composed of a plate portion that forms the front surface and a wall portion that extends rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the plate portion. It is in the shape of a box that opens to (Fig. 85). Here, the "front and rear area" is an area that can be provided on the front side of the plate member of the game board 5 to provide a game area 5a through which a game ball passes. The covering member 4800 is arranged such that the front surface is substantially the same as the front ends of the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36, and when it is arranged outside the outer rail 36 (game area 5a) as in the present embodiment, the surface decoration. Sometimes doubles. When the first game information display device 59 is arranged inside the game area 5a, a part of the game parts installed in the game area 5a, such as the first and second starting openings 45 and 47 and the special winning opening 50. May be composed of the covering member 4800.

  The front side of the covering member 4800 is that the portion that covers the front side of the first game information display device 59 is transparent or translucent, or has an opening corresponding to the window 4206 of the first game information display device 59 or the like. The state of the LED 4045 can be visually recognized through the window 4206. The covering member 4800 is replaceably attached to the plate member of the game board 5 by screwing or the like. The first game information display device 59 is attached to the covering member 4800 so as to be housed inside the covering member 4800. At this time, the first game information display device 59 has its rear surface facing the back side of the game board 5 (plate member), and the connector board 4100 (FIG. 88) described below is provided so as to face the back side of the game board. It is accessible from the back side of 5. In this way, the covering member 4800 can be attached to and detached from the plate member in the state where the first game information display device 59 is attached, and the covering member 4800 is replaced according to the replacement of the first game information display device 59 or the change of the model. The 4800 can be easily replaced.

  Since the first game information display device 59 is covered with the covering member 4800, it is more difficult to access from the outside. Even if a fraudulent act is performed, the time required to reach the first display substrate 4200 can be saved, and the fraud can be made more difficult.

  The first game information display device 59 of the present embodiment is detachably attached to the covering member 4800 by screwing or the like. Therefore, by removing the cover member 4800 from the plate member, it is possible to easily replace the first game information display device 59 when it breaks down. It should be noted that the first game information display device 59 is difficult to remove from the covering member 4800 due to adhesion or the like, or difficult to reassemble, or whichever of the first game information display device 59 and the covering member 4800 when removed from the covering member 4800. It may be attached with a structure that leaves traces on the crab. In other words, the attachment structure of the first game information display device 59 and the cover member 4800 is a structure that is difficult to remove without destroying the cover member 4800 or the first game information display device 59, the cover member 4800 or the A configuration in which the first game information display device 59 is destroyed or deformed so that the original assembly is impossible, and the cover member 4800 or the first game information display device 59 is destroyed or deformed by removal, so that the cover member 4800 or the first game information display device 59 may have at least one of the structures in which a trace of removal remains.

  The first game information display device 59 is attached to the covering member 4800, and the light of the LED 4045 is visible to the player through the covering member 4800. Further, the first game information display device 59 has a rear surface facing the back side of the game board 5 (plate member), and a connector 4100 (FIG. 88) provided so as to face the back side from the back side of the game board 5. It is accessible.

  As shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, in this modification, current limiting means 4500, 4500 for controlling the currents flowing through the plurality of LEDs 4045 are provided on the main control board 110 side. If the first game information display device 59 is electrically connected to the effect control board 130, the current limiting means 4500, 4500 may be provided on the effect control board 130. As shown in FIG. 92, by mounting a resistor 4500 as a current limiting means on the main control board 110 and limiting the current flowing through the plurality of LEDs 4045 to be a predetermined value or less, an excessive current flows through each LED 4045. Is being prevented. The resistor 4500 may be through-hole mounted to fix the leads of the resistor 4500 to the hole of the printed board, or may be surface-mounted on the main control board 110. Accordingly, in the main control board 110, the lead for connecting the resistor 4500 to the circuit does not protrude to the side opposite to the mounting surface of the resistor 4500, and the surface opposite to the mounting surface can be effectively used.

The resistor 4500 is provided on the other surface of the main control board 110 opposite to the one surface on which the electric components are mounted,
You may arrange | position in the position corresponding to the mounting area of an electric component. In this case, the mounting area of the plurality of resistors 4500 and the mounting area of the electronic component may be entirely overlapped or partially overlapped with the main control board 110 sandwiched in front and behind. By mounting the resistor 4500 on one surface of the main control substrate 110, the mounting of the resistor 4500 does not affect the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 like through-hole mounting. Thus, the main control board 110 can be made more compact by effectively using both surfaces of the main control board 110.

  As shown in FIG. 93, the current limiting means 4500 may be provided as the driver 5600 in the main control board 110. The current limiting unit 4500 limits the current flowing through the plurality of LEDs 4045 to be equal to or less than a predetermined value, thereby preventing an excessive current from flowing through each LED 4045. As described above, by providing the current limiting means 4500, 4500 on the main control substrate 110 side, the resistance of the first display substrate 4200 can be eliminated or reduced, and thus the first display substrate 4200 can be made more compact. The size of the first game information display device 59 can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 89, FIG. 90, and FIG. 91, when the first display substrate 4200 is housed in the inner area of the first cover member 4202, the first display substrate 4200 opens the horizontal cover portion 4210. The entire first display substrate 4200 is housed in the inner area of the first cover member 4202 at a position aligned with the (rear end) (this embodiment) or at the front cover portion 4208 side (front side) with respect to the open end. R. In other words, the first cover member 4202 covers the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 on which the LEDs 4045 are mounted with the front cover portion 4208, and the peripheral surface of the first display substrate 4200 with the horizontal cover portion 4210. The presence of the first cover member 4202 makes it difficult to access the front surface and the peripheral surface of the first display substrate 4200 from the outside. In the first cover member 4202 of the present embodiment, the inner region is formed so as to match a part of the outer edge of the first display substrate 4200, and when the first display substrate 4200 is stored in the inner region, the horizontal cover portion 4210 is provided. By contacting the inner surface with the peripheral surface of the first display substrate 4200, the first display substrate 4200 can be held so as not to be displaced.

  In this way, the first display substrate 4200 is arranged in a state of being housed in the first cover member 4202, which makes it difficult to access the first display substrate 4200 from the front side or the lateral side, and It is possible to prevent fraud on the board 4200. Even if the first display substrate 4200 is to be removed, it is difficult to access the first display substrate 4200 as described above. Therefore, the first display substrate 4200 should be removed from the first cover member 4202. Can be difficult.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the first cover member 4202 and the first display substrate 4200 are assembled by an engagement structure that melts the alignment portion 4600 and engages with the first display substrate 4200, and after assembly. Are configured to be difficult to remove from each other, difficult to reassemble, or leave a trace of removal on either the first cover member 4202 or the first display substrate 4200 when disassembled. Specifically, when the alignment section 4600 and the substrate hole 4400 are fitted together, the tip of the alignment section 4600 protruding from the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 is melted and becomes larger than the substrate hole 4400. By crushing as described above, a hooking portion 4600a is formed at the tip of the alignment portion 4600. The first display substrate 4200 is sandwiched between the rear end of the window defining portion 4212 and the hooking portion 4600a of the alignment portion 4600, and is fixed to the first cover member 4202.

  Thus, according to the above-described engagement structure, it becomes difficult to remove the first display substrate 4200 from the first cover member 4202, and the first display substrate 4200 is protected by the first cover member 4202, 1 It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the display substrate 4200. In addition, when the hooking portion 4600a is destroyed and the first display substrate 4200 is forcibly removed from the first cover member 4202, the broken trace of the hooking portion 4600a remains on the first cover member 4202, and the misconduct It will be easier to find out that there was. Furthermore, when the first display substrate 4200 is forcibly removed from the first cover member 4202, the hook portion 4600a is broken, and the first display substrate 4200 cannot be reattached to the first cover member 4202. , Reassembly becomes difficult.

  As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, on the front side of the first cover member 4202, an identification unit 4220 that can identify the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs 4045 individually or as a combination of the light emission modes of two or more LEDs 4045 is arranged. . The identifying unit 4220 may be arranged in association with the LED 4045 or the display by the LED 4045, such as only the first cover member 4202, only the covering member 4800, or dispersedly provided in the first cover member 4202 and the covering member 4800. Further, the identification means 4220 may be configured such that it is attached to the front surface or the rear surface of the first cover member 4202 or the covering member 4800, or the inside of the first cover member 4202 or the covering member 4800. The identifying means 4220 of the present embodiment includes a first identifying portion 5122 provided on the front surface of the first cover member 4202 and a second identifying portion 5124 provided on the front surface of the covering member 4800, and the first identifying portion 5122. The second identification portion 5124 is arranged so as to overlap with the front side of the. Further, as shown in FIG. 84, the identifying means 4220 includes a third identifying portion 4802 provided on the front surface of the covering member 4800 separately from the second identifying portion 5124.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the first identifying unit 5122 is provided on the front side of the window 4206, and the transmitting unit 5126 as a first region that can transmit light or affects the transmitted light, and the transmitting unit 5126. A shielding portion 5128 is provided as a second region which is provided around the transmission portion 5126 and is less likely to transmit light than the transmission portion 5126. The first identification portion 5122 of the present embodiment is formed in a sheet shape, and is attached to the front surface of the first cover member 4202. The first identification portion 5122 may be formed in a shape that matches the front surface region of the first cover member 4202 where the window 4206 is open. In the present embodiment, the first identification portion 5122 covers the entire front surface of the first cover member 4202. The portion 5122 is formed. In addition, in the present embodiment, the first identification portion 5122 and the first cover member 4202 are adhered by the adhesive layer provided in the first identification portion 5122. However, the size of the first identification portion 5122 and the first cover member The method of attachment to the 4202 is not limited to this. Note that the first identification unit 5122 may include a combination area that indicates a combination of light emission modes of two or more LEDs 4045.

  The transmissive portion 5126 is located on the front side of the window 4206 of the first cover member 4202 and can transmit the light emitted from the LED 4045 corresponding to the window 4206. The transmissive portion 5126 is provided so as to cover the entire front opening of the window 4206, and the transmissive portion 5126 on the front side of the window 4206 covers the front opening of the window 4206. The transmissive portion 5126 may be transparent or may be configured to affect the light that passes therethrough so that the LED 4045 disposed inside the window 4206 cannot be directly seen from the front side. Here, "influences the light" means, for example, a mode in which the LED 4045 is hard to be visually recognized by making it semitransparent, a mode in which the light emitted from the LED 4045 is colored by coloring, and It refers to a mode in which the light emitted from the LED 4045 is diffused to make it look large, a mode in which the light emitted from the LED 4045 is viewed to be small by converging the light, a mode in which these are combined, and the like. Light is diffused by the transmissive portion 5126. The transmissive portion 5126 is configured as a part of a sheet attached to the front surface of the first cover member 4202, and is arranged in alignment with the plurality of windows 4206 provided in the first cover member 4202. The identification unit 5122 is provided. That is, in the first identifying portion 5122, a transparent portion 5126 having a rectangular shape that fits the window 4206 is formed with the same size as the window 4206, and the transparent portion 5126 closes the front opening of the window 4206 without a gap. .

  Since the front side of the window 4206 is covered with the transparent portion 5126 in this manner, it is difficult to access the LED 4045 surface-mounted on the first display substrate 4200 from the front side of the first game information display device 59. it can. That is, it is possible to prevent the transmissive portion 5126 from performing a fraudulent act on the first display substrate 4200 through the window 4206 that penetrates to the inside of the first cover member 4202. Moreover, since the light emitted from the LED 4045 can be adjusted by the transmissive portion 5126, the state of the LED 4045 can be more easily identified, and the states of the adjacent LEDs 4045 can be easily distinguished.

  Around the transmissive portion 5126, there is provided a shielding portion 5128 configured so that light is more difficult to pass than the transmissive portion 5126 that covers the window 4206. In other words, the shielding portion 5128 is arranged on the front side of the first cover member 4202 so as to surround the window 4206. The shielding part 5128 is provided so as to surround the entire circumference of the transmissive part 5126, and in the present embodiment, constitutes a part other than the transmissive part 5126 in one sheet forming the first identification part 5122. The shielding portion 5128 is arranged so as to overlap the area other than the window 4206 on the front surface of the front cover portion 4208 of the first cover member 4202 so as not to cover the inside of the window 4206. The shielding portion 5128 is configured by a color that absorbs light with a wide wavelength such as black, or a dark color that has a low degree of brightness (well absorbs light) such as a cold color such as navy blue and that of the transmitting portion 5126. Is different.

  In this way, since the shielding portion 5128, which is difficult for light to pass through, is provided around the transmissive portion 5126, the transmissive portion 5126 can be made easy to see, and the situation of the LED 4045 recognized through the transmissive portion 5126 is further improved. It is easy to distinguish. Even if the window 4206 and the transmissive portion 5126 are misaligned, the window 4206 cannot be directly visually recognized, and it is difficult to understand that they are misaligned. In addition, if the window 4206 is covered with the transmissive portion 5126, the transmissive portion 5126 surrounded by the shielding portion 5128 shines, and thus the influence on the identification of the LED 4045 can be reduced.

  The shielding portion 5128 is not limited to the configuration in which the same sheet of the transmitting portion 5126 is set, but the front surface itself of the front cover portion 4208 of the first cover member 4202 is set as the shielding portion 5128, and the transparent portion of the sheet is set. Other configurations may be adopted, such as a configuration in which the shielding portion 5128 appears on the front side by arranging no sheet through or on the front side of the shielding portion 5128.

  As shown in FIG. 90, the first identification portion 5122 is arranged so as to overlap the first layer 5130 that easily transmits light and the first layer 5130 on the front side of the region of the first cover member 4202 other than the window 4206. It is in the form of a sheet having a second layer 5131 that is less likely to transmit light than the first layer 5130. In other words, the portion corresponding to the transmissive portion 5126 is composed of only the first layer 5130 that transmits light, and the portion corresponding to the shield portion 5128 that is difficult to transmit light is composed of the first layer 5130 and the second layer 5131. It is composed of laminated parts. Since the laminated portion has the second layer 5131, it is difficult for light to pass in the laminating direction (thickness direction), which prevents light from passing through the shielding portion 5128. Here, in the laminated portion, the first layer 5130 is arranged on the first cover member 4202 side (rear side), and the second layer 5131 is arranged on the front side (front side). The first identification portion 5122 is obtained, for example, by stacking a second layer 5131 on a sheet including the first layer 5130 by painting or printing, and is visible between the transmissive portion 5126 and the shielding portion 5128. There are no steps.

  By configuring the first identifying unit 5122 in this way, even if the window 4206 and the transmitting unit 5126 are displaced, the first layer 5130 can guide light to the transmitting unit 5126, and the shielding unit 5128. Since the transmissive portion 5126 surrounded by illuminates, the influence on the identification of the LED 4045 can be reduced. Moreover, in the portion corresponding to the shielding portion 5128, the light incident on the first layer 5130 is blocked by the second layer 5131 on the front side and does not leak to the front side, so that the transmitting portion 5126 can be clearly discriminated.

  As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, the second identifying portion 5124 is located on the front side of the window 4206 and attached to the covering member 4800. The second identifying unit 5124 is provided on the front side of the window 4206, and is provided around the light transmitting unit 5132 as a first region that can transmit light or affects the transmitted light, and the light transmitting unit 5132. The light-shielding portion 5134 is provided as a second region that is less likely to transmit light than the light-transmitting portion 5132. In addition, the second identifying unit 5124 may include a combination area 4804 that is displayed on the light shielding unit 5134 and that indicates a combination of the light emission modes of two or more LEDs 4045. The second identification portion 5124 of the present embodiment is formed in a sheet shape and is attached to the front surface of the covering member 4800. The second identification portion 5124 is formed in conformity with the range of the plurality of windows 4206, and one second identification portion 5124 covers the front side of the plurality of windows 4206. In addition, in the present embodiment, the second identifying portion 5124 and the covering member 4800 are adhered by the adhesive layer of the second identifying portion 5124, but the size of the second identifying portion 5124 and the method of attaching the covering member 4800 to each other are not limited. It is not limited to this.

The light transmitting portion 5132 of this modification is located in front of the window 4206 of the first cover member 4202,
The light emitted from the LED 4045 corresponding to the window 4206 can be transmitted or affects the transmitted light. The light transmitting portion 5132 is provided so as to cover at least the entire front side opening of the window 4206, and the state of the LED 4045 is visible through the window 4206 by the light transmitting portion 5132 on the front side of the window 4206. The light transmitting portion 5132 of this embodiment is transparent and is formed in a range corresponding to the plurality of windows 4206. Note that the light transmitting unit 5132 may be configured to affect the transmitted light similarly to the transmitting unit 5126 of the first identifying unit 5122. Then, by adjusting the light emitted from the LED 4045 by the light transmitting unit 5132, the state of the LED 4045 can be more easily identified, and the state of the adjacent LED 4045 can be easily distinguished.

  A light-shielding portion 5134 is provided around the light-transmitting portion 5132 so as to prevent light from passing through the light-transmitting portion 5132 that covers the window 4206. In other words, the light shielding portion 5134 is arranged on the front side of the first cover member 4202 so as to surround the window 4206. The light-shielding portion 5134 is provided so as to surround the entire circumference of the light-transmitting portion 5132, and in the present embodiment, constitutes a portion other than the light-transmitting portion 5132 in one sheet forming the second identifying portion 5124. The light-shielding portion 5134 is arranged so as to overlap the area other than the window 4206 on the front side of the first cover member 4202, and does not cover the inside of the window 4206. The light-blocking portion 5134 is configured with a color that absorbs light with a wide wavelength range such as black, or a dark color with low brightness (that absorbs light well) such as cold color such as navy blue, and the color of the light-transmitting portion 5132. Is different from

  As described above, since the light-blocking portion 5134, which is difficult for light to pass through, is provided around the light-transmitting portion 5132, the light-transmitting portion 5132 can be easily recognized and the LED 4045 which is recognized through the light-transmitting portion 5132 can be easily recognized. The situation is easier to determine. Further, even if the window 4206 and the light-transmitting portion 5132 are displaced, it is difficult to understand that they are displaced.

  The light-shielding portion 5134 is not limited to the configuration in which the same sheet of the light-transmitting portion 5132 is set, but the front surface of the covering member 4800 corresponding to the front side of the window 4206 is set as the light-shielding portion 5134, and the transparent portion of the sheet is set. Other configurations such as a configuration in which the light shielding portion 5134 appears on the front side by arranging no sheet through or through the front portion of the light shielding portion 5134 may be used. An opening may be provided in the covering member 4800 so as to correspond to the window 4206, and the opening may be closed by the second identification portion 5124 (the light transmitting portion 5132 and / or the light shielding portion 5134).

  The combination area 4804 is partitioned by a partition marker 4806 including a frame line (in this embodiment) displayed on the light shielding unit 5134. The partition marker 4806 is displayed so as to surround the plurality of light-transmitting portions 5132, and the combined area 4804 surrounded by the partition marker 4806 can be recognized separately from other areas. For example, 1st, 2nd special symbol 1st indicator 60,61, 1st, 2nd special symbol reservation 1st indicator 63,64, high probability game state indicator 68, time saving game state indicator 69, right strike In the first indicator 67, the number of rounds indicator 66, the normal symbol first indicator 62, and the normal symbol holding first indicator 65, among them, a plurality of LEDs 4045 (transmissive portion 5126 or light transmissive portion 5132) With respect to what constitutes a display device, a group of LEDs 4045 (transmissive portion 5126 or light transmitting portion 5132) corresponding to the display device is surrounded by partition markers 4806 to form a combination area 4804 corresponding to each display device. Note that the partition mark 4806 is not limited to the form of a frame line, and may have a configuration such that a character is attached, the color in the combination area 4804 is changed, or the like so that it can be recognized that it is distinguished from other areas. .

  Specifically, the combination area 4804 corresponding to the first special symbol first display device 60 is displayed by being surrounded by the partition indicator 4806 so as to correspond to the six LEDs 4045 on the left side of the upper row. The combination area 4804 corresponding to the second special symbol first display 61 is displayed by being surrounded by the partition indicator 4806 so as to correspond to the six LEDs 4845 in the upper row. Surrounded by a partition indicator 4806 so as to correspond to the two LEDs 4045 arranged between the first special symbol first indicator 60 and the second special symbol first indicator 61, the first special symbol reservation first display The combination area 4804 corresponding to the container 63 is displayed. The second special symbol first display 61 is surrounded by a partition indicator 4806 so as to correspond to the two LEDs 4045 on the right side, and a combination area 4804 corresponding to the second special symbol holding first display 64 is displayed. Also, a combination area 4804 corresponding to the round number display unit 66 is displayed by being surrounded by partition markers 4806 so as to correspond to the eight LEDs 4045 on the left side in the lower row. The combination area 4804 corresponding to the normal symbol first display 62 is displayed by being surrounded by the partition mark 4806 so as to correspond to the three LEDs 4045 on the right side of the round number display. The combination area 4804 corresponding to the normal symbol holding first display 65 is displayed by being surrounded by the partition indicator 4806 so as to correspond to the two LEDs 4045 from the lower row right side.

  In this way, by displaying the combination area 4804, the states of the LEDs 4045 in the area are associated and recognized, and the player can easily recognize the information based on the combination of the LEDs 4045.

  As shown in FIG. 90, the second identification unit 5124 is arranged on the front side of the first layer 5136 so as to overlap with the first layer 5136 that easily transmits light and the region corresponding to the window 4206. It is a sheet having a second layer 5138 that is less likely to transmit light than 5136. In other words, the light-transmitting portion 5132 corresponding to the window 4206 is configured only by the first layer 5136 that transmits light, and the portion corresponding to the light-shielding portion 5134 that is difficult to transmit light is the first layer 5136 and the second layer 5138. And a laminated portion. Since the laminated portion has the second layer 5138, it is difficult for light to pass therethrough as a whole, which prevents light from passing through the light shielding portion 5134. Here, in the laminated portion, the first layer 5136 is arranged on the rear side, and the second layer 5138 is arranged on the front side (front side). The second identification unit 5124 is obtained, for example, by stacking the second layer 5138 on a sheet including the first layer 5136 by painting or printing, and is visible between the light transmitting unit 5132 and the light shielding unit 5134. There is no step.

  The third identification unit 4802 is an area where various information is displayed, and is attached to the covering member 4800. The third identification portion 4802 is formed in a sheet shape, and is arranged at a position (upper side in the present embodiment) different from the second identification portion 5124 on the front surface of the covering member 4800. The information displayed on the third identification unit 4802 is visible to the player. In addition, in the present embodiment, the third identification portion 4802 and the covering member 4800 are adhered to each other by the adhesive layer of the third identification portion 4802. It is not limited to this. Further, the information displayed by the third identifying unit 4802 may be displayed on the second identifying unit 5124 or the first identifying unit 5122, or may be displayed separately from the identifying means 4220, and the third identifying unit 4802 may be omitted. .

  In this way, by providing the third identifying section 4802, the amount of information that can be displayed is increased, and the information displayed on the first game information display device 59 can be made easier to understand. Further, by dividing the information and dividing and displaying the information on the plurality of identification units 4802, 5122, and 5124, it is possible to flexibly deal with a change such as a model change.

  The identification sections 4802, 5122, 5124 (identification means 4220) may be configured such that the peripheral surface thereof is covered with the protection section 4808 (FIG. 85). In the present embodiment, the protective portion 4808 is provided on the front surface of the covering member 4800, the peripheral surface of the second identifying portion 5124 attached to the front surface of the covering member 4800, and the third identifying portion attached to the front surface of the covering member 4800. Each of the peripheral surfaces of 4802 is covered with a protective portion 4808. Specifically, the protection portion 4808 is formed of a wall extending in the front-rear direction in a recess formed corresponding to the mounting position of the identification portions 4802 and 5124 and having a shape corresponding to the shape of the identification portions 4802 and 5124. There is. Further, the recess of the covering member 4800 has a depth of about the thickness of the identification portions 4802 and 5124, and the protection portion 4808 faces the peripheral surface of the identification portions 4802 and 5124 fitted and attached to the recesses and the identification portion 4808. The entire circumference of 4802 and 5124 is surrounded by a protective portion 4808.

  By thus covering the peripheral surfaces of the identification units 4802 and 5124 with the protection unit 4808, it is possible to make it difficult for the protection unit 4808 to access the identification units 4802 and 5124. It is possible to prevent the removal of 4802 and 5124. Therefore, it is possible to prevent illegal acts such as replacing the identification units 4802 and 5124 or removing the identification units 4802 and 5124 to access the first display substrate 4200. Further, the identification portions 4802 and 5124 can be aligned by attaching the identification portions 4802 and 5124 to the covering member 4800 with the protection portion 4808 as a reference. In particular, since the second identification portion 5124 overlapping the front side of the window 4206 can be arranged without displacement, the state of the LED 4045 can be more appropriately determined.

  In this modification, the protection section 4808 is provided corresponding to the entire circumference of the identification sections 4802, 5124, but the protection section 4808 is provided on a part of the peripheral surface of the identification sections 4802, 5122, 5124 (identification means 4220). The structure may be provided correspondingly.

  As the information displayed by the identification means 4220, the information related to the profit given to the player in the game displayed in the first game information display device 59 (may be referred to as game state information in the description) is assisted or explained. Such as game status display, unique display showing unique information such as model name, probability of gaming machine 1 (eg 1/299 etc.), probability of variation of gaming machine 1 (eg 60/100 etc.), big hit It is advisable to display the specification display showing the specification information such as the number of rounds (for example, 15R, 4R) alone or in combination. It should be noted that these displays are described by printing or other methods that can be visually recognized by the player.

  For example, as the game state display, as in the above-described embodiment, by forming the combination area 4804 surrounded by the partition marker 4806, the states of the plurality of LEDs 4045 in the combination area 4804 are associated and recognized as a combination, The game state information displayed by the combination of the plurality of LEDs 4045 may be configured to be easily identified and assisted.

  FIG. 86 is an illustration showing an example of the game state display 4810 applied corresponding to the round number display device 66. For example, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), as the game state display 4810, the number of rounds is shown at a position corresponding to the side of the number-of-rounds indicator 66 or the like, which is found to correspond to the number-of-rounds indicator 66. A configuration in which the display mode of the LED 4045 and the number of rounds for each round may be described with a pattern that schematically represents the display device 66. The game status display 4810 of FIG. 86 (a) is for explaining the game status information (the number of rounds) displayed by the combination of the plurality of LEDs 4045 of the number-of-rounds indicator 66. Therefore, by referring to the game state display 4810 of FIG. 86 (a), it is possible to easily identify the game state information (round number) indicated by the round number display 66.

  Further, as the game state display 4810, by arranging markers such as numbers and symbols corresponding to the LED 4045 on the side of the LED 4045 (FIG. 86 (b)) or on the front side (FIG. 86 (c)). It is also possible to adopt a configuration for assisting the recognition of the state of the LED 4045 in association with the combination by the sign, or a configuration for explaining the state of the LED 4045. The signs may be different in color or shape.

  The identifying means 4220 is divided into a first identifying portion 5122 provided on the first cover member 4202 and a second identifying portion 5124 provided on the covering member 4800, as a configuration corresponding to the front side of the window 4206. Since the functions required for the identifying unit 4220 can be assigned to the two identifying units 5122 and 5124 and set, the configurations of the respective identifying units 5122 and 5124 can be simplified. Further, by dividing and setting the functions required for the identifying unit 4220 in the two identifying units 5122 and 5124, the state of the LED 4045 can be more clearly distinguished and the state of the LED 4045 can be more easily understood. Moreover, by arranging the first identifying portion 5122 and the second identifying portion 5124 so as to overlap with each other, a synergistic effect that is difficult to obtain with one sheet can be obtained due to the overlapping of the two identifying portions 5122 and 5124.

  Since the covering member 4800 is replaceably attached to the game board 5, if the covering member 4800 is removed from the game board 5 and replaced when changing the model, the identifying portions 4802 and 5124 provided on the covering member 4800 are replaced. It can be easily replaced, including. If the cover member 4800 is used to perform the unique display and the specification display, the cover member 4800 can be replaced with another model. Further, since the first identification portion 5122 is provided on the first cover member 4202, it is not affected by the replacement of the covering member 4800.

(Details of Structure of Second Game Information Display Device 79)
As shown in FIG. 94, the second game information display device 79 has a plurality of LEDs arranged in a triangular shape. These LEDs are the first and second special symbol second indicators 80, 81, the first and second special symbol reservation second indicators 83, 84, the normal symbol second indicator 82, the normal symbol reservation second display. The device 85 and the right-handed second display device 87 are configured.

  As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the second game information display device 79 covers at least the second display substrate 5800 on the surface of which 10 LEDs are mounted and the front side of the second display substrate 5800. The second cover member 5710 and the like are included. Although not shown in the drawing, an identification unit is provided on the front side (top portion) of the second cover member 5710, which can identify the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs individually or as a combination of the light emission modes of two or more LEDs. .

  The second cover member 5710 includes a plate-shaped pedestal portion 5730 that forms a bottom portion of the second cover member 5710, and a triangular columnar protrusion portion 5720 that protrudes from the pedestal portion 5730. The corners of the side surface of the protrusion 5720 are chamfered, and the second game information display device 79 is arranged with the top of the protrusion 5720 facing the player.

  The second display substrate 5800 is a printed circuit board provided with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface facing the player, and light can be emitted from each LED toward the front side. The LED is surface-mounted on the second display substrate 5800, not through-hole mounting for fixing the lead of the LED to the hole of the printed board. The second display substrate 5800 has the LED light emitting element and the solder for fixing the light emitting element to the second display substrate 5800 on the same front surface of the second display substrate 5800. That is, the second display substrate 5800 does not have the leads for connecting the LEDs to the circuit protruding from the rear surface thereof, and the solder for fixing the LEDs is not disposed on the rear surface thereof. As the LED, either full color or single color may be used, and a plurality of LEDs may be configured by combining full color and single color. As the LED, either a chip type or a bullet type can be used as long as it can be surface-mounted. However, the chip type is preferable from the advantage of reducing the space. Under the control of the control means of the production control board 130 (see FIG. 5), the second display board 5800 controls the states of lighting, extinguishing, blinking, and the like of a plurality of LEDs. Information relating to the profit to be given to the player is displayed by the combination of these and the state change.

  By surface-mounting the LEDs on the second display substrate 5800 in this way, the LED arrangement space on the second display substrate 5800 can be reduced, and the second display substrate 5800 can be made more compact. it can. Further, by surface-mounting the LED on the second display substrate 5800, the weight can be reduced and the breakdown can be reduced. Further, by mounting the LEDs on the front surface of the second display substrate 5800, the mounting of the LEDs does not affect the rear surface of the second display substrate 5800 as through-hole mounting. Therefore, the second display substrate 5800 can be provided with other electronic components on the rear surface corresponding to the mounting area where a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and the rear surface of the second display substrate 5800 can be effectively used. It can be used, and the second display substrate 5800 can be made more compact.

  The LED may have a configuration in which the light emitting element is arranged so as to project from the surface of the second display substrate 5800 or a configuration in which the light emitting element is embedded so as not to project from the surface of the second display substrate 5800. The second display substrate 5800 may be provided with a reflecting portion that easily reflects white light or the like in the front surface area where a plurality of LEDs are mounted, or it is difficult to reflect black light or the like in the front surface area. You may provide an absorption part. When the light emitting element of the LED projects from the surface of the second display substrate 5800, by providing a reflecting portion around the light emitting element, the light emitted from the LED can be reflected by the reflecting portion and used efficiently. Further, when the light emitting element of the LED is embedded in the second display substrate 5800, by providing an absorbing portion around the light emitting element, the light emitted from the LED by the absorbing portion is diffused on the front surface of the second display substrate 5800. Can be prevented.

  The projecting portion 5720 is provided with ten light guiding hole portions 5740 as windows that penetrate the projecting portion 5720 along the projecting direction. Also, the pedestal portion 5730 of the second cover member 5710 is attached with the second display substrate 5800 with its surface covered, and each light guiding hole 5740 is surface-mounted on the surface of the second display substrate 5800. The LED is arranged at a position corresponding to the LED. Accordingly, it is possible to visually recognize the lighting state of each LED from the top side of the protruding portion 5720 through the light guide hole portion 5740.

  On the other hand, on the back surface of the second display substrate 5800, a connector 5810 wired to the LED surface-mounted on the front surface is provided (see FIG. 95), and the LED and the effect control board 130 are connected via the connector 5810. And are connected.

  Then, the second display substrate 5800 is screwed to the pedestal portion 5730 of the second cover member 5710, whereby the second display substrate 5800 is detachable and reassembled with respect to the second cover member 5710. The second cover member 5710 or the second display substrate 5800 can be attached without leaving a trace when possible.

  The method of attaching the second display substrate 5800 to the second cover member 5710 (the pedestal portion 5730) is not limited to this, and for example, by using the engaging portion and the engaging receiving portion, The second cover member 5710 may be detachable, reassembled, or attached without leaving a trace on the second cover member 5710 or the second display substrate 5800 when disassembled.

  Further, the shape of the protruding portion 5720 is not limited to the triangular prism shape, and various shapes such as a cylindrical shape and a quadrangular prism shape can be considered. Further, in the present embodiment, as an example, ten LEDs are surface-mounted on the second display substrate 5800, and ten light guiding holes corresponding to the LEDs are provided on the second cover member 5710. Although 5740 is formed, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is conceivable to provide one or a plurality of LEDs and light guiding holes.

  Further, the second game information display device 79 may be divided into a plurality of display devices according to the function, and in this case, the second game information display device 79 may be arranged adjacent to the inner rail 35 at the lower left of the game area 5a. You may arrange | position, and you may disperse | distribute in several places of the game area 5a.

  When the second game information display device 79 is divided into a plurality of display devices, for example, the first special symbol second display device 80 and the first special symbol reservation second display device 83 as one display device, the second Special symbol second indicator 81 and second special symbol reservation second indicator 84 as one display device, normal symbol second indicator 82 and normal symbol reservation second indicator as one display device, right hitting first It is advisable to use two display devices as one display device.

  Further, the first special symbol second indicator 80, the second special symbol second indicator 81 and the normal symbol second indicator 82 as one display device, the first special symbol hold second indicator 83, the second special The symbol holding second display 84 and the normal symbol holding second display 85 may be one display device, and the right striking second display may be one display device.

  Further, the first special symbol second indicator 80, the second special symbol second indicator 81 and the normal symbol second indicator 82 as one display device, the first special symbol reservation second indicator 83 one display As a device, the second special symbol reservation second display 84 may be one display device, and the normal symbol reservation second display 85 and the right striking second display may be one display device.

(Modification of the second game information display device 79)
Next, a modified example of the second game information display device 79 will be described. Here, differences from the second game information display device 79 described above will be mainly described, and description of similar configurations will be basically omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 96 (a), in the present modification, the second game information display device 79 is closer to the right side area of the game area 5a (right side flow path through which the right-handed game ball flows down), and the first game It is arranged closer to the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 than the information display device 59. Therefore, it is possible to confirm the display state of the second game information display device 79 while visually checking the game ball that has been hit to the right.

  Specifically, the effect space 40a provided inside the decorative frame 40, that is, a specific area where the game balls formed inside the game area 5a do not flow down (flowing is restricted) and is adjacent to the decorative frame 40 It is provided to do. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the game area 5a does not collide with the second game information display device 79. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the second game information display device 79 is damaged by the collision of the game balls.

  Further, since the second game information display device 79 is arranged at a position deviated from the motion trajectory of the movable effect member 73 in the effect space 40a, the second game information is operated even if the movable effect member 73 operates. The front of the display device 79 is not shielded and does not collide with the second game information display device 79. Therefore, the second game information display device 79 can be viewed regardless of the progress of the game. The arrangement and structure of the second game information display device 79 of this modification may be applied to the above-described embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 96 (b), the second game information display device 79 is a first special symbol second indicator 80, a second special symbol second indicator 81, an ordinary symbol number which is composed of one LED. 2 indicator 82 and right-handed second indicator 87, a first special symbol holding second indicator 83, a second special symbol holding second indicator 84, a normal symbol holding second indicator composed of two LEDs Equipped with 85.

  The right-handed second display 87 is provided on the uppermost part of the second game information display device 79, and has a triangular window 4206 formed in the second cover member 5710 so that its tip is directed to the right side area of the game area 5a. The LED lighting state can be visually confirmed. In this way, the second game information display device 79 is arranged at the uppermost stream in the downward direction of the game ball, so that the player can easily find the presence of the right-handed second display device 87. Further, since the right-handed stroke is simply represented by the direction of the triangular window 4206, it becomes possible for the player to easily understand the right-handed stroke.

  The first special symbol second display 80 is provided on the left side immediately below the right-handed display 87, and visually confirms the lighting state of the LED that emits green light from the circular window 4206 provided in the second cover member 5710. It is possible. Thus, the first special symbol second display 80 on the left side of the second game information display device 79, that is, the left side area of the game area 5a that shoots the game ball in the normal game state (the left-handed game ball is Since it is arranged on the side close to the area (flowing down area), it becomes easier for the player who is left-handed to visually recognize the lighting state of the first special symbol second display 80.

  The second special symbol second display 81 is provided on the right side immediately below the right-handed indicator 87 (position closer to the right side region of the game area 5a than the first special symbol first display 80), the second cover The lighting state of the LED that emits red light can be visually recognized through a rectangular window 4206 formed in the member 5710. Thus, the second special symbol second display 81 to the right of the first special symbol second display 80, that is, the right side area of the game area 5a that shoots the game ball in the time saving game state (the right-handed game ball Since it is arranged on the side closer to the area where the water flows down, it becomes easier for the player who is making a right hit to visually recognize the second special symbol second lighting state. Further, the first special symbol second display 80 emits a different color, and the shape of the window 4206 is different, that is, the display mode (light emitting mode, visual recognition mode) is different, so the first special symbol second display 80 It becomes easy to distinguish the second special symbol second display 81.

  It should be noted that at least the effect symbol 70a (which is configured by the identification unit and the decoration unit) that is variably displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 during the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is at least If the same game state is displayed in the same (common) display mode, by checking the first special symbol second display 80 and the second special symbol second display 81, the first special symbol It is possible to understand whether it is a variable display or a variable display of the second special symbol.

  The first special symbol reservation second display 83 is provided directly below the first special symbol second display 80 (), and emits green light from the two diamond-shaped windows 4206 provided in the second cover member 5710. It is possible to visually check the lighting state of the LED. Thus, the first special symbol second display 80, which is directly below and emits light in the same color as the LED of the first special symbol second display, that is, the display mode (light emitting mode, visual recognition mode) is the same, so the game It becomes easier for the person to know that the number is the first number of reservations.

  The second special symbol reservation second display 84 is provided immediately below the second special symbol second display 81 (position closer to the right side area of the game area 5a than the first special symbol reservation first display 83). Therefore, the lighting state of the LED that emits green light can be visually recognized through the two hexagonal windows 4206 formed in the second cover member 5710. Thus, immediately below the second special symbol second display 81, and emits light in the same color as the LED of the second special symbol second display 81, that is, because the display mode (light emitting mode, visual recognition mode) is the same. It becomes easier for the player to recognize that the number is the second hold number.

  The normal symbol second display 82 is provided on the lowermost left side of the second game information display device 79, and visually recognizes the lighting state of the LED that emits yellow light from the circular window 4206 opened in the second cover member 5710. It is possible. In this way, the first special symbol second display 80 or the second special symbol second display 81 emits a different color, that is, the display mode (light emitting mode, visual recognition mode) is different, so the player is the first special It becomes easy to distinguish from the symbol second display 80 and the second special symbol second display 81.

  The normal symbol reservation second display 85 is provided on the right side of the normal symbol second display 82, and the lighting state of the LED that emits yellow light from the two circular windows 4206 opened in the second cover member 5710. It is visible. In this way, the normal symbol second display 82 emits light in the same color, that is, since the display mode (light emitting mode, visual recognition mode) is the same, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the number is the number of reserved figures.

  Although the first special symbol second display 80 and the second special symbol second display 81 are arranged adjacent to each other, they may be arranged separately, and even in that case, the first The special symbol second indicator 80 is arranged closer to the left side area of the game area 5a than the second special symbol second indicator 81, and the second special symbol second indicator 81 is from the first special symbol second indicator 80. Also, it may be arranged near the right side area of the game area 5a. Further, the first special symbol second display device 80 may be provided above the second special symbol second display device 81 (upstream side in the downward direction of the game ball), or vice versa.

  Further, the shape of the window 4206 of the first special symbol second display 80 and the shape of the window 4206 of the first special symbol holding second display 83 are different, but may be the same. Similarly, the shape of the window 4206 of the second special symbol second display 81 and the shape of the window 4206 of the second special symbol holding second display 84 are different, but may be the same shape.

  Moreover, the shape of the window 4206 of the first special symbol second display 80 and the shape of the window 4206 of the normal symbol second display 82 are the same, but may be different, and even in that case. The shape of the window 4206 of the normal symbol second display 82 and the shape of the window 4206 of the normal symbol holding second display 85 may be the same or may be different.

  In addition, the first special symbol second indicator 80, the second special symbol second indicator 81, the first special symbol reservation second indicator 83, the second special symbol reservation second indicator in the second game information display device 79. Although 84, the normal symbol second indicator 82, the normal symbol holding second indicator 85, and the right-handed second indicator 87 are provided, only some of them may be provided. For example, the normal symbol holding second display 85 may not be provided, or the right hitting second display 87 may not be provided, and the first special symbol second display 80 and the second special You may make it not provide other than the symbol 2nd display 81.

  Further, the second game information display device 79 (special symbol second display devices 80, 81 and special symbol holding second display devices 83, 84, etc.) is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. It may be provided at a position lower than the areas SH1, SH2 and the special symbol display areas DZ1, DZ2, or may be provided at a position higher than the number-of-holds display areas SH1, SH2 and the special symbol display areas DZ1, DZ2. Further, the second game information display device 79 may be provided at a position higher than one of the reserved number display regions SH1 and SH2 and the special symbol display regions DZ1 and DZ2 and lower than the other.

  Further, the first reservation number display area SH1 and the second reservation number display area SH2 provided in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 are arranged at positions closer to the right side area than the left side area of the game area 5a. Good. Even in that case, the second holding number display area SH2 may be arranged closer to the right side area of the game area 5a than the first holding number display area SH1. Further, the first holding number display area SH1 may be arranged above (directly above) the second holding number display area SH2, or vice versa.

  Further, instead of arranging the second special symbol display area DZ2 below (including immediately below) the first special symbol display area DZ1 provided in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the second special symbol display The first special symbol display area DZ1 may be arranged below (including immediately below) the area DZ2. Further, the second special symbol display area DZ2 may be arranged closer to the right side area of the game area 5a than the first special symbol display area DZ1.

  Further, instead of arranging the reserved number display areas SH1 and SH2 below the special symbol display areas DZ1 and DZ2, the special symbol display areas DZ1 and DZ2 are arranged below the reserved number display areas SH1 and SH2. May be.

  In the present embodiment, the right-handed second indicator 87 has a display mode that is easier for the player to recognize than the right-handed first indicator 67 by marking "right-handed" near the LED. The display mode of the second hitting indicator 87 is not limited to this, and may be any display mode that is easier for the player to recognize than the first hitting right indicator 67. For example, instead of the LED lighting display, blinking display may be used, full color LEDs may be used to light in various colors at predetermined intervals, and the LED may be larger than the LED on the right-hand first display 67. Size LEDs may be used. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the right-handed first display 67.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the special display mode 3 (red) having a higher expectation that the display mode of the hold icon of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is a big hit than the hold icon of the normal display mode (white). Even if the hold icon is displayed, the display of the special symbol hold second display devices 83, 84 is displayed in the same display mode (LED lighting or blinking) as when the hold icon in the normal display mode is displayed. However, the display of the special symbol holding second display units 83 and 84 may be displayed in a special display mode in correspondence with the display mode of the hold icon of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. For example, by using LEDs capable of displaying full-color LEDs of the special symbol holding second display 83, 84, the special symbol holding second display corresponding to the holding icon of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. The display colors of 83 and 84 may be changed and displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the SP reach effect, the blackout effect, the movement effect performed using the movable effect member 73, and the jackpot game effect, the first hold icon display area 70B1 in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. To 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the variable icon display area 70D are deleted, but the display to be deleted is not limited to this. For example, the display of the special symbol reservation number in the reservation number display area (first reservation number display area SH1, second reservation number display area SH2) may be deleted, or the special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1 , The display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the second special symbol display area DZ2) may be erased, or all of them may be erased.

  In this way, even if the information regarding the progress of these games is erased, it is displayed on the second game information display device 79, so SP reach effects, blackout effects, movement effects and jackpots that are performed using the movable effect member 73. It is possible for the player to grasp the information regarding the progress of the game while preventing the game production from being hindered.

  In the present embodiment, the display of the special symbol holding number at the time of power restoration after the occurrence of the power interruption, the display restoration of the first game information display device 59 and the second game information display device 79 is substantially the same timing, After the display of the first game information display device 59 is restored, the display of the second game information display device 79 is restored so that the first game information display device 59 → second game information display device 79 → first image The display of the special symbol hold number may be restored in the order of the display device main liquid crystal) 70.

  Further, when the power is restored after the power interruption, the information about the progress of the game was transmitted from the main CPU 110a only to the special symbol holding number and the general figure holding number to the sub CPU 130a, but other information is transmitted. You can

  For example, information about whether or not the special symbol is changing, and information about whether or not the normal symbol is changing may be transmitted. When these pieces of information are transmitted, even during the power restoration effect in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the special symbol second displays 80, 81 and the ordinary symbol second are displayed in the second game information display device 79. The display on the display unit 82 can be restored, and the player can grasp the variable display of the special figure and the variable display of the general figure.

Moreover, you may transmit the information of a game state (at least the information of whether it is a time saving game state). By doing so, the display of the right-handed second display 87 on the second game information display device 79 can be restored even during the power restoration effect on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. The player can understand the right-handed display.
For example, if the power is restored during a jackpot game, you will miss the opportunity to win a game ball at the special winning opening if you do not hit the right during the power restoration performance. By recovering the display of the device 87 and allowing the player to grasp the right-handed display, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage.

  In the present embodiment, the player can adjust the brightness of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, and the like. Although not configured, the gaming machine 1 may be configured so that the player can adjust the brightness.

  For example, the cross key 19 is displayed during a customer waiting presentation such as displaying a customer waiting demo image on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 or the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, or displaying an image during power saving. When any of the above is operated and a signal indicating that the cross key 19 has been operated is input to the effect control unit 130m, the sub CPU 130a transmits a command according to the operation to the image control unit 140.

  Then, the image control unit 140 causes the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 to display the brightness adjustment image based on the reception of the command from the effect control unit 130m. Take control.

When the left button or the right button of the cross key 19 is operated while displaying the brightness adjustment image, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the left button or the right button of the cross key 19 is operated, and the current setting is made. The brightness corresponding to the operation of the cross key 19 is selected from among the prepared brightness of several steps (the left button lowers the brightness than the currently set brightness and the right button selects For example, the brightness is selected to be higher than the currently set brightness), and a brightness command corresponding to the selected brightness is transmitted to the image controller 140 and the lamp controller 160.
The sub CPU 130a corresponds to the brightness adjusting means of the present invention.

  The image control unit 140 changes the brightness of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 based on the brightness command from the effect control unit 130m, and adjusts the displayed brightness. Control is performed to update and display the image on the image indicating that the brightness has been changed. In addition, the lamp control unit 160 performs control to change the brightness of the panel lighting device 74 and the frame lighting device 10 based on the brightness command from the effect control unit 130m.

  In such a gaming machine 1, the player operates the cross key 19, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, the board lighting device 74, and the frame lighting. Even if the brightness of the device 10 is changed, each indicator of the second game information display device 79 (first special symbol second indicator 80, second special symbol second indicator 81, normal symbol second indicator 82, The brightness of the LEDs of the first special symbol holding second display 83, the second special symbol holding second display 84, the normal symbol holding second display 85, and the right striking second display 87) is not changed.

In this way, each player of the second game information display device 79 (first special symbol second display device 80, second device) even if the player operates the cross key 19 to reduce the brightness and play the game. Special symbol second indicator 81, normal symbol second indicator 82, first special symbol reserve second indicator 83, second special symbol reserve second indicator 84, normal symbol reserve second indicator 85, and right Since the brightness of the LED of the hitting second display 87) is not changed and is displayed with a constant brightness, the player can grasp the information regarding the progress of the game.
In addition, each display device of the first game information display device 59 (first special symbol first display device 60, second special symbol first display device 61, normal symbol first display device 62, first special symbol reservation first display Device 63, second special symbol hold first indicator 64, normal symbol hold first indicator 65, right hitting first indicator 67, high probability game state indicator 68, and time saving game state indicator 69) LED The brightness of does not change.

  In addition, each indicator of the second game information display device 79 (first special symbol second indicator 80, second special symbol second indicator 81, ordinary symbol second indicator 82, first special symbol reservation second display The brightness of the LED of the device 83, the second special symbol holding second display 84, the normal symbol holding second display 85, and the right striking second display 87) may be changed. In this case, the display control data according to the brightness determined by the sub CPU 130a may be created and output to each display of the second game information display device 79.

  Further, the control method for adjusting the brightness is not limited to the above method. For example, the effect control unit 130m transmits only a command indicating that the cross key 19 has been operated, the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 160 store the currently set brightness, and the effect control is performed. The brightness to be changed may be determined by referring to the currently set brightness stored based on the command from the unit 130m, and the brightness may be changed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the LED is exemplified as the means for displaying the game state information in the game information display device (display means), but the present invention is not limited to this, and a 7-segment display, an organic EL, or another light emitting body is used. May be. It is desirable that the light emitter can be surface-mounted from the viewpoint of compactness and the like.

  The display substrate is not limited to the plate shape, and may be any one provided with the above-mentioned light emitting body as a means for displaying the game state information. You can also

  In the modification of the first game information display device, the cover member is covered with the cover member, but the cover member provided on the game board may be used as the cover member. Also, the cover member may be used as a covering member. A structure for protecting at least the front side of the display substrate (light emitting means) to protect the display substrate (light emitting means), refers to both the covering member and the cover member, or one of the covering member and the cover member, and serves as the cover means. I can catch it.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which identification means is provided corresponding to the first game information display device and the second game information display device (display means) to help identify the game state information displayed by the light emitting state of the LED Although explained, it is not limited to this. For example, an information display unit may be provided corresponding to or adjacent to the first game information display device or the second game information display device to display the above-mentioned unique display, specification display, or the like, which is not directly related to the game state information. The information display section may cover the front side of the first game information display device or the second game information display device or the front side of the window. As described above, an information display unit may be provided instead of or in addition to the above-described mode of displaying the unique display or the specification display on the identification unit.

  Further, the identification means is not limited to the configuration that allows the emission modes of the plurality of LEDs to be identified individually or as a combination of the emission modes of two or more LEDs, and may be any configuration that assists in identifying the game state information. As an identification mode, an information assistance mode in which a sign or the like is provided corresponding to the LED to facilitate understanding of the meaning of the state of the LED, and a relationship between the first region that transmits light and the second region that hardly transmits light As described above, a discrimination assisting mode in which these are used alone or in combination, such as a mode in which the state of the LED is easily discriminated (easily visually recognized), is included. In particular, the information assistance mode can be distinguished to be referred to as information assistance means, and the discrimination assistance mode can be distinguished to be referred to as discrimination assistance means.

  Further, in the first game information display device and the second game information display device, the configuration arranged on the front side of the window is not limited to the above-mentioned identification means, but is arranged, for example, so as to cover the window and through the window. It may be a safeguard to prevent cheating. For example, in addition to the identifying means, a protective means composed of a transparent or light-transmitting sheet is provided on the cover member, the covering member, or the identifying means itself, or instead of the identifying means, transparent or light-transmitting It is possible to provide the cover member or the covering member with the protective means made of a different sheet.

  In addition, the first game information display device and the second game information display device are connected to a control means such as a main control board or a performance control board, and a plurality of light emitters are individually or combined in accordance with a signal from the control means. According to the display mode, it can be said that the information about the profit to be given to the player (special symbol, number of rounds of big hit game: game state information) is displayed. Special symbol first indicator, special symbol second indicator, ordinary symbol first indicator and ordinary symbol second indicator (display means), during the symbol fluctuation period, a plurality of light-emitting bodies are turned on and off in a predetermined pattern. Repeatedly, at the timing immediately after the end of the pattern change or at a timing after a predetermined period, by turning on / off the light emitting body corresponding to the predetermined pattern among the plurality of light emitting bodies, the display by each light emitting body, or a plurality of It is possible to perform a combined display using the illuminants and to display these in a plurality of patterns.

  In addition, a display mode that is displayed directly or indirectly (such as the above-mentioned identification means) on the covering member by printing or the like, and each special symbol on the display (display means), the number of reserved memories, the number of big hit game rounds, etc. By changing both or one of the arrangement and / or the control, the indicator (display means) may be commonly used in another model.

  Further, the first game information display device and the second game information display device are installed in the front and rear area (glass side position) between the front surface (cell image position) of the game area of the game board and the height direction of the launch rail. If it is possible to see it through the glass arranged on the front of the game board, it is within the game area (front and rear areas using the predetermined space of the winning opening and the decorative frame), or the game area forming part (the game ball flows down. It can be installed on a member that forms a possible game area (either rail or resin) or outside the game area (outside the outer rail). Good.

  Specifically, for example, the gaming machine of the embodiment is configured as one type of pachinko gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display device of the above-described embodiment can be used for various types of pachinko gaming machines. Can be installed.

  In addition, as a display connected to the main control board that controls various lottery and reels in the spinning-type gaming machine, a display having the same configuration as the display of the above-described embodiment is provided, and the display is used. Information about profits to be given to a player in a game on a spinning-type gaming machine may be displayed. The back side of the display substrate on which the LED is mounted on the surface is attached to the casing of the spinning-type gaming machine in a state where it is difficult to remove due to welding, etc., difficult to reassemble, or leaving a trace when it is disassembled. A cover member that covers the surface of the substrate may be provided. Then, the display device may display information regarding the profit to be given to the player in the game on the spinning-type gaming machine.

(Invention described in this specification)
By the way, in the conventional game machine (for example, the game machine described in JP 2012-096067 A), when a reach state occurs during execution of variable display, a part or all of a predetermined music piece is output by a sound output unit. It has been suggested that the result of the variable display is the special result mode by outputting from. However, in such a gaming machine, since the number of songs that are output during variable display is limited to one, it is not possible to effectively raise the player's expectation that a special gaming state will occur. There was a problem that the interest in playing games was poor.

As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a special game of whether or not to generate a special game (big hit game) state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the start condition. In the gaming machine that executes the determination (big hit lottery) and generates the special game state based on the result of the special game determination, the variable display of the identification information (special symbol) for notifying the result of the special game determination is executed. And a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect (music notice effect) accompanied by the output of one or a plurality of songs during the execution of the variable display, the specific effect executing means: The number of pieces of music to be output during execution of the specific effect is made different depending on whether the special game state is low or high.

  By doing so, the player's expectation for the occurrence of the special game state can be effectively raised, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, in the conventional gaming machine (for example, the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2012-152251), a notice that the effect mode is changed over a plurality of stages based on the determination result of whether or not the special gaming state occurs The production mode has been changed to a stage according to the degree of expectation that the special game state occurs in the production. However, in such a gaming machine, the higher the degree of expectation that a special game state occurs, the more the production mode of the notice production changes to the final stage, but the one that effectively enhances the player's expectation for the notice production. Instead, there was the problem that the interest in games was poor.

As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the identification information (special symbol) is executed based on the establishment of the start condition, and the result of the variable display is the special result. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special game (big hit game) state advantageous to the player when it becomes a mode, determination to determine whether or not to generate the special game state before the result of the variable display is derived Means, a specific effect executing means for executing a predetermined specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) based on the determination result of the determining means, and a predetermined notification for notifying that the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means. And a notice effect executing means for executing the notice effect (step-up notice effect 1), and the predetermined notice effect is a notice effect capable of changing the effect mode over a plurality of stages. The plurality of stages include a first stage, a second stage next to the first stage, and a final stage next to the second stage. The effect of the second stage is executed for a longer time than the effect of the first stage and the effect of the final stage.

  By doing so, it is possible to effectively increase the player's sense of expectation for the advance notice effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the conventional gaming machine (for example, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-152251), the performance mode is changed over a plurality of stages based on the determination result of whether the special gaming state occurs. The form of the notice was changed to a stage according to the degree of expectation that the special game state occurs. However, in such a gaming machine, the number of final stages is the same despite the fact that there are multiple types of notice effects, so the number of stages expected by the player is constant no matter which notice effect is executed. There was a problem that there was little interest in notice production.

As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the identification information (special symbol) is executed based on the establishment of the start condition, and the result of the variable display is the special result. In a gaming machine that can generate a special game (big hit game) state that is advantageous to the player in a mode, a specific variation that performs a specific variation display (acquisition challenge production) after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the variation display A display execution means, and a notice effect execution means for executing any of a plurality of types of notice effects (step-up notice effects 1 to 3) for notifying that the specific effect will be performed during the specific variation display. , The plurality of types of notice productions are notice productions capable of changing the manner of production in a plurality of stages, and the first notice production in which the final stage number is set to the first stage number (step-up notice production ) And a second notice effect (step-up notice effect 2 or 3) in which the final stage number is set to a second stage number that is larger than the first stage number, the notice effect executing means is Even when the type of the notice effect is executed up to the final stage number, the notice effect is executed up to the final stage number between the start of the specific variation display and the execution of the specific effect. ing.

  By doing so, it is possible to effectively increase the player's sense of expectation for the advance notice effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in the conventional gaming machine (for example, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-208143), in the effect display section in order to notify the player of the number of stored reserves for the special game lottery. The number of items to be held was displayed. However, in recent game machines, the effect accessory device has become large in size, and when the movable display covers the effect display unit, it becomes difficult to visually confirm the number of holdings, or a specific effect image is displayed on the effect display unit. In some cases, the display of the number of holdings may be erased, and in these cases, it is difficult for the player to grasp the number of holdings.

As a first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a start information acquisition means for acquiring start information upon the establishment of a start condition, and the start information acquisition means. After the start information is acquired, the special game determination (big hit lottery) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player based on the start information when the determination condition is satisfied Based on the control information from the main control means (main control board 110) including the special game determination means for performing, the image display device (first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70) variation effect In a gaming machine provided with a sub-control means (performance control board 130) for executing the above, the main control means, if the start condition is satisfied but the determination condition is not satisfied, The first hold storage means for storing the start-up information acquired by the dynamic information acquisition means as a hold storage up to a predetermined number, and the number of the hold storages stored in the first hold storage means as the hold storage number information. Further, a holding storage number information transmitting means for transmitting to the sub-control means, and a holding display corresponding to the number of the holding storages stored in the first holding storage means is a first holding display device (special symbol holding first No. 1 display 63, 64), the sub-control means stores the number of the pending storage indicated by the pending storage number information transmitted by the pending storage number information transmitting means, a second pending storage means, Further comprising a second hold display device (special symbol hold second display 83, 84) and the image display device with a hold display corresponding to the number of the hold storage stored in the second hold storage means. It had to allow shown.

As a second configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a start information acquisition means for acquiring start information upon the establishment of a start condition, and the start information acquisition means. After the start information is acquired, the special game determination (big hit lottery) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player based on the start information when the determination condition is satisfied Main control means (main control board 110) provided with a special game determination means for performing, and sub-control means (effect control board 130) for executing a variation effect in the image display device based on control information from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with, if the start condition is satisfied but the determination condition is not satisfied, the main control means starts the start information acquired by the start information acquiring means. First holding storage means for storing a predetermined number of information as holding storage, and holding storage number information for transmitting the number of the holding storages stored in the first holding storage means to the sub-control means as holding storage number information. And a transmission means, and displays a hold display corresponding to the number of the hold storages stored in the first hold storage means on the first hold display device (special symbol hold first display 63, 64). The second control storage means further includes a second reservation storage means for storing the number of the reservation storages indicated by the reservation storage number information transmitted by the reservation storage number information transmission means. The second hold display device (special design hold second display 83, 84) and the image display device (first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70) with a hold display corresponding to the number of the hold storage stored in To In the hold display displayed on the image display device, the first mode (first hold icons H11 to H14, the second hold icons H21 to H24) displayed by a hold icon and the second mode displayed by a numerical value (Holding number display (first holding number display, second holding number display) displayed in the holding number display area (first holding number display area SH1, second holding number display area SH2)) In, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests the determination result of the special game determination, and a specific suggestion effect predetermined in the variation effect (for example, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, blackout effect, movable effect member 73). Moving effect) is performed, the hold display of the first aspect displayed on the image display device is erased when the specific suggestion effect is performed. I was trying to leave.

  By adopting the first configuration or the second configuration, it becomes possible to grasp the number of holdings.

  Further, in the conventional gaming machine (for example, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-208143), according to the progress of the game, the variation display of the production symbols and the display of the number of holdings, etc. for notifying the lottery result of the special game, etc. (Hereinafter, referred to as "predetermined information regarding progress of game") is displayed on the effect display unit to notify the player of predetermined information regarding progress of the game. However, in recent game machines, the effect accessory device has become large, and when the movable display device covers the effect display unit, it becomes difficult to visually recognize predetermined information regarding the progress of the game, or a specific effect image is displayed on the effect display unit. When displaying in, the display of the predetermined information regarding the progress of the game may be erased, and in these cases, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the predetermined information regarding the progress of the game.

As a first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a start information acquisition means for acquiring start information upon the establishment of a start condition, and the start information acquisition means. After the start information is acquired by, the special game determination (big hit lottery) as to whether or not to execute the special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player based on the start information when the determination condition is satisfied is given. Main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, which includes special game determination means for performing, and sub-control means (production control board for controlling the effect based on the control information from the main control means). 130), and the main control means causes the first game information display device (first game information display device 59) to display predetermined information regarding the progress of the game, and the sub control means controls the control information. Based on and so as to display a predetermined information on the progress of the game in the second game information display device (second game information display unit 79) and an image display apparatus (first image display device (main LCD) 70).
According to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a brightness adjusting unit (sub CPU 130a) for adjusting the brightness of the display device is further provided, and the brightness adjusting unit adjusts the brightness of the image display device. 2 The brightness of the game information display device is not adjusted.

As a second configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the starting condition is satisfied in the gaming machine in which the player plays the game by ejecting the game medium to the game area. Starting information acquisition means for acquiring the starting information, and a special game determination as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player based on the starting information acquired by the starting information acquisition means A main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, which includes a special game determination means for performing (big hit lottery), and a sub-control for controlling the effect based on the control information from the main control means. Means (effect control board 130), and the main control means causes the first game information display device (first game information display device 59) to display predetermined information regarding the progress of the game, The control means provides predetermined information regarding the progress of the game based on the control information to the second game information display device (second game information display device 79) and the image display device (first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70). The second game information display device is provided in the game area and forms a part of the passage route of the game medium.

As a third configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a start information acquisition unit that acquires start information upon the establishment of a start condition, and the start information acquisition unit. Based on the start information obtained by the above, the progress of the game is controlled with a special game determination means for performing a special game determination (big hit lottery) as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (big hit game). The main control means (main control board 110) and the sub-control means (effect control board 130) that controls the effect based on the control information from the main control means are provided, and the main control means is for the game. Predetermined information regarding the progress is displayed on the first game information display device (first game information display device 59), and the sub-control means performs predetermined information regarding the progress of the game in the second game based on the control information. An information display device (second game information display device 79) and an image display device (first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70) are displayed, and the second game information display device is compared to the first game information display device. And is provided near the image display device.

  By adopting the first configuration to the third configuration, it becomes possible to grasp the predetermined information regarding the progress of the game.

  Further, in the conventional gaming machine (for example, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-208143), according to the progress of the game, the variation display of the production symbols and the display of the number of holdings, etc. for notifying the lottery result of the special game, etc. (Hereinafter, referred to as "predetermined information regarding progress of game") is displayed on the effect display unit to notify the player of predetermined information regarding progress of the game. By the way, when a power failure occurs in a conventional gaming machine (for example, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-123507), a power failure recovery screen showing that the power failure is being recovered is displayed when the power failure is restored thereafter. It was displayed on the device (effect display section). However, this power failure recovery screen usually only displays “Recovering power failure”. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to grasp the predetermined information regarding the progress of the game during the recovery from the power failure.

As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the start information is acquired by the start information acquisition unit that acquires the start information when the start condition is satisfied, and the start information is acquired by the start information acquisition unit. After obtaining, the special game determination (big hit lottery) whether or not to execute the special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player based on the start information when the determination condition is satisfied A main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, which includes a determination means, and a sub-control means (production control board 130) for controlling the production based on the control information from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with ,, based on detecting that the power supplied to the gaming machine has reached a predetermined level value lower than a normal value, the progress of the game is controlled when the predetermined level value is detected. When the game state storage means stores the information about the game so that it can be held even when the supplied power is not supplied, and when the game state storage means stores information about the control of the progress of the game. Is further provided with a game state restoring means for performing a restoration process for restoring the game state when the predetermined level value is detected, based on the stored information regarding the control of the progress of the game, and the main control means Causes the first game information display device (first game information display device 59) to display predetermined information regarding the progress of the game, and the sub-control means displays the predetermined information regarding the progress of the game based on the control information. 2 Display on the game information display device (second game information display device 79) and image display device (first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70) to display the game state When the restoration process by the old means is performed, the display of the predetermined information regarding the progress of the game is displayed earlier on the display of the second game information display device than on the display of the image display device. Was there.

  By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp predetermined information regarding the progress of the game.

  Further, in the conventional gaming machine (for example, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-33792), after the special game, the game state shifts to a high frequency support mode (time saving game state) which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, In the special game or high frequency support mode, it is configured to aim at the right side of the game area by so-called right striking, and in the special game or high frequency support mode, the right striking that prompts to aim at the right side of the game area on the display screen. It was displaying. However, in recent game machines, the performance accessory device has become large in size, and when it is movable, it may be difficult to see the right-handed display because it covers the performance display unit, or when a specific performance image is displayed on the performance display device. Sometimes erases the right-handed display, and in these cases, it is difficult for the player to grasp the right-handed display.

As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an advantageous game state (time saving game state, which is advantageous to the player over a normal game state (non-time saving game state) or a normal game state, In the gaming machine controlled to any of the gaming states (big hit gaming state), based on the main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and the control information from the main control means A sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling, a game region in which a game medium flows down, and a game medium ejecting unit for ejecting the game medium to the game region according to a player's operation, The game area is a first game area (left side game area) which is an area where the game medium is to be launched when being controlled to the normal game state, and the game when being controlled to the advantageous game state. It has a second game area (right side game area) which is an area where the body should be fired, and the main control means, when being controlled to the advantageous game state, moves toward the second game area. A display for notifying that the medium should be fired is displayed on the first display device (right-handed first display 67), and the sub-control means, when the advantageous game state is controlled, the second game Display on the second display device (right-handed second display device 87) and image display device (first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70) for notifying that the game medium should be launched toward the area. The display on the second display device is easier for the player to recognize than the display on the first display device, and the display on the image display device is more visible to the player than the display on the second display device. The display was made easy to recognize.

  By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp the right-handed display.

  Moreover, in the conventional game machine (for example, the game machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-099682), there is known a game machine including a special symbol display device provided with a plurality of LEDs. In such a gaming machine, by making the lighting pattern of the LED of the special symbol display device corresponding to each type of jackpot irregular, it is determined whether or not the jackpot has occurred from the display content of the special symbol display device. It is proposed to make it difficult. However, conventionally, in the special symbol display, the LED is attached to the substrate by through-hole mounting in which the terminal is inserted into the hole formed in the substrate and soldered. Therefore, it is possible to remove the LED from the board and attach it again to the board, which may be a target of cheating, which may impair the interest of the game.

As a first configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control means (110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (110) are connected. In accordance with a signal from the main control means (110), a special symbol, the number of reserved memories for lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of jackpot game, the ordinary symbol, the number of reserved memories for lottery corresponding to the ordinary symbol. A display device (59) for displaying any one of the LEDs (4045) by a display device (59), wherein the display device (59) is a display substrate on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045) are surface-mounted. (4200), a cover member (4202) that covers the front surface of the display substrate (4200) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045) are mounted, and a front side of the cover member (4202). Identification means (4220) capable of distinguishing the light emission mode of the plurality of LEDs (4045) individually or as a combination of the light emission modes of the two or more LEDs (4045), wherein the cover member (4202) is the cover member. A window (4206) that penetrates (4202) forward and backward and is formed corresponding to the LED (4045) is defined, and the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the window (4206) is defined by the window (4206). It has a window defining part (4212) configured to be distinguishable from each other, and the identification means (4220) is provided in front of the window (4206) and is capable of transmitting light or has an effect on the transmitted light. A first area (4222, 5126, 5132) to be provided and a first area (4222, 5126, 5132) provided around the first area (4222, 5126, 5132) are provided. 132) and a second region (4224, 5128, 5134) that is less likely to transmit light, and a second region (4224, 5128, 5134) displayed as a combination of two or more LEDs (4045) emitting modes. And a combination area (4226, 4804) shown in the display means (59), the display substrate (4200) is difficult to remove from the cover member (4202), the display substrate (4200) and the cover member. (4202) is difficult to be reassembled, or when the display means (59) is disassembled, a trace of removal is left on either the cover member (4202) or the display substrate (4200). Is characterized by.

  By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a second configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control means (110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (110) are connected. In accordance with a signal from the main control means (110), a special symbol, the number of reserved memories for lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of jackpot game, the ordinary symbol, the number of reserved memories for lottery corresponding to the ordinary symbol. A display device (59) for displaying any one of the LEDs (4045) by a display device (59), wherein the display device (59) is a display substrate on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045) are surface-mounted. (4200) and a cover member (4202) that covers the front surface of the display substrate (4200) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045) are mounted, the cover member (4202) being the cover. A window (4206) which penetrates the material (4202) back and forth and is formed corresponding to the LED (4045) is defined, and the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the window (4206) is defined for each window. The cover member (4202) has a window defining portion (4212) configured to be distinguishable, and the cover member (4202) is a rear side of a covering member (4800) that fills the front and rear regions on the front side of the game board (5) of the gaming machine (1). And is attached to the covering member (4800) and surrounds a first region (4222, 5126, 5132) arranged on the front side of the window (4206) on the front side of the cover member (4202). A second region (4224, 5128, 5134) that is difficult to transmit light is provided, and the LED corresponding to the window (4206) through the first region (4222, 5126, 5132). 4045) identifying means (4220, 5120) capable of identifying the state, the display means (59), the display substrate (4200) is difficult to remove from the cover member (4202), the display substrate (4202). 4200) and the cover member (4202) are difficult to reassemble, or when the display means (59) is disassembled, there is a trace of removal on either the cover member (4202) or the display substrate (4200). It is characterized in that it is configured to remain.

  By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a third configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control means (110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (110) are connected. In accordance with a signal from the main control means (110), a special symbol, the number of reserved memories for lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of jackpot game, the ordinary symbol, the number of reserved memories for lottery corresponding to the ordinary symbol. A display device (59) for displaying any one of the LEDs (4045) by a display device (59), wherein the display device (59) is a display substrate on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045) are surface-mounted. (4200) and a cover member (4202) that covers the front surface of the display substrate (4200) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045) are mounted, the cover member (4202) being the cover. A window (4206) that penetrates the material (4202) in the front and back and is formed corresponding to the LED (4045) is defined, and the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the window (4206) is defined by the window (4206). ), The display substrate (4200) has a front surface of the display substrate (4200) and a peripheral surface of the display substrate (4200) that is the cover member. The protection member (4204) housed inside (4202) and covering the rear surface of the display substrate (4200) housed in the cover member (4202) is the cover member (4202) or the display substrate (4200). The display means (59) is attached to the display substrate (4200) before the display substrate (4200) is difficult to remove from the cover member (4202). It is difficult to reassemble with the cover member (4202), or a trace of removal remains on either the cover member (4202) or the display substrate (4200) when the display means (59) is disassembled. It is characterized by having done.

  By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control means (110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (110) are connected. In accordance with a signal from the main control means (110), a special symbol, the number of reserved memories for lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of jackpot game, the ordinary symbol, the number of reserved memories for lottery corresponding to the ordinary symbol. A display device (59) for displaying any one of the LEDs (4045) by a display device (59), wherein the display device (59) is a display substrate on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045) are surface-mounted. (4200) and a cover member (4202) that covers the front surface of the display substrate (4200) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045) are mounted, the cover member (4202) being the cover. A window (4206) that penetrates the material (4202) in the front and back and is formed corresponding to the LED (4045) is defined, and the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the window (4206) is defined by the window (4206). ) Has a window defining part (4212) that can be distinguished, and the cover member (4202) is arranged such that the window defining part (4212) faces the front surface of the display substrate (4200). The window member (4212) individually surrounds the entire circumference of the LED (4045) mounted on the front surface of the display substrate (4200) in combination with the display substrate (4200), and the cover member (4202). Identification means (4220, 5120) attached to the front surface so as to cover the window (4206) and capable of identifying the light emitting mode of the LED (4045) for each of the windows (4206). The identifying means (4220, 5120) has the first layer (4230, 5130, 5136) that easily transmits light and the first layer on the front side of the area other than the window (4206) in the cover member (4202). A second layer (4232, 5131, 5138) which is disposed so as to overlap with the layer (4230, 5130, 5136) and is less likely to transmit light than the first layer (4230, 5130, 5136); The means (59) is such that the display substrate (4200) is difficult to remove from the cover member (4202), the display substrate (4200) and the cover member (4202) are difficult to reassemble, or the display means (59). 59) is disassembled so that a trace of removal is left on either the cover member (4202) or the display substrate (4200).

  By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control means (110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (110) are connected. In accordance with a signal from the main control means (110), a special symbol, the number of reserved memories for lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of jackpot game, the ordinary symbol, the number of reserved memories for lottery corresponding to the ordinary symbol. A display device (59) for displaying any one of the LEDs (4045) by a display device (59), wherein the display device (59) is a display substrate on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045) are surface-mounted. (4200) and a cover member (4202) that covers the front surface of the display substrate (4200) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045) are mounted, the cover member (4202) being the cover. A window (4206) that penetrates the material (4202) in the front and back and is formed corresponding to the LED (4045) is defined, and the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the window (4206) is defined by the window (4206). ) Has a window defining part (4212) configured to be distinguishable by each, and is replaceably attached to the game board (5) of the game machine (1) and fills the front and rear area on the front side of the game board (5). A covering member (4800) covers the front side of the cover member (4202), is provided on the covering member (4800) at the front side of the cover member (4202), and emits light from the plurality of LEDs (4045). Has an identifying means (4220, 5120) capable of individually identifying or as a combination of two or more LEDs (4045) in a light emitting mode, and the displaying means (59) is the display substrate. 4200) is difficult to remove from the cover member (4202), the display substrate (4200) and the cover member (4202) are difficult to reassemble, or the cover member (4) is disassembled when the display means (59) is disassembled. 4202) and the display substrate (4200) are characterized in that a trace of removal is left.

  By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control means (110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (110) are connected. In accordance with a signal from the main control means (110), a special symbol, the number of reserved memories for lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of jackpot game, the ordinary symbol, the number of reserved memories for lottery corresponding to the ordinary symbol. A display device (59) for displaying any one of the LEDs (4045) by a display device (59), wherein the display device (59) is a display substrate on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045) are surface-mounted. (4200) and a cover member (4202) that covers the front surface of the display substrate (4200) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045) are mounted, the cover member (4202) being the cover. A window (4206) that penetrates the material (4202) in the front and back and is formed corresponding to the LED (4045) is defined, and the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the window (4206) is defined by the window (4206). ) Has a window defining part (4212) configured to be distinguishable by each, and is attached to the game board (5) of the game machine (1) to cover the front and rear regions of the game board (5). ) Covers the front side of the cover member (4202), the covering member (4800) is located on the front side of the cover member (4202) and is attached to the front surface of the covering member (4800), and the plurality of LEDs ( Identification means (4220, 5120) capable of identifying the light emission mode of the LED (4045) individually or as a combination of the light emission modes of two or more of the LEDs (4045), and the covering member (48). 0) and a protection part (4808) provided on the front surface of the covering member (4800) and covering the peripheral surface of the identification means (4220, 5120), and the display means (59). , The display substrate (4200) is difficult to remove from the cover member (4202), the display substrate (4200) and the cover member (4202) are difficult to reassemble, or the display means (59) is disassembled. At this time, it is characterized in that a trace of removal is left on either the cover member (4202) or the display substrate (4200).

  By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control means (110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (110) are connected. In accordance with a signal from the main control means (110), a special symbol, the number of reserved memories for lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of jackpot game, the ordinary symbol, the number of reserved memories for lottery corresponding to the ordinary symbol. A display device (59) for displaying any one of the LEDs (4045) by a display device (59), wherein the display device (59) is a display substrate on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045) are surface-mounted. (4200) and a cover member (4202) that covers the front surface of the display substrate (4200) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045) are mounted, the cover member (4202) being the cover. A window (4206) that penetrates the material (4202) in the front and back and is formed corresponding to the LED (4045) is defined, and the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the window (4206) is defined by the window (4206). ) Has a window defining part (4212) configured to be distinguishable by each, and is attached to the game board (5) of the game machine (1) to cover a front and rear area on the front side of the game board (5) ( 4800) covers the front side of the cover member (4202) and is provided on the front surface of the cover member (4202) with a first identification part (5122) and a second identification part (4800) provided on the covering member (4800). And a light emitting mode of the plurality of LEDs (4045) can be identified individually or as a combination of two or more light emitting modes of the LEDs (4045). In the display means (59), the display substrate (4200) is difficult to remove from the cover member (4202), and the display substrate (4200) and the cover member (4202) are difficult to reassemble. Alternatively, when the display means (59) is disassembled, a trace of removal is left on either the cover member (4202) or the display substrate (4200).

  By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control means (110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (110) are connected. In accordance with a signal from the main control means (110), a special symbol, the number of reserved memories for lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of jackpot game, the ordinary symbol, the number of reserved memories for lottery corresponding to the ordinary symbol. A display device (59) for displaying any one of the LEDs (4045) by a display device (59), wherein the display device (59) is a display substrate on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045) are surface-mounted. (4200) and a cover member (4202) that covers the front surface of the display substrate (4200) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045) are mounted, the cover member (4202) being the cover. A window (4206) that penetrates the material (4202) in the front and back and is formed corresponding to the LED (4045) is defined, and the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the window (4206) is defined by the window (4206). ) Has a window defining portion (4212) that can be distinguished from each other, and the front surface of the cover member (4202) is matched with the shape of a region of the front surface of the cover member (4202) where the window (4206) is opened. The formed identification means (4220, 5120) is attached, and the identification means (4220, 5120) surrounds the first region (4222, 5126, 5132) arranged on the front side of the window (4206), A second region (4224, 5128, 5134) that is less likely to transmit light is provided, and the window () is formed through the first region (4222, 5126, 5132). 4206), the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the display substrate (4200) is difficult to remove from the cover member (4202) of the display means (59), and the display substrate (4200). ) And the cover member (4202) are difficult to reassemble, or a trace of removal remains on either the cover member (4202) or the display substrate (4200) when the display means (59) is disassembled. It is characterized in that it is configured as follows.

  By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control means (110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (110) are connected. In accordance with a signal from the main control means (110), a special symbol, the number of reserved memories for lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of jackpot game, the ordinary symbol, the number of reserved memories for lottery corresponding to the ordinary symbol. A display device (59) for displaying any one of the LEDs (4045) by a display device (59), wherein the display device (59) is a display substrate on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045) are surface-mounted. (4200), a cover member (4202) covering the front surface of the display substrate (4200) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045) are mounted, and the display member housed in the cover member (4202). A protective member (4204) for covering the rear surface of the plate (4200), the cover member (4202) penetrating the cover member (4202) back and forth and a window formed corresponding to the LED (4045). (4206) is divided, and the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the window (4206) is configured to be distinguishable for each of the windows (4206), and the window defining section (4212) is provided. 4202) and the protection member (4204), the cover member (4202) and the engagement portion (4214) provided on one of the protection member (4204), the cover member (4202) and the protection member (4204). ) Is fitted and combined with an engagement receiving portion (4216) provided on the other side of the cover member (4216), and the cover member (4) is difficult to dismount from each other, difficult to reassemble, or disassembled. 202) and characterized by being configured to as traces of removal remains one of the protective member (4204).

  By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control means (110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (110) are connected. In accordance with a signal from the main control means (110), a special symbol, the number of reserved memories for lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of jackpot game, the ordinary symbol, the number of reserved memories for lottery corresponding to the ordinary symbol. A display device (59) for displaying any one of the LEDs (4045) by a display device (59), wherein the display device (59) is a display substrate on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045) are surface-mounted. (4200) and a cover member (4202) that covers the front surface of the display substrate (4200) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045) are mounted, the cover member (4202) being the cover member (4202). The member (4202) is penetrated back and forth and a window (4206) formed corresponding to the LED (4045) is defined, and the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the window (4206) is defined by the window (4206). ), The window defining portion (4212) and the window defining portion (4212) facing the front surface of the display substrate (4200) so as to project rearward from the rear surface thereof. The display substrate (4200) with respect to the cover member (4202) by being integrally formed with the portion (4212) and fitted in the substrate hole (4400) formed in the display substrate (4200). The display substrate (4200) is difficult to remove from the cover member (4202) of the display means (59), and the display substrate (42). 0) and the cover member (4202) are difficult to reassemble, or when the display means (59) is disassembled, there is a trace of removal on either the cover member (4202) or the display substrate (4200). It is characterized in that it is configured to remain.

  By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control means (110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (110) are connected. In accordance with a signal from the main control means (110), a special symbol, the number of reserved memories for lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of jackpot game, the ordinary symbol, the number of reserved memories for lottery corresponding to the ordinary symbol. A display device (59) for displaying any one of the LEDs (4045) by a display device (59), wherein the display device (59) is a display substrate on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045) are surface-mounted. (4200), a cover member (4202) covering the front surface of the display substrate (4200) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045) are mounted, and surface-mounted on the display substrate (4200), A current limiting means (4500) for controlling the current supplied to a number of LEDs (4045), the cover member (4202) penetrating the cover member (4202) forward and backward and the LEDs ( 4045), a window (4206) formed corresponding to the window (4206) is defined, and the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the window (4206) can be distinguished for each window (4206). 4212), the display means (59) is difficult to remove the display substrate (4200) from the cover member (4202), and the display substrate (4200) and the cover member (4202) are reassembled. Difficult, or when the display means (59) is disassembled, a trace of removal remains on either the cover member (4202) or the display substrate (4200) Characterized in that was.

  By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control means (110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (110) are connected. In accordance with a signal from the main control means (110), a special symbol, the number of reserved memories for lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of jackpot game, the ordinary symbol, the number of reserved memories for lottery corresponding to the ordinary symbol. A display device (59) for displaying any one of the LEDs (4045) by a display device (59), wherein the display device (59) is a display substrate on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045) are surface-mounted. (4200) and a cover member (4202) that covers the front surface of the display substrate (4200) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045) are mounted, the cover member (4202) being the cover member (4202). The member (4202) is penetrated back and forth and a window (4206) formed corresponding to the LED (4045) is defined, and the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the window (4206) is defined by the window (4206). ) Has a window defining part (4212) that can be distinguished for each, and the main control means (110) is supplied to the plurality of LEDs (4045) surface-mounted on the display substrate (4200). Current limiting means (4500, 4500) for controlling the current flowing through the display substrate (4), the display substrate (4200) is difficult to remove from the cover member (4202), 4200) and the cover member (4202) are difficult to reassemble, or the cover member (4202) and the display substrate (4200) when the display means (59) is disassembled. Characterized either by being configured as a trace of removal remains in the.

  By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, The display unit includes a determination unit that determines whether or not to execute a game, and a display unit (first game information display device) that can display a state related to the state of the game based on the determination. A display substrate (first display substrate) on which an LED for performing the status display is surface-mounted; and a cover member (first cover member) that accommodates the display substrate. An identification means (sheet that has a window defining portion that defines a window through which the LED can be viewed, is provided so as to cover the front side of the window, and can identify the state of the LED corresponding to the window. ), The display substrate is the cover. Characterized by being configured to be accommodated in the cover member so difficult detachable from member.

  By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine capable of executing the special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, A first display unit (first game information display device) capable of performing a state display (variable display, hold display, right hitting display) related to the state, and performing the state display separately from the first display unit And a second display unit (second game information display device) capable of performing, the first display unit includes a first display substrate on which an LED for performing the state display is surface-mounted, and the first display unit. A first cover member accommodating a display substrate, the first cover member having a window defining portion defining a window through which the LED is visible, and covering the front side of the window. An identification hand that is provided on the window and can identify the state of the LED corresponding to the window. (Sheet), the first display substrate is housed in the first cover member so as to be difficult to attach and detach from the first cover member, and the second display unit has an LED for performing the status display. A second display board mounted on the second display board; and a second cover member provided on the front surface of the second display board. It is characterized in that the above-mentioned status display is performed by the notation, the lighting / blinking mode, and the number of LEDs.

  By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to grasp the information regarding the game.

  Further, in the conventional gaming machine (for example, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-208143), when a game ball enters the starting area, a random number for a lottery as to whether or not to win the special game is stored as a hold. Then, when the preset starting condition is satisfied, the hold is read and the special game lottery is performed. When the special game is won by the special game lottery, the special game is executed. Further, based on the special game lottery result, a production image composed of various moving images and still images is displayed on the production display unit, and the production accessory device is moved to enliven the game of the player. Is the mainstream. Further, in order to inform the player of the information regarding the game, the effect display section displays the information regarding the game. By the way, in recent game machines, the performance accessory device is upsized, and it may be difficult to visually recognize the information about the game by covering the effect display unit when the game machine is moving. There was a problem that it became difficult to grasp.

As a first configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board) for controlling the progress of the game, and control information from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with a sub-control means (sub-control board) for controlling the effect based on, the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition, Judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, fluctuation display means for displaying fluctuation in the fluctuation display area based on the result of the judgment, and the judgment is not made. A storage unit that stores the determination information as a hold storage, a pre-determination unit that determines in advance whether or not to execute the special game, and a hold display corresponding to the number of the hold storage in a first hold display area (special symbol on hold 1 hold display means for displaying on one display unit), and the display result displayed in the variable display area is one type of lost display result in which the special game is not executed, and the special game is executed. There are a plurality of types of special display results, the sub-control means, the second hold display area (special symbol hold second display) the hold display corresponding to the number of the hold display displayed in the first hold display area. And a second hold display means for displaying in a third hold display area (first image display device) that is easier to see than the second hold display area, and the second based on the result of the preliminary determination. 2 hold changing means for changing the display mode of the hold display displayed by the 2 hold display means, the hold changing means does not change the display mode of the hold display displayed in the second hold display area, The third hold Hold display of the display mode displayed on the display region is characterized by changing.

  By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to grasp the information regarding the game.

As a second configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the acquisition condition is obtained in the gaming machine capable of executing the special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The storage unit (main control board) that stores the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the above as a reserved storage, and the determination unit (the main unit that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information). Control board), a variable display means (main control board) for performing variable display in the variable display area (special symbol first display) based on the result of the determination, and whether or not to execute the special game is determined in advance. Predetermination means (main control board), hold display means (main control board, effect control board) for displaying a hold display according to the number of the hold storages in the hold display area, and based on the result of the predetermination, Change the display mode of the hold display The holding change means for (production control board) is provided, and the holding display area is a first holding display area (special symbol holding first display) and a second holding display area (special symbol holding second display). And a third hold display area (first image display device) in which the hold display is easier to see than the first hold display area and the second hold display area. Although the specific display corresponding to the variable display (display of the variable icon) is not performed in the 2 hold display area, the specific display is performed in the third hold display area, and the hold changing unit is configured to perform the first hold. The display mode of the hold display displayed in the display area and the second hold display area is not changed, but the display mode of the hold display displayed in the third hold display area is changed.

  By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to grasp the information regarding the game.

As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, a game ball A first starting area (first starting opening) and a second starting area (second starting opening) provided in the game area where the water can flow down, and determination information acquired by entering the first starting area (special figure Storage means (main control board) for storing the determination information) as the first reserved memory, and the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by entering the second starting area as the second reserved memory. And, the determination means (main control board) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the variable display in the first variable display area (special symbol first display) based on the result of the determination. First variation display means (main control board) for performing the Second variation display means (production control board) for performing variation display in the second variation display area (special symbol second display) so as to correspond to variation display in the dynamic display area, and whether or not to execute the special game Pre-determination means (main control board) for determining whether or not in advance, hold display means (main control board, performance control board) for displaying a hold display according to the number of the hold storages in a hold display area, and the pre-determination Hold changing means (effect control board) for changing the display mode of the hold display based on the result of (1), and the first change display corresponding to the first hold storage is performed in the second change display area. Display area for the first variation display (first special symbol second display), and a second variation display area for performing the second variation display corresponding to the second reserved memory (second special symbol second display) In the display area for the first fluctuation display. The first variation display and the second variation display in the second variation display display area can be distinguished, and the hold display area is a first hold display area (special symbol hold first indicator), A second hold display area (special symbol hold second display), a third hold display area (first image display device) in which the hold display is easier to see than the first hold display area and the second hold display area And the hold changing means does not change the display mode of the hold display displayed in the first hold display area and the second hold display area, but is displayed in the third hold display area. The display mode of the hold display is changed.

  By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to grasp the information regarding the game.

As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, a game ball A storage area that stores the start area (first start opening, second start opening) provided in the game area in which is allowed to flow, and the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by entering the start area as reserved storage. Means (main control board), judgment means (main control board) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a first variable display area (special symbol first based on the result of the judgment) (1) display in the first variable display means (main control board) for performing variable display, and in the second variable display area (special symbol second display) to correspond to the variable display in the first variable display area Second variation display means (display control board) for displaying , A pre-determination means (main control board) for pre-determining whether or not to execute the special game, and a hold display means (main control board, effect) for displaying a hold display according to the number of the hold memories in a hold display area Control board), and a hold change means (effect control board) for changing the display mode of the hold display based on the result of the preliminary determination, and the first variable display area (special symbol first display), The mode (size, number of LEDs, shape) of the second variable display area (special symbol second indicator) is made different, and the reserved display area is the first reserved display area (special symbol reserved first indicator). And, a second hold display area (special symbol hold second display), a third hold display area (first image display) where the hold display is easier to see than the first hold display area and the second hold display area. Apparatus), and the holding change means is The display form of the hold display displayed in the first hold display region and the second hold display region is not changed, but the display form of the hold display displayed in the third hold display region is changed. .

  By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to grasp the information regarding the game.

As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, a game ball A storage area that stores the start area (first start opening, second start opening) provided in the game area in which is allowed to flow, and the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by entering the start area as reserved storage. Means (main control board), judgment means (main control board) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a first variable display area (special symbol first based on the result of the judgment) (Display) first variation display means (main control board) for performing variable display of symbols, and second variation display area (special symbol second indicator) so as to correspond to variation display in the first variation display area. Second variation display means (variable display) Control board), a third variable display means for performing variable effect accompanied by variable display of symbols in the third variable display area (first image display device) based on the result of the determination, and whether or not to execute the special game Pre-determination means (main control board) for pre-determining, and a hold display means (main control board, production control board) for displaying a hold display according to the number of the hold storages in the hold display area; Hold change means (effect control board) for changing the display mode of the hold display based on the result, and when the specific effect (SP reach etc.) is executed in the change effect, the second change display area is displayed. Although the size of the symbol displayed does not change, the size of the symbol displayed in the third variable display region changes, and the reserved display region is the first reserved display region (special symbol reserved first indicator). And the second hold display area (special A pattern hold second display), and a third hold display area (first image display device) in which the hold display is easier to see than the first hold display area and the second hold display area, The hold changing means does not change the display form of the hold display displayed in the first hold display region and the second hold display region, but the display form of the hold display displayed in the third hold display region is It is characterized by changing.

  By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to grasp the information regarding the game.

As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board) for controlling the progress of the game, and control information from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with a sub control means (sub control board) for controlling the effect based on, the main control means is obtained by entering a starting area provided in a game area where a game ball can flow down. Based on the determination information, determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a first variable display area (special symbol first display) based on the result of the determination. First variation display means for performing variable display at, storage means for storing the determination information that has not been determined as pending storage, and pre-determination means for pre-determining whether or not to execute the special game, In the number of the pending storage The first holding display means for displaying the corresponding holding display in the first holding display area (special symbol holding first display), and the starting area, the first flow-down area (left side area) of the game area A first starting area (first starting opening) in which a flowing game ball can enter, and a second starting area (second in which a game ball flowing in a second falling area (right side area) of the game area can enter Starting port), and the sub-control means, based on the result of the determination, the second variation display area (special symbol second display) to perform variation display, and the first hold A second hold display area (special symbol hold second indicator), and a hold display corresponding to the number of hold displays displayed in the display area, and a third hold display area that is easier to see than the second hold display area. The second hold display means to be displayed on the (image display device) and the result of the preliminary determination. And a hold changing means for changing the display mode of the hold display displayed by the second hold display means, wherein the second variable display area is a first change area based on a ball entering the first starting area. 1 variation display area (1st special symbol second display) where 1 variation display is performed, and 2nd variation display area where 2nd variation display is performed based on the entry into the 2nd starting area (The second special symbol second display), and, the second display area for variable display is arranged closer to the second downflow region than the first downflow region, the pending change means, The display form of the hold display displayed in the second hold display region is not changed, but the display form of the hold display displayed in the third hold display region is changed.

  Further, in a gaming machine provided with a main control means (main control board) for controlling the progress of the game and a sub control means (sub control board) for controlling the effect based on the control information from the main control means, Whether or not the main control means executes a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player based on the determination information obtained by entering the starting area provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down. Determination means, first variation display means for performing variation display in the first variation display area (special symbol first display) based on the result of the determination, and the determination information for which the determination has not been performed is suspended. Storage means for storing as memory, pre-determination means for pre-determining whether or not to execute the special game, and a hold display corresponding to the number of the hold storage in a first hold display area (special symbol hold first display device) ) Displayed in A first hold display means, and the starting area is a first starting area (first starting opening) into which a game ball flowing down a first falling area (left side area) of the game area can enter, A second starting area (second starting opening) into which a game ball flowing down a second falling area (right side area) of the game area can enter, and the sub-control means is based on the result of the determination. The second variable display means for performing variable display in the second variable display area (special symbol second display), and the second hold display corresponding to the number of the hold displays displayed in the first hold display area. Area (special symbol hold second display), and second hold display means for displaying in a third hold display area (image display device) that is easier to see than the second hold display area, and the result of the preliminary determination Based on the display state of the hold display displayed by the second hold display means. And a second change display area, wherein the second change display area is a display area for the first change display in which the first change display based on a ball entering the first starting area is performed (first special symbol first 2 display device), and a display region for second fluctuation display (second special symbol second display device) in which a second fluctuation display is performed based on a ball entering the second starting region, and the second The variable display area is arranged closer to the second flow-down area than the first variable display area, and the hold changing means is configured to display the hold display in the second hold display area. Although not changed, the display mode of the hold display displayed in the third hold display area is changed.

  By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to grasp the information regarding the game.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and can also be used in a spinning drum type gaming machine (so-called slot machine). Furthermore, it can also be used in a Jikyu ball game machine and an Arrange ball game machine.

  It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplifications in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

1 gaming machine 5 gaming board 43 general winning opening 43a general winning opening detection switch 44 universal figure gate 44a gate detection switch 45 first starting opening 45a first starting opening detecting switch 47 second starting opening 47a second starting opening detecting switch 50 large Winning hole 50a Big winning hole detection switch 70 First image display device (main liquid crystal)
71 Second image display device (sub liquid crystal)
110 main control board 110a main CPU
110b Main ROM
110c Main RAM
120 payout control board 130 production control board 130a sub CPU
130b Sub ROM
130c Sub RAM

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player,
Determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game,
A first display unit that executes variable display for displaying the result of the determination;
A second display unit which is provided separately from the first display unit and which starts and stops the changing display in response to the start and stop of the variable display on the first display unit;
In the first display section, wherein the variable display is performed by changing a plurality of times lighting positions of the plurality of LED,
Before SL In the second display section, the display in the variation is performed by blinking a plurality of times one LED during execution of the variable display,
A gaming machine characterized in that the lighting cycle of the LED in the changing display on the second display section is made slower than the changing cycle of the lighting position of the LED in the fluctuation display on the first display section.